Today's Hours: 8:00am - 6:00pm

Books

  • Digital
    edited by Deepak Gaur, Chetan E. Chitnis, Virander S. Chauhan.
    Contents:
    Introduction & overview of malaria and plasmodium / Virander S. Chauhan, Chetan E. Chitnis, Deepak Gaur
    Exoerythrocytic development of plasmodium parasites / Volker T. Heussler, Annika Rennenberg, and Rebecca R. Stanway
    Molecular basis of erythrocyte invasion by plasmodium merozoites / Deepak Gaur, Chetan E. Chitnis, Virander S. Chauhan
    The biology of malaria transmission / Robert E. Sinden
    Comparative and functional genomics of malaria parasites / Martine M. Zilversmit, Sittiporn Pattaradilokrat, and Xin-zhuan Su
    Gene regulation : new insights and possible intervention strategies / Artur Scherf, Nicholas A. Malmquist, Rafael M. Martins, Shruthi S. Vembar, and Jose-Juan Lopez-Rubio
    Molecular genetic approaches to malaria research / Brendan Elsworth, Mauro F. Azevedo, Brendan S. Crabb, and Paul R. Gilson
    Transcriptomics and proteomics / Archna P. Gupta, Zbynek Bozdech, and Peter R. Preiser
    The biochemistry of plasmodium falciparum : an updated overview / Hagai Ginsburg
    Signaling in malaria parasites / Pushkar Sharma, and Sudhir Kumar
    Membrane transport proteins as therapeutic targets in malaria / Sanjay A. Desai, Kempaiah Rayavara, Paresh Sharma, Sayeed K. Syed, Wang Nguitragool, and Praveen Balabaskaran Nina
    The proteolytic repertoire of malaria parasites / Puran Singh Sijwali, and Philip J. Rosenthal
    Development of medicines for the control and elimination of malaria / Jeremy N. Burrows, and Timothy N.C. Wells
    Antimalarial drug resistance / Naman K. Shah, and Neena Valecha
    Epidemiology of plasmodium falciparum malaria / Alberto L. García-Basteiro, Quique Bassat, and Pedro L. Alonso
    Malaria pathogenesis / Bronner P. Gonzalves, Michal Fried, and Patrick E. Duffy
    Host genetics / Thomas N. Williams
    The immune response in mild and severe malaria : two sides of the same coin / Michael Waisberg, Peter D. Crompton, Louis H. Miller, and Susan K. Pierce
    Progress in development of malaria vaccines / Chetan E. Chitnis, Deepak Gaur, and Virander S. Chauhan
    Plasmodium vivax : insights on burden and patho-biology / Ivo Mueller, Quique Bassat, Marcus V.G. Lacerda, and Hernando A. del Portillo.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Bennie H. Jeng, editor.
    Summary: This book presents up-to-date information on the diagnosis and management of the spectrum of medical and surgical corneal diseases, with a special focus on new technology. The latest tools for diagnosing ocular surface disease, infectious keratitis, and ocular allergies are discussed, along with novel treatment options for these entities. The impact of progress in imaging and contact lens technology on the management of corneal conditions is fully described, and the efficacy of corneal collagen crosslinking for keratoconus and corneal ectasia is evaluated. Detailed attention is devoted to the latest surgical techniques, including lamellar keratoplasty, endothelial keratoplasty, keratoprosthesis, and laser-assisted penetrating keratoplasty. In addition, the role of the eye bank in facilitating corneal procedures is explained. Advances in Medical and Surgical Cornea is written by leading authorities who share a passion for effective, cutting-edge care. It will be invaluable for both experienced ophthalmologists and trainees.

    Contents:
    Diagnosis and treatment of ocular surface disease
    Diagnosis and treatment of infectious keratitis (PCR, Confocal)
    Diagnosis and treatment of ocular allergies
    Imaging techniques for corneal disorders (non-infectious: KCN, ectasias: Pentacam, Schleimpflug, confocal, etc)
    Contact lens technology for treatment of severe ocular surface disease and corneal ectasias
    Collagen crosslinking for keratoconus
    Anterior lamellar keratoplasty
    Endothelial keratoplasty (DSEK and DMEK)
    Keratoprosthesis (Boston and OOKP)
    Laser assisted keratoplasty and post-keratoplasty management (AK?s)
    Eye Banking: what the eye bank can do for you now (DMEK harvesting, Pre-cut, FLAK). .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Raj Bawa, Esther H. Chang, Gerald F. Audette, Anil Diwan, Saadia A. Faiz.
    Summary: The pace and sophistication of advances in medicine in the past two decades have necessitated a growing need for a comprehensive reference that highlights current issues in medicine. Each volume in the Current Issues in Medicine series is a stand⁰́₀alone text that provides a broad survey of various critical topics⁰́₄all accomplished in a user-friendly yet interconnected format. The series not only highlights current advances but also explores related topics such as translational medicine, regulatory science, neglected diseases, global pandemics, patent law, immunotoxicology, ethics, theranostics, big data, artificial intelligence, novel imaging tools, combination drug products, and novel therapies. While bridging the gap between basic research, medicine, engineering, FDA law, intellectual property law, and regulatory science, the series provides a thorough understanding of medicine's potential to address health problems from both the patient⁰́₉s and the provider's perspectives in a healthcare setting. The range of topics covered, and the expertise of the contributing authors accurately reflect the rapidly evolving areas within medicine⁰́₄from basic medical sciences to clinical specialties. Current Issues in Medicine is essential reading for physicians, medical students, nurses, fellows, residents, undergraduate and graduate students, educators, policymakers, and biomedical researchers. The book⁰́₉s multidisciplinary approach makes it a valuable reference resource for the pharmaceutical industry, academia, and governments globally. However, unlike other series on medicine or medical textbooks, this series focuses on current trends, perspectives, and issues in medicine that are central to healthcare delivery in the 21st century.Volumes 1 and 2 in this series are focused on the current issues in basic medical science, subjects that are fundamental to the practice of medicine. These subjects are traditionally taught in the first two years of medical school that precede clinical instruction and training. They provide a core of basic knowledge critical to the success in clinical medicine during rotations through surgery, internal medicine, and the other specialties of medicine. Obviously, knowledge gleaned from these subjects leads to better ways to predict, prevent, diagnose, and treat disease. Specifically, volume 1 covers biochemistry, genomics, physiology, and pharmacology. Clinical specialties are covered in Volume 3. Volume 4 is directed towards diagnosis and imaging techniques, volume 5 focuses on drug delivery, and volume 6 highlights novel therapeutics and clinical applications.

    Contents:
    Cover
    Half Title
    Title Page
    Copyright Page
    Dedication
    Table of Contents
    Corresponding Authors
    Note from the Series Editor
    Engraving of the Bust of Hippocrates
    Papyrus Fragment Showing the Hippocratic Oath
    Facade of the Temple of Asclepius
    Chapter 1: The Age of COVID-19: Medical Facts and Fiction
    1.1: Emerging Pathogens: A Clear and Present Danger
    1.2: SARS-CoV-2: Structure and Pathogenesis
    1.3: Origin of SARS-CoV-2: A Chinese Lab Leak?
    1.4: Vaccines, Herd Immunity, Transmissibility, and SARS-CoV-2 Variants
    1.5: Vaccine Passports: A Bad Government Idea
    1.6: COVID-19 Testing
    1.7: Convalescent Plasma
    1.8: Looking Back and Moving Forward: Will We Win?
    Section 1: Medical Biochemistry and Genomics
    Chapter 2: Role of Engineered Proteins as Therapeutic Formulations
    2.1: Introduction
    2.2: Protein Engineering Approaches
    2.3: Protein Therapeutics
    2.4: Protein-Based Scaffolds for Therapeutic Applications
    2.5: Concluding Remarks
    Chapter 3: How Physical and Chemical Information Predicts the Action of Molecules: A Historical Overview
    3.1: A Definition for Pharmacology and Toxicology
    3.2: Entities Do Not Act Unless Attached
    3.3: The Language of Chemical Attachment
    3.4: Types of Drugs and Their Actions
    Chapter 4: Three-Dimensional Chromatin in Infectious Disease: A Role for Gene Regulation and Pathogenicity?
    4.1: Introduction
    4.2: Conclusions
    Chapter 5: Aptamers, the Nucleic Acid Antibodies, in Cancer Therapy
    5.1: Introduction
    5.2: General Properties of Aptamers
    5.3: Advantages and Limitations of Aptamers
    5.4: Principle and Procedure of SELEX
    5.5: Aptamers in Cancer Therapy
    5.6: Cancer Therapy Aptamers in Clinical Trials
    5.7: Conclusions
    Chapter 6: Identifying Genetic Markers Associated with Susceptibility to Cardiovascular Diseases. 6.1: Methods
    6.2: Diet and CVD Risk
    6.3: Inherited Genetic Susceptibility
    6.4: Pharmacogenetics and Future Potential
    6.5: Conclusion
    6.6: Future Perspective
    Chapter 7: Production and Application of Multicistronic Constructs for Various Human Disease Therapies
    7.1: Introduction
    7.2: IRES
    7.3: Self-Cleaving 2A Peptides
    7.4: Multicistronic Vectors for Neurodegenerative Disease Therapy
    7.5: Multicistronic Vectors for Metabolic Disease Therapy
    7.6: Multicistronic Vectors for the Treatment of Autoimmune Diseases
    7.7: Multicistronic Vectors for Cardiovascular Disease Therapy
    7.8: Multicistronic Vectors for Cancer Therapy
    7.9: Multicistronic Vectors for the Prevention of Viral and Bacterial Infections
    7.10: Conclusions and Future Perspectives
    Chapter 8: The Nuclear Lamina: Protein Accumulation and Disease
    8.1: Introduction
    8.2: Basic Structure and Function of the Nuclear Lamina
    8.3: Hutchinson-Gilford Progeria Syndrome: A Protein Accumulation Disease of the Nuclear Lamina?
    8.4: Lamina-Associated Protein Accumulation in Neurodegenerative Disease
    8.5: Mechanisms of Protein Clearance from the Lamina
    8.6: Autophagy and Nucleophagy-Mediated Clearance of Lamina Proteins
    8.7: Mechanisms Marking Proteins for Removal from the Lamina
    8.8: Promoting Lamina Protein Clearance
    8.9: Concluding Remarks
    Chapter 9: The Importance of Protein Post-Translational Modifications in the Pathogenesis and Progression of Neurodegenerative Diseases
    9.1: Introduction
    9.2: Methods
    9.3: Results
    9.4: Discussion
    Chapter 10: DNA Damage/Repair Management in Cancers
    10.1: Introduction
    10.2: Types of DNA Damage
    10.3: DNA Damage Response
    10.4: Components of the DNA Damage Response
    10.5: DDR and Disease Treatment
    10.6: DNA Repair Pathways. 10.7: Cell Cycle as a Checkpoint in DNA Damage
    10.8: Effects of Chemotherapy or Radiation in Cancer Treatments
    10.9: Potential Biomarkers of Chromosomal Abnormalities
    10.10: Clonal Evolution in Cancer
    10.11: Conclusions
    Chapter 11: Advancing Clinical Cohort Selection with Genomics Analysis on a Distributed Platform
    11.1: Introduction
    11.2: Materials and Methods
    11.3: Results
    11.4: Discussion
    11.5: Conclusion
    Chapter 12: Pharmacogenomics of Tamoxifen
    12.1: What Is Tamoxifen?
    12.2: Why Is Pharmacogenomics of Tamoxifen Important?
    12.3: The Controversy in the Tamoxifen-CYP2D6 Study
    12.4: Future Direction of Tamoxifen Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 13: Nanocrystals: The Universal Formulation Principle to Improve the Bioactivity of Poorly Soluble Actives
    13.1: Introduction
    13.2: First Generation of Drug Nanocrystals
    13.3: SmartCrystals: Advantages of the Second Generation
    13.4: Conclusion and Perspectives
    Chapter 14: Cellular Mechanisms of Human Atherogenesis: Focus on Chronification of Inflammation and Mitochondrial Mutations
    14.1: Introduction
    14.2: Cellular Mechanisms of Atherogenesis
    14.3: Variants of the Nuclear Genome Associated with Atherosclerosis
    14.4: Variants of Mitochondrial Genome Associated with Atherosclerosis
    14.5: Role of Mitochondrial Mutations in Cellular Mechanism of Atherosclerosis
    Chronification of Inflammtion
    14.6: Conclusions
    Chapter 15: Vitamin D Pathway and the Pathogenesis of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    15.1: Introduction
    15.2: Results
    15.3: Discussion
    15.4: Materials and Methods
    Chapter 16: The Structural Ensemble of the Conjugative F-like T4SS
    16.1: Introduction
    16.2: Regulation of Bacterial Conjugation
    16.3: Structures Involved in Pilin Processing, Pilus Extension, and Retraction. 16.4: Mating Pair Stabilization Proteins and the Dynamics of Their Structural Ensemble
    16.5: The Structures of Conjugative DNA Transfer Proteins
    16.6: Surface and Entry Exclusion Proteins
    16.7: Conclusions
    Chapter 17: Polygenic Risk-Tailored Screening for Prostate Cancer: A Benefit-Harm and Cost-Effectiveness Modelling Study
    17.1: Introduction
    17.2: Methods
    17.3: Results
    17.4: Discussion
    17.5: Conclusion
    Chapter 18: Apoptotic Bodies: Particular Extracellular Vesicles Involved in Intercellular Communication
    18.1: Introduction
    18.2: Apoptosis
    18.3: Extracellular Vesicles, Other than Apoptotic Bodies
    18.4: Apoptotic Bodies
    18.5: Conclusions
    Section 2: Human Physiology and Pathology
    Chapter 19: Circulating Tumor Cells and Personalized Medicine
    19.1: Metastasis and Circulating Tumor Cells
    19.2: Enrichment and Detection of CTCs
    19.3: Clinical Implications of CTC Detection and Enumeration
    19.4: Molecular Characterization of CTC and Personalized Medicine
    19.5: Summary
    Chapter 20: Pathology in the Era of Personalized Medicine
    20.1: Why Is the Role of Pathologists in Personalized Medicine Important?
    20.2: Practical Guidance for Molecular Pathology
    20.3: Next-Generation Sequencing and the Pathologist
    20.4: Conclusions
    Chapter 21: Speech Intelligibility during Clinical and Low Frequency
    21.1: Introduction
    21.2: Methods
    21.3: Results
    21.4: Discussion
    Chapter 22: Physiological Renormalization Using Systems Therapeutics
    Chapter 23: Pathology Is Always Around Us: Apophenia in Pathology, a Remarkable Unreported Phenomenon
    Chapter 24: The Secrets of the Mediterranean Diet. Does [Only] Olive Oil Matter?
    24.1: Introduction
    24.2: Definition and Composition of Mediterranean Diet
    24.3: Mediterranean Diet and Diet Diversity. 24.4: Mediterranean Diet Contribution to Immunomodulation
    24.5: Summary
    Chapter 25: Relationship between Diet, Microbiota, and Healthy Aging
    25.1: Introduction
    25.2: Interplay between Aging and Microbiota
    25.3: The Influence of Nutrition on the Microbiota and Aging
    25.4: Conclusions
    Chapter 26: Does Low-Density Lipoprotein Cholesterol Induce Inflammation? If So, Does It Mater? Current Insights and Future Perspectives for Novel Therapies
    26.1: Background
    26.2: Cross-Talk between Dyslipidemia and Immunity
    26.3: Inflammatory Biomarkers and Atherosclerosis
    26.4: Lipid-Lowering Treatment and Anti-Inflammation: Is There a Causal Relationship?
    26.5: Inflammation as a Novel Therapeutic Target for Atherosclerotic CV Disease: Insights from Recent Clinical Trials
    26.6: (Cholesterol-Induced) Inflammation, Diseases Other Than Atherosclerosis, and Effects of Cholesterol Lowering by Statins
    26.7: Residual Inflammatory Risk versus Residual Cholesterol Risk: No More Coin Flipping
    26.8: Discussion
    26.9: Conclusions
    Chapter 27: Role of Biomarkers in Clinical Development of Cancer Therapies
    27.1: Introduction
    27.2: A Few Definitions and General Concepts
    27.3: Role of Biomarkers in the Different Stages of Drug Development
    27.4: Conclusions and Future Directions
    Chapter 28: In Sickness and Health: Effects of Gut Microbial Metabolites on Human Physiology
    28.1: The Impact of Gut Bacterial Metabolites on Host Physiology
    28.2: Metabolism of Drugs and Other Xenobiotics by Gut Microbes
    28.3: A Way Forward in the Search for Beter Therapeutics
    Chapter 29: Current Methodologies Utilized in the Conduct of Randomized Clinical Trials
    29.1: Utilization of Control
    29.2: Placebo Control
    29.3: Sham Procedures
    29.4: Randomization
    29.5: Methods of Randomization
    29.6: Conclusion and Future Perspective
    Chapter 30: The Prion-Like Phenomenon in Alzheimer's Disease: Evidence of Pathology Transmission in Humans.
    Digital Access TandFonline [2021]
  • Digital
    Yu Cao, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews recent advances regarding the biochemical and biophysical properties of membrane proteins and their applications in biomedicine. Divided into two thematic parts, this second volume addresses proteins' formation, signaling and malfunctions. It covers a number of important membrane proteins including receptors, cell adhesion molecules, single-transmembrane proteins and viral membrane proteins, and discusses their structures, functions, related diseases, and roles in drug discovery in detail. In turn, the book elucidates the lifecycle of membrane proteins, including their synthesis and facilitated folding process, as well as QC procedures for their production. Additional topics include fundamental concepts, the latest findings, and critical puzzles yet to be solved. Given its scope, the book will appeal to a broad readership in the field of membrane structural and functional biology. Junior scientists can use it as an introduction to the field, while advanced scientists will find a broader view of the field beyond their area of specialization.

    Contents:
    Lipid Homeostasis on Cell Membrane
    A Historical Perspective of G Protein-Coupled Receptor Structural Biology
    Membrane Proteins as Targets for Biological Drugs
    Cell Adhesion Molecules
    The Biosynthesis and Folding of Oily Peptide Chains
    Mechanism of Quality Control of Nascent Membrane Proteins.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yu Cao, editor.
    Summary: The book summarizes advances in biochemical and biophysical property of membrane proteins as well as their applications in biomedicine. It is organised into 2 themed parts. The first volume focuses on mass processing and transportation and provides deep and comprehensive information on specific groups of membrane proteins including channels and transporters, nuclear and cytoplasmic membrane proteins, and membrane embedded enzymes. Their structures, functions, related diseases as well as their roles in drug discovery are fully discussed. Interesting topics cover fundamental concepts, latest progress and critical puzzles yet to be solved. This work will appeal to a wide readership within the membrane structural and functional biology field. Junior scientists could use it to fast track into the field. Advanced scientists will find it helpful to gain a broader view of the field beyond their area of specialization.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Membrane As the Barrier of Life
    Chapter 2: Ion Channels
    Chapter 3: Membrane Asymmetry and Phospholipid Translocases in Eukaryotic Cells
    Chapter 4: Membrane Phospholipid Biosynthesis in Bacteria
    Chapter 5: Transport and Communication Across the Nuclear Envelope
    Chapter 6: Structural and Functional Properties of Viral Membrane Proteins.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Advances in Molecular and Cellular Endocrinology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Advances in Molecular and Cellular Microbiology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Robert L. Baran, editor.
    Summary: This book serves as a concise text on nail diseases and disorders, offering the most up to date information available from internationally recognized speakers and authors. This comprehensive guide examines a multitude of nail disease types manifestations, treatments, and complications. Chapters delve into specific disorders such as yellow nail syndrome, psoriasis, lichen planus, and brittle nails. Notable treatments covered include advances in MRI, anti-neoplastic drugs and ultrasound imaging. The book also features discussions on unique topics, such as the convergence of orthopedics and onychology in nail disease treatment, as well as treatment complications faced by distinct demographics. Going beyond basics and diving right into the heart of various diseases and disorders, Advances in Nail Disease and Management will serve to aid experienced dermatologists looking for advanced expertise information.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Yellow Nail Syndrome
    Chapter 2: Is Peri-ungual Vitiligo an Intractable Localization?
    Chapter 3: Digital Myxoid Cysts: Ganglia of the Distal Interphalangeal Joint
    Chapter 4: Advances in MRI of Glomus Tumors of the Fingertips
    Chapter 5: Trachyonychia
    Chapter 6: In vivo and ex vivo Confocal Microscopy for Nail Diseases
    Chapter 7: Innovative Gene Therapies in Nail Disorders
    Chapter 8: Toenails
    Where Orthopedics and Onychologists Meet.-Chapter 9: Recent Advances in Nails in Systemic Disease
    Chapter 10: Brittle Nails
    Chapter 11: The Nail Involvement in Leprosy and Sporotrichosis.-Chapter 12: Latest Research in Nail Psoriasis
    Chapter 13: Nail Lichen Planus.-Chapter 14: What's New in Pediatric Nail Disorders?
    Chapter 15: Nail Changes with Targeted Anti-Neoplastic Drugs
    Chapter 16: Optical Coherence Tomography in Nail Research and Diagnosis
    Chapter 17: Drug-Induced Nail Changes
    Chapter 18: Current Applications and Advances in Nail Ultrasound Imaging
    Chapter 19: Onychomycosis: Usefulness of Histomycology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Surendra Nimesh, Ramesh Chandra, Nidhi Gupta.
    Contents:
    1. Nanomedicine for delivery of therapeutic molecules
    2. Nanoparticles as nucleic acid delivery vectors
    3. Methods for charactericzation of nanoparticles
    4. Nanoparticles for DNA delivery
    5. Nanoparticles for siRNA-mediated gene silencing
    6. Nanoparticles for locked nucleic acid delivery
    7. Nanoparticles for ribozymes delivery
    8. Nanoparticles for DNAzymes delivery
    9. Pharmacokinetics and biodistribution of the nanoparticles
    10. Nanotoxicology: evaluation of toxicity potential of nanoparticles
    11. Regulatory aspects of nanoparticulate mediated nucleic acid delivery systems
    12. Clinical studies and future prospects
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    volume editors, Vyas M.N. Prasad, Marc Remacle.
    Summary: "This book aims to provide a comprehensive overview of advances in neurolaryngology, e.g., in diagnostic approaches and techniques, and therapeutic interventions, from experts in various medical specialties. It presents the increasingly common multidisciplinary approach to patients' problems, with cross discipline interaction involving otolaryngologists, neurologists, radiologists, respiratory physicians, neurophysiologists, and speech pathologists"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Vincenzo Zappia, Salvatore Panico, Gian Luigi Russo, Alfredo Budillon, Fulvio Della Ragione, editors.
    Summary: This book comprises proceedings from the Third International Conference on Advances in Nutrition and Cancer, held in Naples in May 2012. This highly multidisciplinary meeting analyzed nutrition and cancer from different perspectives and on the basis of distinct and up-to-date experimental approaches. Knowledge on the relation between lifestyle, diet, and cancer is explored in a number of contributions, and the role of dietary intervention in cancer patients is discussed. Issues of vital interest to the research community, such as epidemiological and experimental oncology (genetics, epigenetics, and the mechanisms of action of natural compounds in the diet), receive detailed consideration. A further key topic is the emerging molecular technologies (the -omics) that can cast light on the interplay between nutrition and human malignancies. Chapters take the form of reviews that include sections presenting expert opinions. Advances in Nutrition and Cancer will be an invaluable source of topical information for all researchers and clinicians with an interest in this field.

    Contents:
    Part I: Lifestyle, Diet, and Cancer
    The Role of Metabolic Carcinogenesis in Cancer Causation and Prevention: Evidence from the European Prospective Investigation into Cancer and Nutrition
    Obesity, Energy Balance, and Cancer: A Mechanistic Perspective
    Fruits and Vegetables: Updating the Epidemiologic Evidence for the WCRF/AICR Lifestyle Recommendations for Cancer Prevention
    The Diet as a Cause of Human Prostate Cancer
    Mediterranean Dietary Pattern and Chronic Diseases
    Dietary Salt Intake and Risk of Gastric Cancer
    Alcoholic Beverages and Carbonated Soft Drinks: Consumption and Gastrointestinal Cancer Risks
    Part II: Natural Dietary Molecules
    Anti-Inflammatory and Anticancer Drugs from Nature
    Selenium and Cancer: A Story that Should not be Forgotten-Insights from Genomics
    Resveratrol: From Basic Studies to Bedside
    Quercetin: A Pleiotropic Kinase Inhibitor Against Cancer
    Sulforaphane as a Promising Molecule for Fighting Cancer
    Part III: Genetics and Epigenetics
    Functions, Aberrations, and Advances for Chromatin Modulation in Cancer
    Epigenetics and Epidemiology: Models of Study and Examples
    Dietary Epigenetics in Cancer and Aging
    Breast Cancer and the Importance of Early Life Nutrition
    Part IV: Olive Oil in Cancer Prevention
    Olive Oil and Other Dietary Lipids in Breast Cancer
    A Holistic Approach to Study the Effects of Natural Antioxidants on Inflammation and Liver Cancer
    Extra Virgin Olive Oil: From Composition to "Molecular Gastronomy"
    Part V: Life Style Prevention of Cancer
    Life Style Prevention of Cancer Recurrence: The Yin and the Yang
    Part VI: Emerging Breakthroughs
    New Perspective for an Old Antidiabetic Drug: Metformin as Anticancer Agent
    Gut Microbes, Diet, and Cancer
    Inflammatory Angiogenesis and the Tumor Microenvironment as Targets for Cancer Therapy and Prevention
    Nutriomes and Personalised Nutrition for DNA Damage Prevention, Telomere Integrity Maintenance and Cancer Growth Control
    Novel Approaches in Melanoma Prevention and Therapy
    Concluding Remarks.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC268.45 .A383 2014
    1
  • Print
    Draper, H. H.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP141.A1 A3
    1
  • Digital
    Rohit Varma, Benjamin Y. Xu, Grace M. Richter, Alena Reznik, editors.
    Summary: Serving as a practical guide to the ocular imaging modalities that are currently available to eye care providers for the care of glaucoma patients, this book provides information on advances in ocular imaging and their applications in the diagnosis and management of glaucoma. Each chapter introduces the imaging modality, highlight its strengths and weaknesses for clinical care, and discuss its integration into the clinical examination and decision-making process. The chapters also provide an in-depth description of the interpretation of images from each imaging modality. When appropriate, the chapters will summarize past and ongoing research and propose future research directions and clinical applications. This title will appeal to ophthalmologists and optometrists at all levels, from trainees to experienced clinicians looking to learn new and important information.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Barer, R.; Cosslett, V. E.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    10
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Karger v. 16-, 1969-
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    16
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    35
  • Digital
    editors Bai-Chuang Shyu and Makoto Tominaga.
    Summary: This book summarizes the latest advances in pain research. All the chapters were contributed by speakers from Asian Pain Symposium (APS) on Acute and Chronic Pain, which was held in Taipei in 2017. Founded in Kyoto, Japan in 2000, the APS serves as a platform for scientists to present recent findings in pain research and discuss research orientation in this field. APS 2017 focused on novel strategies for pain treatment. Written by experts from various disciplines, from molecular to functional, and from basic to clinic studies, this book is composed of 18 review articles on the physiology and pathology of pain in these research fields. Specific topics include circuitry, neurotransmitter, physiology, behavior, neuropathology, pharmacology, and the treatments for neuropathic pain disorders. The book is a valuable resource for researchers and graduate students in pain medicine and neuroscience.

    Contents:
    Molecular mechanisms of the sense of touch: an overview of mechanical transduction and transmission in merkel discs of whisker hair follicles and some clinical perspectives / Jianguo G. Gu
    Trp channels in nociception and pathological pain / Chen-Yu Hung, Chun-Hsiang Tan
    Involvement of TRPV1-ANO1 interactions in pain-enhancing mechanisms / Y. Takayama, Makoto Tominaga
    Roles of ASICs in nociception and proprioception / Cheng-Han Lee, Chih-Cheng Chen
    Tackling pain associated with rheumatoid arthritis: proton-sensing receptors / Wei-Hsin Sun, Shih-Ping Dai
    Advances in experimental medicine and biology: intrafascicular local anesthetic injection damages peripheral nerve-induced neuropathic pain / Kuang-Yi Tseng, Hung-Chen Wang, Lin-Li Chang, Kuang-I Cheng
    Microglia in the CNS and neuropathic pain / Makoto Tsuda
    Descending noradrenergic inhibition: an important mechanism of gabapentin analgesia in neuropathic pain / Ken-ichiro Hayashida, James C. Eisenach
    Chronic neuropathic pain protects the heart from ischemia-reperfusion injury / Yi-Fen Cheng, Chien-Chang Chen
    Knowing the neuronal mechanism of spontaneous pain to treat chronic pain in the future / Xiang-Yao Li, Jing-Hua Wang, Cheng Wu
    Role of neuroinflammation in opioid tolerance: translational evidence from human-to-rodent studies / Chih-Peng Lin, Dai-Hua Lu
    Neural mechanisms of offset analgesia / Jiro Kurata
    Cortical ltp: a synaptic model for chronic pain / Min Zhuo
    Pain-associated neural plasticity in the parabrachial to central amygdala circuit / Fusao Kato, Yae K. Sugimura, Yukari Takahashi
    Electrophysiological signature of pain / Zi-Fang Zhao, You Wan
    Neuroimaging studies of primary dysmenorrhea / Intan Low, Shyh-Yuh Wei, Pin-Shiuan Lee, Wei-Chi Li, Lin-Chien Lee, Jen-Chuen Hsieh [and others]
    Brain reward circuit and pain / Moe Watanabe, Minoru Narita
    Involvement of P₂X₇ receptors and BDNF in the pathogenesis of central poststroke pain / Yung-Hui Kuan, Hsi-Chien Shih, Bai-Chuang Shyu
    Melatonin: a new-generation therapy for reducing chronic pain and improving sleep disorder-related pain / Tavleen Kaur, Bai-Chuang Shyu
    Central poststroke pain, comorbidity, and associated symptoms in animal and human models / Bai-Chuang Shyu, Andrew Chih Wei Huang.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Baker, J. R.; Dawes, Ben; Muller, R.; Rollinson, D.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    4
  • Print
    edited by Aubrey Milunsky, Emanuel A. Friedman and Louis Gluck.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
    Springer
  • Print
    edited by Rowena Korobkin, Christian Guilleminault.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ255.A37
    1
  • Digital
    Salvador Nares, editor.
    Summary: This book describes practical, contemporary, and evidence-based surgical approaches for the treatment of diseases and conditions affecting the periodontium, including advanced forms of periodontal disease, gingival recession, and complex cases requiring interdisciplinary management. The book opens by identifying key considerations in periodontal surgery, for example with regard to diagnosis and prognosis, and by presenting decision trees that will be useful in daily practice. Cutting-edge resection and regeneration techniques for the treatment of periodontitis and mucogingival surgical procedures for the management of soft tissue deficiencies are then described and illustrated in detail, highlighting important tips and tricks as well as potential difficulties and complications. The final part of the book is devoted to interdisciplinary care, which is of key importance when periodontal surgery is indicated in the management of cases requiring orthodontic, endodontic, and restorative therapy. Advances in Periodontal Surgery will be of value for practitioners at all levels of experience as well as for students entering the field.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Key Consideration of Periodontal Surgery
    The Miller McEntire Periodontal Prognostic Index
    Decision Trees in periodontal surgery: resective versus regenerative periodontal surgery
    Part 2 Resective Techniques of Periodontal Surgery
    Periodontal flap designs for access and osseous surgery
    Biologic shaping
    Lasers in periodontal surgery
    Part 3 Regenerative Techniques of Periodontal Surgery
    Videoscope assisted minimally invasive surgery (VMIS) for bone regeneration
    Regeneration of intrabony defects utilizing stem cells allograft
    Management of furcation defects
    Part 4 Mucogingival and Periodontal Plastic Surgery
    Coronally positioned flaps and tunneling
    Rationale for gingival tissue augmentation and vestibuloplasty around teeth and dental implants
    Mucogingival and periodontal plastic surgery: lateral sliding flaps
    Part 5 Interdisciplinary Management of Periodontal Surgery
    Crown lengthening and prosthetic considerations
    The adjunctive relationship between orthodontics and periodontics
    Surgically facilitated orthodontic therapy
    Management of endodontic-periodontic lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jun Zhang, Michael V. Knopp.
    Summary: This book is a guide to new and emerging PET technology, instrumentation, and its place in clinical practice. PET technology is currently moving from the conventional photomultiplier tube (PMT) detector based PET to the new generation, solid state light sensor detector. This is a technological leap and holds significant implications for the use of PET imaging. This book introduces and describes the emerging and new generation of PET instrumentations and technologies across manufactures, focusing on solid-state PET detector designs, system characteristics, and clinical practices as well as future advanced Time-of-Flight (TOF) PET technologies. Organized into three sections, the basics of PET imaging; solid state digital PET instrumentation, technology, and clinical practice; and a look to the future of PET imaging, chapters present a full picture of PET imaging, where we are and where we will be. Nuclear medicine physicians, physicists, and technologists can use this book to better understand future PET systems, novel PET technologies, and potential game changes of clinical PET practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Rita Kundu, Rajiv Narula, editors.
    Summary: Biotechnology refers to the use or manipulation of an organism or parts of an organism. While the early applications were certainly simpler (though still relevant), modern plant biotechnology is primarily associated with molecular biology, cloning and genetic engineering. Over the last 50 years, several key discoveries have revolutionized the biological sciences and enabled the rapid growth of the biotechnology industry. This book gathers handpicked articles presented by national and international scientists at the International Conference on Biotechnology and Biological Sciences, BIOSPECTRUM 2017. It highlights the works of researchers and students in India and abroad on plant biotechnology and its applications in addressing various agricultural and food production-related issues. The respective papers explore a range of advances in plant biotechnology, e.g.: the cytotoxic potential of Moringaoleifera lam; the use of the entomo-pathogenic fungi Cordyceps sp. as unique and valuable sources of bioactive compounds; and strain improvement strategies for Cordyceps sp. In addition, they discuss the use of low-cost blue green algal biofertilizer comprising four blue green algal strains in rice fields; and the use of lignocellulosic materials as potential renewable energy resources for the production of fuels. This book will be extremely useful for researchers and students of biotechnology and plant science, providing an essential update on the latest findings and trends.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1: Dilute Acid Pretreatment Efficiency on Various Solid Loadings and Effect of Different Neutralizing Agents on Xylulosic Ethanol Production
    Chapter 2: Effect of BGA Biofertilizers Using Different Carrier Materials on Rice Crop
    Chapter 3: Identification of Differentially Expressed Terminal Heat Stress Associated Proteins in Developing Grains in Wheat (Triticum Aestivum L.)
    Chapter 4: The genetic toxicity potential of heavy metals (Zn, Cu) on Vigna radiata, Triticum aestivum and Cicer arietinum
    Chapter 5: Production, Optimization, and Charaterization of Siderophore by Pseudomonas Aeruginosa (C3) Isolated From Rhizospheric Soil
    Chapter 6: Development of Marker in the Soft Gold Mushroom Cordyceps Sp. For Strain Improvement
    Chapter 7: Optimization of Microwave Assisted Pretreatment of Rice Straw with Fecl3 in Combination with H3po4 for Improving Enzymatic Hydrolysis
    Chapter 8: Profiling Indolic Auxins Produced by the Strains of Aspergillus Using Novel HPTLC Technique
    Chapter 9: Comparative Analysis of Cytotoxic Potential of Crude Extracts and Fractionated Isolates from Moringa Oleifera Lam
    Chapter 10: Hydroxy Fatty Acid from Camelina Sativa Seed Oil for Industrial Application
    Chapter 11: Comparison of Different Planting Methods to Determine the Precision of Phenotyping Wheat in Field Experiments
    Chapter 12: Effect of extraction temperature and different carrier agents on the physicochemical and antioxidant properties of spray dried Murraya koenigii (Linn.) leaf extract
    Chapter 13: Isolation and characterization of microbial Asparaginase to mitigate Acrylamide formation in food
    Chapter 14: Small Colony Variant Selection, Biofilm Induction and Interspecies Interactions of Ocular Clinical Pseudomonas aeruginosa
    Chapter 15: Comparative analysis of phytochemicals of healthy and symptomatic Clerodendrum inerme
    Chapter 16: Synthesis of Silver Nanoparticle of Aqueous extract of Allium Fistulosum and Its Efficiency against Bacterial Contaminants from Industrial waste water and its Photocatalytic potential
    Chapter 16: Exploration of biocontrol and growth promoting activity of bacterial strains isolated from the sugarcane crop.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jameel M. Al-Khayri, Shri Mohan Jain, Dennis V. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: This book examines the development of innovative modern methodologies towards augmenting conventional plant breeding for the production of new crop varieties, under the increasingly limiting environmental and cultivation factors, to achieve sustainable agricultural production and enhanced food security. Two volumes of Advances in Plant Breeding Strategies were published in 2015 and 2016, respectively; Volume 1: Breeding, Biotechnology and Molecular Tools and Volume 2: Agronomic, Abiotic and Biotic Stress Traits. This is Volume 3: Fruits, which is focused on advances in breeding strategies for the improvement of individual fruit crops. It consists of 23 chapters grouped into three parts, according to distribution classification of fruit trees: Part I, Temperate Fruits, Part II, Subtropical Fruits, and Part III, Tropical Fruits. Each chapter comprehensively reviews the modern literature on the subject and reflects the authors' own experience.

    Contents:
    Preface.- List of Contributors.- Part I. Temperate Fruits.-
    1. Apple (Malus spp.) Breeding: Present and Future; S. Pereira-Lorenzo et al.-
    2. Cherry Breeding: Sweet Cherry (Prunus avium L.) and Sour Cherry (Prunus cerasus L.); L. Dondini et al.-
    3. Mulberry (Morus spp.) Breeding for Higher Fruit Production; K. Vijayan et al.-
    4. Pear (Pyrus spp.) Breeding; G.J. da Silva et al.-
    5. Plum (Prunus spp.) Breeding; T. Milošević, N. Milošević.-
    6. Quince (Cydonia oblonga Mill.) Breeding; S. Kafkas et al.- Part II. Subtropical Fruits.-
    8. Cactus Pear (Opuntia spp.) Breeding; M.A. Mazri.-
    9. Improvement of Fig (Ficus carica L.) by Conventional Breeding and Biotechnology; F. Aljane et al.-
    10. Kiwifruit (Actinidia spp.) Breeding; Z. Hanley.-
    11. Citrus Genetics and Breeding; J. Cuenca et al.-
    12. Advanced Innovative Tools in Lemon (Citrus limon L.) Breeding; I. Polat.-
    13. Mandarin (Citrus reticulate Blanco) Breeding; M. Usman, B. Fatima.-
    14. Strategies for Olive (Olea eurpaea L.) Breeding: Cultivated Genetic Resources and Crossbreeding; L. Rallo et al.-
    15. Pomegranate (Punica granatum L.) Breeding; D. Holland, I. Bar-Ya'akov.- Part III. Tropical Fruits.-
    16. Genetics and Breeding of Fruit Crops in the Annonaceae Family: Annona spp. and Asimina spp.; J. Lora et al.-
    17. Breeding of Coconut (Cocos nucifera L.): The Tree of Life; Y. Yang et al.-
    18. Advances in Date Palm (Phoenix dactylifera L.) Breeding; J.M. Al-Khayri et al.-
    19. Breeding of Garcinia spp.; H.N. Murthy et al.-
    20. Mango (Mangifera indica L.) Breeding; I.S.E. Bally, N.L. Dillon.-
    21. Genetic Improvement of Papaya (Carica papaya L.); F. Karambu Rimberia et al.-
    22. Passion Fruit (Passiflora spp.) Breeding; C.B. Moreno Cerquiera-Silva et al.-
    23. Genetics and Breeding of Fruit Crops in the Sapindaceae Family: Lychee (Litchi chinensis Sonn.) and Longan (Dimocarpus longan Lour.); J. Lora et al.- Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jameel M. Al-Khayri, Shri Mohan Jain, Dennis V. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: Plant breeders and geneticists are under constant pressure to sustain and expand food production by using innovative breeding strategies and introducing minor crops, which are well adapted to marginal lands, provide a source of nutrition, and have abiotic and biotic stress tolerance, to feed an ever-increasing human population. The basic concept of this book is to examine the use of innovative methods augmenting traditional plant breeding towards the improvement and development of new crop varieties, under the increasingly limiting environmental and cultivation factors, to achieve sustainable agricultural production and enhanced food security. In addition to developing improved crops for innovative industrial products such as pharmaceuticals and food additives, biofuels, oils and textiles. Three volumes of this book series were published in 2015, 2016 and 2018, respectively: Volume 1. Breeding, Biotechnology and Molecular Tools; Volume 2. Agronomic, Abiotic and Biotic Stress Traits and Volume 3. Fruits. In 2019, the following four volumes are concurrently being published: Volume 4. Nut and Beverage Crops, Volume 5. Cereals, Volume 6. Industrial and Food Crops and Volume 7. Legumes. This Volume 4, subtitled Nut and Beverage Crops, focuses on advances in breeding strategies using both traditional and modern approaches for the improvement of individual plantation crops. Included in Part I, eleven important nut species recognized for their economical and nutritional importance including Almond, Argan, Brazil nut, Cashew nut, Chestnut, Hazelnut, Macadamia, Peanut, Pine nut, Pistachio and Walnut. Part II covers two popular beverage species, coffee and tea. Chapters are written by 53 internationally reputable scientists from 13 countries and subjected to a review process to assure quality presentation and scientific accuracy. Each chapter begins with an introduction covering related backgrounds and provides in-depth discussion of the subject supported with 108 high quality color figures, and relevant data in 55 tables. The chapter concludes with recommendations for future research directions, appendixes of genetic resources and concerned research institutes and a comprehensive list of pertinent references to facilitate further reading. This book series is a valuable resource for advanced students, researchers, scientists, commercial producers and seed companies as well as consultants and policymakers interested in agriculture, particularly in modern breeding technologies.

    Contents:
    Preface.- About the Editors.- Contributors.- Part I. Nut Crops.-
    1. Almond [Prunus dulcis (Miller) D.A. Webb] Breeding; Pedro J. Martínez-García et al.-
    2. Genetic Diversity and Breeding of Argan Tree (Argania spinosa L. Skeels); Naima Ait Aabd et al.-
    3. Brazil Nut (Bertholletia excels Bonpl.) Breeding; Aisy Botega Baldoni et al.-
    4. Cashew Nut (Anacardium occidentale L.) Breeding Strategies; Suvalaxmi Palei et al.-
    5. Chestnut (Castanea spp. Miller) Breeding; J. Hill Craddock, M. Taylor Perkins.-
    6. Hazelnut (Corylus spp.) Breeding; Roberto Botta et al.-
    7. Macadamia (Macadamia spp.) Breeding; Bruce L. Topp et al.-
    8. Peanut (Arachis hypogaea L.) Breeding; Saikat Gantait et al.-
    9. Advances in Edible Pine Nut Trees (Pinus spp.) Breeding Strategies; Hanguo Zhang, Zhen Zhang.-
    10. Pistachio (Pistacia spp.) Breeding; Abdollatif Sheikhi et al.-
    11. Advances in Walnut (Juglans regia L.) Breeding Strategies; Kourosh Vahdati et al.- Part II. Beverage Crops.-
    12. Genetic Resources and Breeding of Coffee (Coffeea spp.); Manoj K. Mishra.-
    13. Advances in Tea [Camellia sinensis (L.) O. Kuntze] Breeding; Mahasen A.B. Ranatunga.- Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jameel M. Al-Khayri, Shri Mohan Jain, Dennis V. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: Plant breeders and geneticists are under constant pressure to sustain and expand food production by using innovative breeding strategies and introducing minor crops, which are well adapted to marginal lands, provide a source of nutrition, and have abiotic and biotic stress tolerance, to feed an ever-increasing human population. The basic concept of this book is to examine the use of innovative methods augmenting traditional plant breeding towards the improvement and development of new crop varieties, under the increasingly limiting environmental and cultivation factors, to achieve sustainable agricultural production and enhanced food security. In addition to developing improved crops for innovative industrial products such as pharmaceuticals and food additives, biofuels, oils and textiles. Three volumes of this book series were published in 2015, 2016 and 2018, respectively: Volume 1. Breeding, Biotechnology and Molecular Tools; Volume 2. Agronomic, Abiotic and Biotic Stress Traits and Volume 3. Fruits. In 2019, the following four volumes are concurrently being published: Volume 4. Nut and Beverage Crops, Volume 5. Cereals, Volume 6. Industrial and Food Crops and Volume 7. Legumes. This Volume 5, subtitled Cereals, focuses on advances in breeding strategies using both traditional and modern approaches for the improvement of individual crops. It addresses important staple food crops including barley, fonio, finger millet, foxtail millet, pearl millet, proso millet, quinoa, rice, rye, tef, triticale and spelt wheat. Chapters are written by 60 internationally reputable scientists from 14 countries and subjected to a review process to assure quality presentation and scientific accuracy. Each chapter begins with an introduction covering related backgrounds and provides in-depth discussion of the subject supported with 138 high quality color figures, and relevant data in 78 tables. The chapter concludes with recommendations for future research directions, appendixes of ge netic resources and concerned research institutes and a comprehensive list of pertinent references to facilitate further reading. This book series is a valuable resource for advanced students, researchers, scientists, commercial producers and seed companies as well as consultants and policymakers interested in agriculture, particularly in modern breeding technologies.

    Contents:
    Preface
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1. Barley (Hordeum vulgare L.) Breeding; Essam Fathy El-Hashash, Karima Mohamed El-Absy
    2. Fonio (Digitaria spp.) Breeding; Suleiman Dangana Abdul, Afam I.O. Jideani
    3. Finger Millet (Eleusine coracana L. Gartn.) Breeding; Neelofar Mirza, Soma S. Marla
    4. Foxtail Millet (Setaria italica L.): Potential of Smaller Millet for Future Breeding; Mangesh Pradip Moharil et al
    5. Breeding of Pearl Millet (Pennisetum glaucum (L.) R. Br.); Ashita Bisht et al
    6. Proso Millet (Panicum miliaceum L.) Breeding: Progress, Challenges and Opportunities; Dipak K. Santra et al
    7. Quinoa (Chenopodium quinoa Willd.) Breeding; Luz Rayda Gomez-Pando et al
    8. Molecular Breeding Strategies for Genetic Improvement in Rice (Oryza sativa L.); Ritu Mahajan, Nisha Kapoor
    9. Hybrid Breeding in Rye (Secale cereale L.); Thomas Miedaner, Friedrich Laidig
    10. Tef [Eragrostis tef (Zucc.) Trotter] Breeding; Solomon Chanyalew et al
    11. Triticale (X Triticosecale Wittmack) Breeding; Mohamed Mergoum et al
    12. CRISPR/Cas9 Genome Editing in Bread Wheat (Triticum aestivum L.) Genetic Improvement; Soleyman Dayani et al
    13. Durum Wheat (Triticum turgidum ssp. durum) Breeding to Meet the Challenge of Climate Change; Pasquale De Vita, Francesca Taranto
    14. Spelt Wheat [Triticum aestivum ssp. spelta (L.) Thell.] Breeding via In Vitro Androgenesis for Special Food Quality Parameters; János Pauk et al
    15. Recent Advances in Wheat (Triticum spp.) Breeding; Amira M.I. Mourad et al
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Jameel M. Al-Khayri, Shri Mohan Jain, Dennis V. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: Plant breeders and geneticists are under constant pressure to sustain and expand food production by using innovative breeding strategies and introducing minor crops, which are well adapted to marginal lands, provide a source of nutrition, and have abiotic and biotic stress tolerance, to feed an ever-increasing human population. The basic concept of this book is to examine the use of innovative methods augmenting traditional plant breeding towards the improvement and development of new crop varieties, under the increasingly limiting environmental and cultivation factors, to achieve sustainable agricultural production and enhanced food security. In addition to developing improved crops for innovative industrial products such as pharmaceuticals and food additives, biofuels, oils and textiles. Three volumes of this book series were published in 2015, 2016 and 2018, respectively: Volume 1. Breeding, Biotechnology and Molecular Tools; Volume 2. Agronomic, Abiotic and Biotic Stress Traits and Volume 3. Fruits. In 2019, the following four volumes are concurrently being published: Volume 4. Nut and Beverage Crops, Volume 5. Cereals, Volume 6. Industrial and Food Crops and Volume 7. Legumes. This Vol 6, subtitled Industrial and Food Crops, consists of 2 parts. Included in Part I are 11 industrial plant species utilized as sources of raw materials for the production of industrial products including pulp and wood crops (acacia), fiber (cotton, jute and ramie), rubber (guayule and rubber tree), oil (jojoba and flax), biofuels and pharmaceutical (agave) and sugar source (sugarcane). Part II covers 7 food plants selected for their utilization in food industries for the production of chocolate (cacao), cooking oil (oil palm, safflower, sesame and sunflower) and natural flavors and aroma (saffron and vanilla). Chapters are written by 60 internationally reputable scientists from 14 countries and subjected to a review process to assure quality presentation and scientific accuracy. Eac h chapter begins with an introduction covering related backgrounds and provides in-depth discussion of the subject supported with 138 high quality color figures, and relevant data in 78 tables. The chapter concludes with recommendations for future research directions, appendixes of genetic resources and concerned research institutes and a comprehensive list of pertinent references to facilitate further reading. This book series is a valuable resource for advanced students, researchers, scientists, commercial producers and seed companies as well as consultants and policymakers interested in agriculture, particularly in modern breeding technologies.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Editors and Contributors; Part I: Industrial Crops;
    Chapter 1: Genetics and Breeding of Tropical Acacias for Forest Products: Acacia mangium, A. auriculiformis and A. crassicarpa; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Silviculture and Conventional Breeding; 1.2.1 Current Cultivation Practices; 1.2.2 Current Problems and Challenges; 1.2.3 Improvement Strategy; 1.2.4 Traditional Breeding Methodologies and Limitations; 1.2.5 Role of Biotechnology; 1.3 Germplasm Biodiversity and Conservation; 1.3.1 Germplasm Diversity; 1.3.2 Species Characterization and Phylogeny 1.3.3 Genetic Resources Conservation Approaches1.4 Hybridization; 1.5 Conclusion and Prospects; Appendices; Appendix I: Research Institutes Relevant to Acacias; Appendix II: Genetic Resources of Acacias; References;
    Chapter 2: Cotton (Gossypium hirsutum L.) Breeding Strategies; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Cotton Sustainable Production; 2.3 Cotton Genetic Resources and Conservation; 2.3.1 Cytogenetics and Evolution; 2.3.2 World Cotton Germplasm Collections; 2.3.3 Utilization of Wild Germplasm; 2.3.4 Colored Cotton; 2.4 Traditional Cotton Breeding Programs; 2.5 Genomic Database; 2.6 Mutation Breeding 2.7 In Vitro Applications2.8 Transgenic Cotton; 2.9 Improvement of Cotton Against Abiotic Stresses; 2.10 Improvement of Cotton Against Biotic Stresses; 2.11 New Emerging Technologies; 2.12 Conclusions and Prospects; Appendices; Appendix I: Research Institutes Relevant to Cotton Breeding and Biotechnology; Appendix II: Cotton Genetic Resources; References;
    Chapter 3: CRISPR/Cas9: A New Genome Editing Tool to Accelerate Cotton (Gossypium spp.) Breeding; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Different Versions of CRISPR/Cas Systems and Their Applications 3.3 Functional Genomics and Limitations in Cotton Breeding3.4 Difference Between Genome Editing and Classical Breeding of Cotton; 3.5 Layout Plan of CRISPR/Cas-Based Genome Editing; 3.5.1 Data Mining and Single Guide RNA (sgRNA) Designing for Target Sequence; 3.5.2 Choice of CRISPR/Cas System; 3.5.3 Delivering CRISPR/Cas Cassettes into Cotton Genome; 3.5.4 Manipulation of Targeted Mutagenesis Through In Vitro Regeneration and Screening of Transgenic Plants; 3.5.5 Detection and Confirmation of Successful Genome Modification 3.6 Potential Applications of CRISPR/Cas in the Post-Genomic Era of Cotton Breeding3.7 Multiplexed Gene Stacking Using CRISPR/Cas9; 3.8 Countering Off-targets During Genome Editing; 3.9 Production of Transgene-Free Cotton; 3.10 Genome Editing Bottlenecks in Polyploid Cotton; 3.11 Conclusions and Prospects; Appendix I: Some Research Institutes Relevant to Cotton Molecular Breeding; References;
    Chapter 4: Jute (Corchorus spp.) Breeding; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Germplasm Conservation, Biodiversity and Utilization; 4.2.1 Germplasm Conservation; 4.2.2 Taxonomy and Germplasm Classification
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jameel M. Al-Khayri, Shri Mohan Jain, Dennis V. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: Plant breeders and geneticists are under constant pressure to sustain and expand food production by using innovative breeding strategies and introducing minor crops, which are well adapted to marginal lands, provide a source of nutrition, and have abiotic and biotic stress tolerance, to feed an ever-increasing human population. The basic concept of this book is to examine the use of innovative methods augmenting traditional plant breeding towards the improvement and development of new crop varieties, under the increasingly limiting environmental and cultivation factors, to achieve sustainable agricultural production and enhanced food security. In addition to developing improved crops for innovative industrial products such as pharmaceuticals and food additives, biofuels, oils and textiles. Three volumes of this book series were published in 2015, 2016 and 2018, respectively: Volume 1. Breeding, Biotechnology and Molecular Tools; Volume 2. Agronomic, Abiotic and Biotic Stress Traits and Volume 3. Fruits. In 2019, the following four volumes are concurrently being published: Volume 4. Nut and Beverage Crops, Volume 5. Cereals, Volume 6. Industrial and Food Crops and Volume 7. Legumes. This Volume 7, subtitled Legumes, focuses on advances in breeding strategies using both traditional and modern approaches for the improvement of individual legume crops. Included in this volume are Adzuki bean, Black gram, Chickpea Cluster bean, Common bean, Cowpea, Faba bean, Hyacinth bean, Lentil, Mung bean, Pigeonpea and Soybean. Chapters are written by 57 internationally reputable scientists from 9 countries and subjected to a review process to assure quality presentation and scientific accuracy. Each chapter begins with an introduction covering related backgrounds and provides in-depth discussion of the subject supported with 81 high quality color figures, and relevant data in 47 tables. The chapter concludes with recommendations for future research directions, appendixes of genetic resources and concerned research institutes and a comprehensive list of pertinent references to facilitate further reading. This book series is a valuable resource for advanced students, researchers, scientists, commercial producers and seed companies as well as consultants and policymakers interested in agriculture, particularly in modern breeding technologies.

    Contents:
    Preface
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1. Adzuki Bean (Vigna angularis (Willd.) Ohwi & Ohashi) Breeding; Lixia Wang et al
    2. Recent Advances in Breeding, Marker Assisted Selection and Genomics of Black Gram [Vigna mungo (L.) Hepper]; Farrukh Azeem et al
    3. Chickpea (Cicer arietinum L.) Cytogenetics, Genetic Diversity and Breeding; Aamir Raina et al
    4. Cluster Bean [Cyamopsis tetragonoloba (L.) Taub] Breeding; Aravind Kumar Jukanti et al
    5. Common Bean (Phaseolus vulgaris L.) Breeding; Oswalt R. Jimenez
    6. Cowpea [Vigna unguiculata (L.) Walp.] Breeding; Ousmane Boukar et al
    7. Faba Bean (Vicia faba L.) Breeding; Xuxiao Zong et al
    8. Hyacinth Bean (Lablab purpureus L. Sweet): Genetics, Breeding and Genomics; Panichayil V. Vaijayanthi et al
    9. Lentil (Lens culinaris Medik.) Diversity, Cytogenetics and Breeding; Rafiul Amin Laskar et al
    10. Mung Bean (Vigna radiate (L.) R. Wilczek) Breeding; Jungmin Ha, Suk-Ha Lee
    11. Pigeonpea (Cajanus cajan L. Millsp.): An Ideal Crop for Sustainable Agriculture; Rachit K. Saxena et al
    12. Soybean [Glycine max (L.) Merr.] Breeding: History, Improvement, Production and Future Opportunities; Edwin J. Anderson et al.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Adela M. Sánchez-Moreiras, Manuel J. Reigosa, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Flavia Vischi Winck, editor.
    Summary: In the post-genomic era, several plant species have been sequenced and massive genomic information is now available which contributed to expand the development of novel technical strategies for the study of additional levels of biological information of plant species. This book focuses on the "omics" approaches together with systems analysis of several different plant species, which have revealed very interesting variations on the cellular responses at the protein, transcript and metabolite levels in response to changes environmental conditions. The volume covers recent technological advances in the area of "omics" and synthesizes recent findings of the field of plant "omics" and systems biology together along with techniques that can be applied for such studies.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to plant omics and systems biology
    2. Modern approaches for transcriptome analyses in plants
    3. Plant proteomics and systems biology
    4. Subcellular proteomics as a unified approach of experimental localizations and computed prediction data for Arabidopsis and crop plants
    5. The contribution of metabolomics to systems biology: current applications bridging genotype and phenotype in plant science
    6. Interactomes: Experimental and in silico approaches
    7. Probabilistic graphical models applied to biological networks
    8. Cataloging posttranslational modifications in plant histones
    9. Current challenges in plant systems biology
    10. Contribution of omics and systems biology to plant biotechnology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ramalingam Sathishkumar, Sarma Rajeev Kumar, Jagadeesan Hema, Venkidasamy Baskar, editors.
    Summary: The green revolution led to the development of improved varieties of crops, especially cereals, and since then, classical or molecular breeding has resulted in the creation of economically valuable species. Thanks to recent developments in genetic engineering, it has become possible to introduce genes from different sources, such as bacteria, fungi, viruses, mice and humans, to plants. This technology has made the scientific community aware of the critical role of transgenics, not only as a means of producing stress tolerant crops but also as a platform for the production of therapeutics through molecular farming. This book discusses the commercial applications of plant transgenic technologies, including the use of transgenic cell culture approachesto improve the production of metabolites and high-value therapeutics as well as transgenic plants in pest management. It also explores generation of novel vectors, protein production using chloroplast engineering and the latest developments in this area, such as genome editing in plants. Featuring general discussions and research papers by leading international experts, it is a valuable resource for scientists, teachers, students and industrialists working in the field.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Plant Tissue Culture and DNA Delivery Methods
    Chapter 2. Cell Cultures and Hairy Roots as Platform for Production of High Value Metabolites: Current Approaches, Limitations and Future Prospects
    Chapter 3. Integrating Bioinformatics and Omics tools for systems analysis of abiotic stress tolerance in Oryza sativa (L.)
    Chapter 4. Green Biotechnology: A brief update on Plastid Genome Engineering
    Chapter 5. New Generation Transformation Vectors
    6 Recent Developments in Generation of Marker Free Transgenic Plants
    Chapter 7. Applications of Genome Engineering/Editing Tools in Plants
    Chapter 8. High Throughput Analytical Techniques to Screen Plant Transgenics
    Chapter 9. Transgenic Technologies and their Potential Application in Horticultural Crop Improvement
    Chapter 10. Commercial Application of Transgenic Plants in Virus Management
    Chapter 11. Application of Reed Beds in Wastewater Treatment: Scope for Transgenic Plants
    Chapter 12. Inspection of Crop Wild Relative (Cicer microphyllum) as Potential Genetic Resource in Transgenic Development
    Chapter 13. Genome Modification Approaches to Improve Performance, Quality and Stress Tolerance of Mediterranean Fruit Species
    Chapter 14. Key Challenges in Developing Products from Transgenic Plants
    Chapter 15. Enhanced Production of Therapeutic Proteins in Plants: Novel Expression Strategies
    Chapter 16. Transcriptional Engineering for Enhancing Valuable Metabolites in Photosynthetic Microalgae.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Asokumar Buvanendran, Adam Young.
    Contents:
    Advances in postoperative pain management / Adam Young & Asokumar Buvanendran
    The use of perioperative multimodal analgesia / Adam Young & Asokumar Buvanendran
    The place for melatonin in postoperative analgesic regimens / Lars Peter Holst Andersen, Jacob Rosenberg & Ismail Gögenur
    Perineural additives for peripheral nerve blocks / Gregory Schnepper & Sylvia H. Wilson
    Linking regional anesthesia and analgesia with postoperative anticoagulation / Julie R. McSwain & Sylvia H. Wilson
    Parent management of children's postoperative pain / Brooke Nicole Jenkins, Michelle A. Fortier & Zeev N. Kain
    Billing and compliance for acute interventional perioperative pain / Mark E. Hudson.
    Digital Access TandFonline [2014]
  • Digital
    edited by Jeffrey M. Weinberg, Mark Lebwohl.
    Summary: The understanding and management of psoriasis have evolved dramatically over the last decades and, as a result, guidelines and treatment options have changed dramatically. To meet the need for a up-to-date practical resource in this area, the Editors have brought together a team of experts in the field to produce a highly informative and illustrated guide to the decision-making process for psoriasis. Advances in Psoriasis: A Multisystemic Guide provides physicians with a reference on the disease and its comorbidities and therapeutic options. It will help physicians further their knowledge of the science and therapy of psoriasis. As well as practicing dermatologists, fellows in dermatology will find this book to be an essential training resource to learn about the treatment and management of psoriasis.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Psoriasis and Psoriasis Therapy
    Pathophysiology of Psoriasis/Novel Pathways
    Psoriasis and Psoriasis Arthritis: Clinical Review and Update
    Overview of Therapeutic Options/Pharmacology
    Topical Therapy
    Ultraviolet and Laser Therapy
    Traditional Systemic Therapy
    Biologics I: TNF Inhibitors
    Biologics II: IL-12/23 and T-Cell Targeted Therapy
    Research Pipeline I: Topicals and Oral Therapies
    Research Pipeline II: Biologic Therapies
    Summary of Published Treatment Guidelines
    Reimbursement Issues/Aides
    Patient Support Programs and Organizations
    Conclusion
    Appendix: Directory of Helpful Websites/Online Resources/Telephone Numbers.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jeffrey M. Weinberg, Mark Lebwohl, editors.
    Summary: This extensively revised second edition provides an up-to-date and highly informative textbook on psoriasis. The understanding of the mechanisms behind the disease and the available treatment options have continued to develop rapidly in recent times, with this vital resource covering the latest in these management options, including targeted T-cell therapy, the use of immunomodulators, systemic therapies, and ultraviolet and laser therapy. In addition, it provides a detailed overview of the pathophysiology, comorbidities, epidemiology and triggers of the disease. Advances in Psoriasis: A Multisystemic Guide extensively details the scientific basis and practice management of psoriasis. It is therefore a vital resource for practicing and trainee dermatologists looking to develop their clinical knowledge of how to manage and treat these patients.

    Contents:
    Introduction to and History of Psoriasis and Psoriasis Therapy
    Pathophysiology of Psoriasis/Novel Pathways
    Psoriasis: Clinical Review and Update
    Psoriasis: Epidemiology, Potential Triggers, Disease Course
    Topical Therapy I: Corticosteroids and Vitamin D Analogues
    Topical Therapy II: Retinoids, Immunomodulators, and Others
    Topical Therapy II: Retinoids, Immunomuodulators, and Others/ Ultraviolet Therapy for Psoriasis
    Laser Therapy for Psoriasis
    Traditional Systemic Therapy I: Methotrexate and Cyclosporine
    Traditional Systemic Therapy II: Retinoids and Others
    Apremilast
    Etanercept
    Adalimumab
    Infliximab, Golimumab , and Certolizumab Pegol
    Ustekinumab
    Guselkumab
    Tidrakizumab
    Risankizumab
    Secukinumab
    Ixekizumab
    Brodalumab
    Biosimilars for Psoriasis
    Research Pipeline I: Oral Therapeutics for Psoriasis
    Research Pipeline II: Upcoming Biologic Therapies
    Pediatric Psoriasis
    Challenges in Psoriasis Treatment: Nail, Scalp, and Palmoplantar Involvement
    Psoriasis and Comorbidities
    Summary of Published Treatment Guidelines
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Wise, Thomas N.
    Digital Access Karger v. 5-, 1967-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    16
  • Digital/Print
    Jeffrey Y.C. Wong, Timothy E. Schultheiss, Eric H. Radany, editors.
    Contents:
    Combining radiotherapy and immunotherapy
    SBRT and the treatment of oligometastatic disease
    MRI guided radiotherapy
    Oncologic applications of magnetic resonance guided focused ultrasound
    Intensity-modulated proton beam therapy of prostate cancer- history, results, and future directions
    IGRT and hypofractionation for primary tumors
    The impact of IGRT on normal tissue toxicity
    Biologic and image guided systemic radiotherapy
    Cancer stem cells and tumor microenvironment in radiotherapy
    Biomarkers and radiotherapy
    The mammalian DNA damage response as a target for therapeutic gain in radiation oncology
    Mathematical modeling in radiation oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC271.R3 A38 2017
    1
  • Digital
    volume editors, M. Guckenberger, S.E. Combs, D. Zips.
    Contents:
    Principles and developments in cancer immunotherapy and approaches for combination with tumour irradiation / Eckert, F., Huber, S.
    Imageable biomarkers for radiotherapy response / van der Weg, WW., Span, P.N., Braam, P.M., Bussink, J.
    Targeting tumor microenvironment and metabolism to overcome radiation resistance / Sharma, A., Pruschy, M.
    Imaging for target volume definition and response assessment in lung cancer / De Ruysscher, D., van Elmpt, W.
    Advances in technology and its application : radiotherapy treatment planning / Alber, M.
    Stereotactic body radiotherapy / Guckenberger, M.
    Clinical rationale and indications for particle therapy / Dreher, C, Combs, S.E.
    Advances in radiation biology of particle irradiation / Helm, A., Tinganelli, W., Durante, M.
    Preclinical mouse models for the evaluation of novel techniques in particle therapy / Schmid, T.E., Multhoff, G.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Print
    Shashank Shekhar Solankey, Meenakshi Kumari, Manoj Kumar, editors.
    Summary: A considerable change in climate at a global level will impact the vegetable cultivation and agriculture as a whole; subsequently affecting the world's food supply. Climate change per se is not necessarily harmful; the problems arise from extreme events that are difficult to predict (erratic rainfall patterns and unpredictable high and low temperatures), and consequently reduce crop productivity. Vegetables are in general more succulent (have 90% water) and are more sensitive to climatic vagaries. Sudden changes in temperature coupled with irregular precipitation at any phase of crop growth can affect the normal growth, flowering, pollination, fruit setting, fruit development and fruit ripening can decrease the yield. The irregular precipitation can also affect the soil salinity and is a major challenge in many vegetable growing areas. To mitigate the harmful impact of climatic change there is a urgent need to develop adequate adaptation strategies for adverse effect of climate change and the preference should be given on development of heat, cold, drought, flood and salinity stress tolerant genotypes along with climate proofing through conventional and non-conventional breeding techniques. Available evidence shows that there is a high probability of increase in the frequency and intensity of climate related natural hazards due to climate change and hence increases the potential threat due to climate change related natural disasters in the world. This book (Volume- I) will be basically useful for the researchers and postgraduate students with current challenges and mitigation strategies for increasing vegetable production under a changing climate.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. The Role of Research for Vegetable Production Under a Changing Climate: Future Trends and Goals
    Chapter 2. Challenges and opportunities in vegetable production in changing climate: mitigation and adaptation strategies
    Chapter 3. Selection of genotypes in vegetable crops for climate change adaptation
    Chapter 4. Response of Solanaceous vegetables to increasing temperature and atmospheric CO2
    Chapter 5. Climate change impact on cole crops and mitigation strategies
    Chapter 6. Impact of climate change on root crops production and mitigation strategies
    Chapter 7. Impact of climate change on leguminous vegetables productivity and mitigation strategies
    Chapter 8. Impact of climate change on bulb crops production and mitigation strategies
    Chapter 9. Impact of climate change on cucurbitaceous vegetables in relation to increasing temperature and drought
    Chapter 10. Impact of carbon sequestration and greenhouse gasses on soils
    Chapter 11. Impact of green house gasses on vegetable crops and atmosphere
    Chapter 12. Impact of heat on vegetable crops and mitigation strategies
    Chapter 13. Impact of drought and salinity on vegetable crops and mitigation strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    The role of dysregulated microRNA expression in lung cancer / M. Krutakova [and seven others]
    Laryngeal cancer: 12-year experience of a single center / V. Calkovsky, P. Wallenfels, A. Calkovska, A. Hajtman
    Polymorphisms of selected DNA repair genes and lung cancer in chromium exposure / E. Halasova, [and nine others]
    Associations of CYP1A2 polymorphisms with the risk haplotypes in lung cancer in the Slovak population
    T. Matakova, E. Halasova, A. Dzian, R. Hruby, M. Halasa, K. Javorka, M. Skerenova
    Impact of endobronchial ultrasound guided transbronchial needle aspiration on diagnostic yield of bronchoscopy in patients with mediastinal lymph node enlargement
    K. Osinka, M. Zielińska-Krawczyk, P. Korczyński, B. Górnicka, R. Krenke
    The effect on cognition of mitochondrial respiratory system proteins in peripheral blood mononuclear cells in the course of lung cancer
    S. Michalak, J. Rybacka-Mossakowska, J. Gazdulska, I. Gołda-Gocka, R. Ramlau
    Lung cancer and multiple neoplasms: a retrospective analysis
    A. Romaszko, E. Świetlik, A. Doboszyńska, P. Szpruch, J. Luks
    Humoral immune response against neural antigens and its effects on cognition in lung cancer patients
    J. Rybacka-Mossakowska, R. Ramlau, J. Gazdulska, I. Gołda-Gocka, W. Kozubski and S. Michalak.
    Active case finding among homeless people as a means of reducing the incidence of pulmonary tuberculosis in general population
    J. Romaszko, A. Siemaszko, M. Bodzioch, A. Buciński, A. Doboszyńska
    Cryptogenic organizing pneumonia: IL-1[beta], IL-6, IL-8, and TGF- [beta]1 serum concentrations and response to clarithromycin treatment
    E. Radzikowska and [six others].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Charles F. Streckfus.
    Summary: This book reviews the progress made in salivary diagnostics and identifies the likely direction of future endeavors. After an introductory section describing the histological and anatomical features of the salivary glands and salivary function, salivary collection devices and diagnostic platforms are reviewed. The field of ℓ́ℓsalivaomicsℓ́ℓ is then considered in detail, covering, for example, proteomics, the peptidome, DNA and RNA analysis, biomarkers, and methods for biomarker discovery. Salivary diagnostics for oral and systemic diseases are thoroughly discussed, and the role of salivary gland tissue engineering for future diagnostics is explored. The book closes by considering legal issues and barriers to salivary diagnostic development. Advances in Salivary Diagnostics will be an informative and stimulating reference for both practitioners and students.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Amitava Rakshit, Harikesh Bahadur Singh.
    Summary: Most crop plants grow in environments that are suboptimal, which prevents the plants from attaining their full genetic potential for growth and reproduction. Stress due to abiotic and biotic agents has a significant effect on world food production. Annually, an estimated 15% of global yields are lost, but this figure belies far greater losses for specific food systems and the people whose existence is dependent upon them, particularly in developing countries. Current efforts to mitigate these losses are worryingly over-reliant on the use of sophisticated and costly chemicals /measures with substantial economic and environmental costs, or on the development of efficient and smart crop varieties, which can take decades. What we need is a broad range of safe, robust and equitable solutions for food producers. One under-investigated approach is that of utilizing the crop plant's innate immune system to resist stress. More specifically, the innate immune system can be sensitized or 'primed' to respond more quickly and strongly to protect the plant against stresses. However, a strategy of employing priming in combination with reduced pesticide use can enhance protection, and help to meet commitments to reducing chemical inputs in agriculture. This book discusses in detail different segments of priming in addressing stress factors and traits to increase competitiveness against all odds. Adopting a holistic and systematic approach, it addresses priming to counter climate-change related adverse effects coupled with pest and pathogen related stress on the productivity of crops utilizing natural resources to reap sustainable environmental, economic and social benefits for potential productivity of crops, maintaining synergy between soil, water and plants in ways that mimic nature.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Concepts
    Chapter1. Seed Priming: New Vistas and Contemporary Perspectives
    Chapter 2. Impact of Seed Priming on The Modulation of Physico-Chemical and Molecular Processes During Germination, Growth and Development of Crops
    Chapter 3. Seed Priming: An Emerging Technology to Impart Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Crop Plants
    Chapter 4. Recent Advances in Abiotic Stress Tolerance of Plants Through Chemical Priming: An Overview
    Chapter 5. Seed Priming Technology in the Amelioration of Salinity Stress in Plants
    Chapter 6. Seed Priming with Plant Growth Regulators to Improve Crops Abiotic Stress Tolerance
    Chapter 7. Addressing Stresses in Agriculture Through Bio-Priming Intervention
    Chapter 8. Role of Microbial Seed Priming and Microbial Phytohormone in Modulating Growth Promotion and Defense Responses in Plants
    Chapter 9. Potential Of Biopriming in Enhancing Crop Productivity and Stress Tolerance
    Chapter 10. Stimulating Plant Tolerance Against Abiotic Stress Through Seed Priming
    Part 2. Case Studies on Priming
    Chapter 11. Seed Priming: A Low-Cost Technology for Resource-Poor Farmers in Improving Pulse Productivity
    Chapter 12. Studies on Seed Priming in Pepper (Capsicum annuum L.)
    Chapter 13. Effect of Different Seed Priming Treatments on Germination and Seedling Establishment of Two Threatened Endangered Medicinal Plant Of Darjeeling Himalaya
    Chapter 14. Seed Priming on Germination, Growth and Flowering in Flowers and Ornamental Trees
    Chapter 15. Role of SNP Mediated Nitric Oxide Priming in Conferring Low Temperature Tolerance in Wheat Genotype (Triticum aestivum L.): A Case Study in Indian Northern Plains
    Chapter 16. Seedling Biopriming with Trichoderma spp. Enhances Nitrogen Use efficiency in Rice.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Kazuya Tamai, Eiji Itoi, Kenji Takagishi, editors.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Anatomy
    Chapter 2. Biomechanics
    Chapter 3. Kinematics and Motion Analysis
    Chapter 4. Advanced MR Imaging of the Shoulder
    Chapter 5. Transosseous-Equivalent Arthroscopic Bankart Repair by Twin Anchor Footprint Fixation (TAFF) Technique using JuggerKnot Soft Anchor
    Chapter 6. Complications of Arthroscopic Surgery
    Chapter 7 Instability
    Chapter 8. Arthroscopic Rotator Cuff Repair
    Chapter 9. Mini-Open Rotator Cuff Repair
    Chapter 10. Massive and Irreparable Rotator Cuff Tears
    Chapter 11. Superior Capsule Reconstruction for Massive Rotator Cuff Tears
    Chapter 12. Tendon Transfer for Massive Rotator Cuff Tear
    Chapter 13. Frozen Shoulder
    Chapter 14. Nerve Lesions Around the Shoulder
    Chapter 15. Proximal Humeral Fractures - Classification and Treatment
    Chapter 16. Reverse Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Chapter 17. Physical Therapy- Tips and Pitfalls.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Wolf R. Drescher, Kyung-Hoi Koo, Russell E. Windsor, editors.
    Summary: This book describes current and emerging techniques in hip surgery, providing the essential, up-to-date knowledge that will be required by the orthopaedic surgeon who plans to become a specialist hip surgeon. The opening chapter offers a concise overview of the surgical anatomy, with particular attention to details relevant to the surgical techniques outlined in the book. The increasingly popular anterior minimally invasive approach to the hip and a microinvasive variation of this approach are then described. Subsequent chapters present surgical approaches to developmental disorders of the hip, including dysplasia and femoroacetabular impingement, and promising hip preservation techniques for avascular necrosis of the hip - an often neglected but internationally relevant disease that can mutilate the hip in young patients. Finally, the latest techniques and implants for primary and revision hip arthroplasty are discussed in depth. The international author team consists of recognized leaders in the field, many of whom have developed the described classifications and new surgical techniques.

    Contents:
    Part I. Anatomy of the hip and its surgical application
    Surgical Anatomy of the Hip
    The minimally invasive direct anterior approach to the hip
    Part II. Maturity disorders of the hip
    Hip dysplasia: Osteotomies around the hip in childhood
    Pelvic osteotomies: The Periacetabular Osteotomy Technique for Patients with Developmental Dysplasia of the Hip
    Navigated Rotational Acetabular Osteotomy
    Part III. Arthroscopy of the hip
    Hip arthroscopy and impingement
    Evolution, Current Concepts and Future Developments in Arthroscopic Surgery of the Hip
    Current concepts in the management of femoroacetabular impingement
    Part IV Osteonecrosis of the femoral head: Promising hip preservation surgery techniques
    Current state of diagnosis and treatment of osteonecrosis of the femoral head
    Femoral Osteotomies for Osteonecrosis of the Femoral Head
    Stem cell therapy for the treatment of hip osteonecrosis
    Alternative Head Preserving Procedure for Osteonecrosis of the Femoral Head: Tissue Engineering, Future Perspective
    Part V. Arthritis of the hip: Primary hip arthroplasty
    Ceramic-on-ceramic Total Hip Arthroplasty
    Highly cross-linked polyethylene bearing
    Metal-on-metal Total Hip Arthroplasty
    First experience with ceramic-on-ceramic hip resurfacing
    Cup positioning using anatomical landmarks of the acetabulum
    Intra-operative measurement of cementless stem anteversion
    Part VI Arthritis of the hip: Revision Hip Arthroplasty
    Triflange cup and 3D-printing
    Trochanteric osteotomy
    Acetabular defects and their treatment
    Surgical Management of Femoral Bone Loss.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Bernhard, Silke; Raspé, Gerhard.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    77
  • Digital
    edited by Peter Muir.
    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Structure and Function
    Structure and Function. Morphology and Function of the Cruciate Ligaments / Hilde de Rooster, Eithne Comerford
    Biomechanics of the Cruciate Ligaments / Susannah J Sample
    Cruciate Ligament Remodeling and Repair / Connie S Chamberlain, Erin E Crowley, Ray Vanderby
    Meniscal Structure and Function / Antonio Pozzi, James L Cook
    Biomechanics of the Normal and Cranial Cruciate Ligament-Deficient Stifle / Antonio Pozzi, Stanley E Kim
    Etiopathogenesis of Cruciate Ligament Rupture
    Etiopathogenesis of Cruciate Ligament Rupture. Histology of Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Kei Hayashi
    Genetics of Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Lauren A Baker, Peter Muir
    Cruciate Ligament Matrix Metabolism and Development of Laxity / Eithne Comerford
    Morphological Risk Factors for Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Eithne Comerford
    Role of Nitric Oxide Production and Matrix Protease Activity in Cruciate Ligament Degeneration / David E Spreng, Simone Forterre
    Role of Antibodies to Collagen Type I and II / Hilde de Rooster, Eithne Comerford
    Synovitis Precedes Stifle Instability Associated with Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Jason A Bleedorn
    Role of Synovial Immune Responses in Stifle Synovitis / Peter Muir
    Clinical Features
    Clinical Features. Epidemiology of Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Lauren A Baker, Peter Muir
    History and Clinical Signs of Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Peter Muir
    Partial Rupture of the Cranial Cruciate Ligament / Peter Muir
    Caudal Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Peter Muir
    Stress Imaging of the Stifle / Stanley E Kim
    Stifle Ultrasonography / Cristi R Cook
    Computed Tomography (CT) of the Stifle / Ingrid Gielen, Henri van Bree
    Magnetic Resonance Imaging of the Stifle / Peter V Scrivani
    Risk Prediction of Cruciate Ligament Rupture using Stifle Diagnostic Imaging / Peter Muir
    Surgical Treatment
    Surgical Treatment. Arthroscopy and Arthrotomy of the Stifle / Brian S Beale, Donald A Hulse, Antonio Pozzi, Peter Muir
    Joint Lavage / Peter Muir
    Extracapsular Stabilization / Selena Tinga, Stanley E Kim
    Intra-Articular Repair for Cranial Cruciate Ligament Rupture in the Dog / Jeffery J Biskup, Michael G Conzemius
    Tibial Plateau Leveling Osteotomy / Susan L Schaefer
    Tibial Tuberosity Advancement / Randy J Boudrieau
    Closing Cranial Wedge Ostectomy and Triple Tibial Osteotomy / Simon C Roe
    Treatment of Excessive Tibial Plateau Angle / Michael P Kowaleski
    Surgical Management of Cruciate Ligament Rupture Combined with Patella Luxation / Anke Langenbach, Denis J Marcellin-Little
    Biomechanics of the Cranial Cruciate Ligament-Deficient Stifle Treated by Tibial Osteotomies / Antonio Pozzi, Stanley E Kim, Selena Tinga
    Arthroscopic Follow-Up after Surgical Stabilization of the Stifle / Brian S Beale, Donald A Hulse
    Cranial Cruciate Ligament Debridement / David E Spreng
    Surgical Treatment of Concurrent Meniscal Injury / Samuel P Franklin, James L Cook, Antonio Pozzi
    Meniscal Release / Antonio Pozzi, James L Cook
    Progression of Osteoarthritis after Stifle Stabilization Surgery / Susannah J Sample
    Clinical Outcomes after Surgical Treatment of Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Mary Sarah Bergh, Steven C Budsberg
    Success and Failure after Stifle Stabilization Surgery / Michael G Conzemius, Richard B Evans
    Diagnosis and Management of Orthopaedic Infection after Stifle Surgery / Noël MM Moens
    Medical Management of Cruciate Ligament Rupture
    Medical Management of Cruciate Ligament Rupture. Medical Therapy for Stifle Osteoarthritis / Steven C Budsberg
    Rehabilitation for Dogs with Cruciate Ligament Rupture / Denis J Marcellin-Little, Courtney J Arnoldy
    Future Directions
    Future Directions. Clinical Research Design and Patient-Oriented Outcomes / Dorothy Cimino Brown
    Total Knee Replacement in the Dog / Matthew J Allen, William D Liska, Valentina Brioschi
    Regenerative Medicine and Cranial Cruciate Ligament Repair / Gabriel S Perrone, Martha M Murray, Patrick Vavken
    Disease-Modifying Medical and Cell-Based Therapy / Susannah J Sample, Peter Muir.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    [edited and] foreword written by Jesus Esquivel.
    Contents:
    Advances in the management of peritoneal carcinomatosis / Jesus Esquivel
    Peritoneal carcinomatosis: signs and symptoms / Kimberly L. Levinson & Jerome L. Belinson
    Peritoneal carcinomatosis: radiologic diagnosis / Brian C. Allen & Perry Shen
    Surgical management of peritoneal carcinomatosis / Aaron U. Blackham & John H. Stewart
    Surgical management of peritoneal carcinomatosis in ovarian cancer / Sareena Singh, Amy Armstrong & Robert DeBernardo
    Chemotherapy in peritoneal carcinomatosis of gastrointestinal origin / Jesus Esquivel & Jörg Pelz
    Chemotherapy of peritoneal disseminations of colorectal origin / Dario Baratti, Shigeki Kusamura & Marcello Deraco
    The use of heated intraperitoneal chemotherapy for the treatment of gynecologic carcinomatosis / Sarah K. Goodrich
    Follow-up tools and strategies after CRS and HIPEC for peritoneal surface malignancies / Benedikt M.J. Lampl, Hubert Leebmann, Max Mayr & Pompiliu Piso
    Prognosis / Yutaka Yonemura, Haruaki Ishibashi & Emel Canbay
    Pseudomyxoma peritonei as a special subset of peritoneal carcinomatosis / Shreya Shetty, Peter Thomas, Venkatesh Govindarajan, Poonam Sharma, Gopi Sirineni & Brian W. Loggie.
    Digital Access TandFonline [2014]
  • Digital
    editor, William Vaughn McCall.
    Contents:
    Insomnia moves front and center among sleep disorders / William Vaughn McCall
    Insomnia in the setting of mental illness / Carmen G. Black & William Vaughn McCall
    Insomnia comorbid with medical disorders / Stephen Lund
    Insomnia in the setting of cancer / Julieta Scalo & Karen Rascati
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy for insomnia / Melanie K. Leggett
    Pharmacotherapy for insomnia / Julieta Scalo & Karen Rascati
    Role of zolpidem in the management of primary and comorbid insomnia
    Jaime M. Monti & Seithikurippu R. Pandi-Perumal
    Index.
    Digital Access TandFonline [2014]
  • Print
    Aasef Shaikh, Fatema Ghasia, editors.
    Summary: A comprehensive book that reviews advances in ocular motor research on topics of general interest, rare, specialized or unique conditions, and pertinent basic neuroscience. A rare collection with contributions from basic neuroscientists, neurologists, and ophthalmologists. Includes dedicated chapters on mathematical models, pharmacotherapy, neuromodulation, motion perception, visual influence on eye movement, physiology of strabismus, and microsaccades. This book is dedicated to David Robinson - one of the pioneers of contemporary ocular motor and vestibular neuroscience.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Fiona Zwald, Marc D. Brown, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an informative update on scientific advances relating to transplant dermatology that may be applicable to clinical practice. Commentary is provided on the emerging role of viruses in transplant dermatology, the management of skin disease secondary to transplant medication, sunscreen use in transplant recipients, the role of revision of immunosuppression, and advances in photodynamic therapy. The latest staging and management criteria for high-risk squamous cell carcinoma and the implications for clinical practice are then analyzed. Finally, the management of other cutaneous malignancies is discussed, covering malignant melanoma, Merkel cell carcinoma, and rarer tumors that also behave aggressively and require special consideration in solid organ transplant patients. Each particular advance is addressed in an individual chapter by leaders in the field. The book both expands current knowledge and complements previous textbooks on the subject.

    Contents:
    Transplantation today
    De novo malignancies after solid organ transplantation: focus on viral infection
    Update on benign and inflammatory skin disease secondary to transplant medication
    Update on photoprotection and sunscreen use in solid organ transplant recipients
    Update on our understanding of HPV as a risk factor for cutaneous SCC in organ transplant recipients
    Advances in our understanding of immunosuppression as a risk factor for cutaneous SCC: evidence for revision of immunosuppressive therapy
    Advances in photodynamic therapy for the treatment of malignant and pre-malignant lesions in transplant dermatology
    Update on staging, definition and chemoprevention of ?high risk SCC? in organ transplant recipients
    Advances in management of "high risk SCC" in organ transplant recipients
    Advances in management of Merkel cell carcinoma in organ transplant recipients; role of polyoma virus and immunosuppression
    Update in melanoma in organ transplant recipients
    Update on unusual tumors in organ transplant recipients. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Khalil Fattouch, Patrizio Lancellotti, Mani A. Vannan, Giuseppe Speziale, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Luciano Mastronardi, Takanori Fukushima, Alberto Campione, editors.
    Summary: This volume describes the most relevant and cutting-edge technological news on the complex surgical procedure of acoustic neuroma. The clinical-radiological diagnosis and surgical indications are briefly presented and the surgical technique is illustrated step-by-step: video clips show the latest means of treating these patients. All these indications were prepared by highly experienced experts in the field, based on their personal experience. The new technologies discussed concern e.g. the intraoperative identification and position of the facial nerve, hearing preservation, techniques for dural closure, and the usefulness of laser and ultrasound aspirators. The book also discusses a number of ongoing projects, including those on: diluted papaverine for microvascular protection of cranial nerves, flexible endoscope for IAC control of tumor removal, fluid cement for bone closure, administering aspirin to control residual tumors larger than 7mm, and DTI for preoperative prediction of the position of the facial nerve.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gyan Prakash, Takeshi Iwata, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the state of the art in genetic eye research in Asia and the Pacific. Though there has been an explosion of information on genetic eye research in western countries, more than sixty percent of the human genes involved in eye diseases in the Asian and Pacific population remain unknown. However, new efforts and a new awareness have sparked important discussions on the subject, and new plans are being implemented to discover the genes responsible for many eye diseases in the population. The book reviews the latest findings; its content ranges from genetic aspects of human migration to DNA sequence analysis, genome-wide association analysis, and disease phenotypes. The efforts of the Asian Eye Genetic Consortium (AEGC) are also discussed. The book's editors have been instrumental in developing strategies for discovering the new Asian genes involved in many eye diseases. All chapters were written by leading researchers working on Asian eye genetics from the fields of Human Genetics, Ophthalmology, Molecular Biology, Biochemistry, Sensory Sciences, and Clinical Research. Advances in Vision Research, Volume I will prove to be a major resource for all researchers, clinicians, clinical researchers, and allied eye health professionals with an interest in eye diseases among the Asian population.

    Contents:
    1. Asian eye genetics consortium (AEGC)
    2. Japan eye genetics consortium (JEGC) for hereditary retinal diseases
    3. Whole genome sequencing in genetic eye diseases
    4. Targeted exome sequencing in japanese patients with retinitis pigmentosa
    5. Genetic epidemiology of congenital cataracts and autosomal recessive retinal degenerations in Pakistan
    6. Genetics of cataract in Asia: an overview of research in congenital and age-related cataract with emphasis on Indian population
    7. genetic analysis of families with retinal dystrophies
    8. Whole genome sequencing in patients with rretinitis pigmentosa
    9. Retinitis pigmentosa in Korean patients
    Retinitis pigmentosa in China
    11. Retinitis pigmentosa in Japanese population
    12. Cone dysfunction syndrome in the Japanese population
    13. Leber Congenital amaurosis/early-onset retinal dystrophy in Japanese population
    14. Paradigm of susceptibility genes in AMD and PCV
    15. Genetics and pathology of inflammatory components on AMD
    16. Genome-wide association study of age-related eye diseases in Chinese population
    17. Clinical genetics of retinoblastoma: an Asian perspective
    18. Molecular and clinical genetics of retinoblastoma
    19. Current research perspectives in understanding diabetic retinopathy
    20. Genome-wide association studies of glaucoma
    21. Genetic complexity of primary angle-closure glaucoma in asians
    22. Genotype-phenotype correlation for POAG in the Middle East and other populations
    23. Corneal dystrophies in India
    24. Genetics of corneal endothelial dystrophies: an Asian perspective
    25. Keratoconus in Asia
    26. Genetics of pediatric eye diseases and strabismus in Asia
    27. Keratoconus: globally and in the Middle East (epidemiology, genetics, and future research)
    28. Genetics of myopia
    29. Ocular implications of gaucher disease
    30. Genetic background of uveitis in chinese population
    31. Usher syndrome in Chinese and Japanese population
    32. Homozygosity mapping for autosomal recessive ocular diseases
    33. Tools of genetic eye research and need for clinical research collaborations
    34. Eye genetics: the road ahead to quality standards
    35. Genetic counseling in Asia
    36. Epigenetic study in asian eye diseases
    37. Unique genetic signatures in Asian age-related macular degeneration: an opportunity for drug development
    38. A perspective: how gene therapeutics can help address global health issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Gyan Prakash and Takeshi Iwata, editors.
    Summary: This third volume, with three supporting editors, broadens its focus on genetic eye research from the Asian to the global scale. New efforts and a new awareness have sparked important discussions on genetic eye research, and new plans are being implemented to identify the genes responsible for numerous eye diseases. The book introduces the latest findings on genetics in eye diseases, gene therapy, and genome-wide association analysis, and the efforts of the Global Eye Genetic Consortium (GEGC). The books editors have been instrumental in developing strategies for discovering the new genes involved in many eye diseases. All chapters were written by leading researchers working on eye genetics from the fields of Human Genetics, Ophthalmology, Molecular Biology, Biochemistry, Sensory Sciences, and Clinical Research. Advances in Vision Research, Volume III is a major resource for all researchers, clinicians, clinical researchers, and allied eye health professionals with an interest in eye diseases around the globe.

    Contents:
    1. Expansion of Asian Eye Genetics Consortium (AEGC) to Global Eye Genetics Consortium (GEGC), Introduction of a global Phenotype-Genotype Database "GenEye" and Launch of New Training Programs at National Eye Institute (NEI)
    2. Global Womens Eye Health: a Genetic Epidemiologic perspective
    3. Establishing the Chinese Arm of GEGC
    4. Human material for research: Eye banking, biobanking and ethical access
    5. Current Understanding of Polypoidal Choroidal Vasculopathy
    6. Genetics of Age-related macular degeneration (AMD) in Asia
    7. The contribution of rare allele and Junk Genome in AMD pathogenesis
    8. Differential genotypes in age-related macular degeneration and polypoidal choroidal vasculopathy: a updated meta-analysis
    9. Genetic Epidemiology of Quantitative Traits of Primary Open Angle Glaucoma
    10. Association studies on retina diseases in Chinese population
    11. Congenital stationary night blindness (CSNB) an inherited retinal disorder where clear correlations can be made
    12. Genome analysis for inherited retinal disease: the state of the art
    13. Generation and analysis of induced photoreceptor-like cells from fibroblasts of patients with retinitis pigmentosa
    14. Genotype-phenotype of RPE65 mutations: A reference guide for gene testing and its clinical application
    15. Genetic variants and impact in PDE6B rod-cone dystrophy
    16. The retinitis pigmentosa genes
    17. Primary Congenital Glaucoma Genetics The Experience in Brazil
    18. Glaucoma genetics in Pakistan
    19. Contributions of Promoter Variants to Complex Eye Diseases
    20. Vascular Basement Membrane Thickening Basis of disease pathology in diabetic retinopathy
    21. Molecular Genetics and Clinical aspects of Macular Corneal Dystrophy
    22. Congenital and Inherited Cataracts
    23. Higher order aberrations: differences among populations from various demographics
    24. Genetics Of Microphthalmia: Global And Indian Perspectives
    25. Regional Differences in Prevalence of Myopia: Genetic or Environmental Effects?
    26. Consortium for Refractive Error and Myopia (CREAM): Vision, Mission and Accomplishments
    27. Oncologic properties of retinoblastoma genes
    28. Oncologic implications of genetic and epigenetic basis of pterygium
    29. The need for alternative therapies in eye disorders
    30. Gene Therapy and Retinal Disease
    31. The use of human pluripotent stem cells (hPSCs) and CRISPR-mediated gene editing in retinal diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Rod D. Roscoe, Erin K. Chiou, and Abigail R. Wooldridge.
    Summary: "Advancing Diversity, Inclusion, and Social Justice through Human Systems Engineering highlights how scholars and practitioners of HSE (inclusively defined to span many fields) can apply their theories and methods to understand and support healthy communities, include and empower diverse populations, and inspire strategies for a more inclusive future. This volume brings together experts from human factors, ergonomics, psychology, human-computer interaction, and more to demonstrate how these fields can be applied to societal challenges and solutions. Through a blend of research reports, literature reviews, and personal narratives, this volume explores these issues from the individual to the global scale, across diverse populations, and across multiple continents"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Preface: Inclusive scholarship for inclusive systems
    Section 1. Understanding and supporting healthy communities. Human systems engineering for societal transformation : a tale of two cities
    Inclusive decision-making : applying human factors methods to capture the needs and voices of marginalized populations
    HFE in underdeveloped countries : how do we facilitate equitable, egalitarian, and respectful progress?
    Researcher reflections on human factors and health equity
    The intersection of human factors engineering and health equity
    Using work domain analysis to advocate for social justice : meeting the needs of resource-constrained societies
    Section 2. Including and empowering diverse people. A human factors engineer's journey into enhancing LGBT status is academia
    All are welcome but terms and conditions apply
    "Nothing about us without us" transforming participatory research and ethics in human systems engineering
    Ergonomic analysis of working conditions of a recycler community in Medellín, Colombia
    Guiding technology design to empower older adults to actively engage in society
    Inclusive wearable design : developing a set of characteristics of socially acceptable BCI devices for women
    Section 3. Inspiring strategies for an inclusive future. Automation, work, and racial equity : how human systems engineering can shape the future of work
    The learning research and development center summer undergraduate research internship : a diversity internship in the learning sciences
    Facilitating a sense of belonging for women of color in engineering : the case for virtual internships
    Leading an EDI strategy in a UK university : reflections from an HFE professional
    Developing an effective diversity training intervention : best practices and challenges
    Reimagining community-based research and action in human factors : a dialogue across disciplines.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2019
  • Digital
    Tulasi Satyanarayana, Sunil Kumar Deshmukh, Mukund V. Deshpande, editors.
    Summary: The book provides an introduction to the basics of fungi, discussing various types ranging from edible mushrooms to Neurospora - a model system for genetics and epigenetics. After addressing the classification and biodiversity of fungi, and fungi in different ecological niches, it describes the latest applications of fungi, their role in sustainable environments and in alleviating stress in plants, as well as their role in causing plant and animal diseases. Further chapters explore the advances in fungal interactions research and their implications for various systems, and discuss plant-pathogen interactions. The book also features a section on bioprospecting, and is an extremely interesting and informative read for anybody involved in the field of mycology, microbiology and biotechnology teaching and research.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; References; Preface; Contents; About the Editors and Contributors; Part I: Basic Aspects of Fungi;
    1: The Mystical World of Mushrooms; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 History of Mushroom Research and Cultivation; 1.2.1 International Developments; 1.2.2 Indian Scenario of Mushroom Research and Cultivation; 1.3 Taxonomy of Mushroom; 1.3.1 Phylum: Ascomycota; 1.3.2 Phylum: Basidiomycota; 1.4 Magnitude of Mushroom Species; 1.4.1 Edible Mushroom Types; 1.5 Cultivation Potential of Mushroom; 1.5.1 Temperate Mushrooms; 1.5.1.1 Button Mushroom: Agaricus bisporus 1.5.1.2 Shiitake Mushroom: Lentinula edodes1.5.1.3 Flammulina Velutipes; 1.5.2 Subtropical Mushrooms; 1.5.2.1 Agaricus Bitorquis; 1.5.2.2 Oyster Mushrooms: Pleurotus Spp.; 1.5.2.3 Black Ear Mushroom: Auricularia Spp.; 1.5.2.4 Black Poplar Mushroom (Agrocybe aegerita); 1.5.3 Subtropical Mushrooms; 1.5.3.1 Paddy Straw Mushroom: Volvariella Spp.; 1.5.3.2 Milky Mushroom: Calocybe Indica; 1.6 Nutritional and Medicinal Properties of Mushrooms; 1.6.1 Proteins; 1.6.2 Vitamins; 1.6.3 Minerals; 1.6.4 Carbohydrate and Fiber; 1.6.5 Fat; 1.6.6 Energy Value; 1.6.7 Moisture 1.7 Medicinal Values of Mushroom1.7.1 Health Effects of Medicinal Mushroom; 1.7.2 Health and Nutritional Benefits of Eating Mushrooms; 1.8 Cultivation Methods of Different Mushrooms; 1.8.1 Oyster Mushroom Cultivation; 1.8.1.1 Advantages of Growing Oyster Mushroom; Difference of Substrates; Choice of Species; Simple Cultivation Technologies; Longer Shelf Life; High Productivity; 1.8.1.2 Steps in Oyster Mushroom Cultivation; Spawn Preparation; Preparation of Substrate; Sterilization of Substrate; Steam Sterilization; Hot Water Sterilization; Chemical Sterilization; Bed Preparation 1.8.3 Cultivation of Button Mushroom (Agaricus bisporus)1.8.3.1 Compost Preparation; Vegetative-Based Material; Animal Manure; Nitrogen Fertilizer; Carbohydrate Sources; Concentrated Meals; Supplementation to Rectify Mineral Deficiencies; 1.8.3.2 Methods of Composting; Long Method of Composting; Phase I; Phase II; 1.8.3.3 Bulk Pasteurization; Infrastructure; Machinery Required; Spawning; Casing; Casing Pasteurization and Application; Cropping; Crop Management; References;
    2: The Developmental History of Ustilago maydis: A Saprophytic Yeast, a Mycelial Fungus, Mushroom-Like, and a Smut Crop Management and HarvestingIncubation; Fruit Body Induction; Temperature; Relative Humidity; Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Requirements; Harvesting; 1.8.2 Cultivation of Milky Mushroom (Calocybe indica); 1.8.2.1 Spawn Preparation for Calocybe indica; 1.8.2.2 Substrate Preparation and Treatment; Chemical Steeping Treatment; Hot Water Treatment of the Substrate; 1.8.2.3 Bed Filling and Spawning of the Substrate; 1.8.2.4 Care and Maintenance after Spawning; 1.8.2.5 Casing; 1.8.2.6 Aftercare and Management During Production; 1.8.2.7 Harvesting; Production/Yield
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Powers, Wendell H.; Twiss, Sumner, B.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    U663 .P88
    1
  • Print
    Kevin M. Koo.
    Summary: This book presents a unique concept of merging nanotechnology and novel urinary biomarkers for accurate early prostate cancer detection, discussing an entire progressive pipeline of innovative new strategies in biosensor development, from a simple colorimetric system to a complex system for simultaneous multiple biomarker sensing. For newcomers to the field of nucleic acid biosensing, it also describes various isothermal amplification and amplification-free strategies, which are currently the main research areas. Lastly, the book introduces and demonstrates the notion of clinical nanobiosensor validation toward clinical translation: the ultimate aim of researchers in the biosensor field. This book is a valuable reference resource learners seeking inspiration for cancer biosensor development.

    Contents:
    Intro; Supervisor's Foreword; Parts of this thesis have been published in the following journal articles:; Acknowledgements; Contents; Abbreviations; 1 Unifying Next-Generation Biomarkers and Nanodiagnostic Platforms for Precision Prostate Cancer Management; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Next-Generation PCa Biomarkers; 1.3 Existing and Emerging Biomarker-Directed PCa Screening Diagnostics; 1.4 Nano-strategies for Next-Generation PCa Biomarker Detection; 1.5 Challenges in Clinical Translation of Novel Biomarkers and Nano-strategies; 1.6 Conclusions and Future Outlook; References 2 Colorimetric Gene Fusion Diagnostics for Visual Binary Readout2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Materials and Methods; 2.3 Results and Discussion; 2.4 Conclusions; References; 3 Label-Free Surface-Enhanced Raman Scattering Detection System for Clinical Biomarker Targets; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Materials and Methods; 3.3 Results and Discussion; 3.4 Conclusions; References; 4 Amplification-Free Electrochemical RNA Biomarker Sensing; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Materials and Methods; 4.3 Results and Discussion; 4.4 Conclusions; References 5 Simultaneous Analysis of Multiple Biomarkers via High-Throughput Parallel Profiling5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Materials and Methods; 5.3 Results and Discussion; 5.4 Conclusions; References; 6 Clinical Evaluation of Non-invasive Nanodiagnostics for PCa Risk Stratification; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Materials and Methods; 6.3 Results and Discussion; 6.4 Conclusions; References; 7 Summary and Future Work; 7.1 Summary; 7.2 Future Work; Curriculum Vitae
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Priya Hays.
    Summary: This book provides a unique perspective on the biomedical and societal implications of personalized medicine and how it helps to mitigate the healthcare crisis and rein in ever-growing expenditure. It introduces the reader to the underlying concepts at the heart of personalized medicine. An innovative second edition, this book functions as an update to the successful first edition to include new, state-of-the-art information and advancements in the fast-paced field of personalized medicine. Chapters examine pharmacogenomics, targeted therapies, individualized diagnosis and treatment, and cancer immunotherapies. The book also features an essential discussion on how the advent of genomic technologies gives clinicians the capability to predict and diagnose disease more efficiently and offers a detailed up-to-date compilation of clinical trials in cancer leading to breakthrough therapies. The book also addresses the impact of Big Data on personalized medicine and the newfound applications of digital health and artificial intelligence. A work that advocates for a patient-centered approach, Advancing Healthcare Through Personalized Medicine, Second Edition is an invaluable text for clinicians, healthcare providers, and patients.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction: Biomedical Innovation and Policy in the Twenty-First Century
    2. The Rise of Genomics and Personalized Medicine
    3. Patient Narratives: Personalized Medicine in the Field
    4. Alliances: Knowledge Infrastructures, and the Digitization of Precision Health
    5. Tumor Genesis and Precision Oncology
    6. Trends in Precision Oncology and Precision Medicine 2.0
    7.Personalized medicines impact on disease
    8. The Genome in the Clinic and Boardroom: Biomarkers, Diagnosis, Treatment, and Education
    9. A New Set of Clinical tools for Physicians
    10. Legislation, Reimbursement and the Regulatory Landscape
    11. Translational personalized medicine: Molecular profiling, druggable targets, and clinical genomic medicine
    12. The Health Economics of Personalized Precision Medicine
    13. Moral, Societal and Ethical Issues: Claims, Consequences, and Caveats
    14. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Amelie G. Ramirez, Edward J. Trapido, editors.
    Summary: This open access book gives an overview of the sessions, panel discussions, and outcomes of the Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos conference, held in February 2018 in San Antonio, Texas, USA, and hosted by the Mays Cancer Center and the Institute for Health Promotion Research at UT Health San Antonio. Latinos - the largest, youngest, and fastest-growing minority group in the United States - are expected to face a 142% rise in cancer cases in coming years. Although there has been substantial advancement in cancer prevention, screening, diagnosis, and treatment over the past few decades, addressing Latino cancer health disparities has not nearly kept pace with progress. The diverse and dynamic group of speakers and panelists brought together at the Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos conference provided in-depth insights as well as progress and actionable goals for Latino-focused basic science research, clinical best practices, community interventions, and what can be done by way of prevention, screening, diagnosis, and treatment of cancer in Latinos. These insights have been translated into the chapters included in this compendium; the chapters summarize the presentations and include current knowledge in the specific topic areas, identified gaps, and top priority areas for future cancer research in Latinos. Topics included among the chapters: Colorectal cancer disparities in Latinos: Genes vs. Environment Breast cancer risk and mortality in women of Latin American origin Differential cancer risk in Latinos: The role of diet Overcoming barriers for Latinos on cancer clinical trials Es tiempo: Engaging Latinas in cervical cancer research Emerging policies in U.S. health care Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos proves to be an indispensable resource offering key insights into actionable targets for basic science research, suggestions for clinical best practices and community interventions, and novel strategies and advocacy opportunities to reduce health disparities in Latino communities. It will find an engaged audience among researchers, academics, physicians and other healthcare professionals, patient advocates, students, and others with an interest in the broad field of Latino cancer.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos
    Chapter 2: Disaggregated Hispanic Groups and Cancer: Importance, Methodology and Current Knowledge
    Chapter 3: Colorectal Cancer Disparities in Latinos: Genes vs. Environment
    Chapter 4: Breast Cancer Risk and Mortality in Women of Latin American Origin
    Chapter 5: Prostate Cancer in U.S. Latinos: What Have We Learned and Where Should We Focus Our Attention
    Chapter 6: Differential Cancer Risk in Latinos: The Role of Diet
    Chapter 7: Biomarkers of Gastric Pre-Malignant Lesions
    Chapter 8: Molecular Subtypes and Driver Mutations in Latinos with Gastric Cancer: Implications for Etiological and Translational Research
    Chapter 9: The Biology of Breast Cancer Disparities in Hispanics: Current Knowledge, Gaps and Research Opportunities
    Chapter 10: Molecular Profiles of Breast Cancer in Hispanic/Latina
    Chapter 11: Biomarkers and Precision Medicine in Oncology Practice and Clinical Trials
    Chapter 12: Overcoming Barriers for Latinos on Cancer Clinical Trials
    Chapter 13: Breast Cancer Precision Medicine in Hispanics/Latinas: Focus on Luminal B Tumors
    Chapter 14: Is Precision Medicine Widening Cancer Care Disparities in Latino Populations? The Rutgers Cancer Institute of New Jersey Experience
    Chapter 15: A Vision for Improving Quality of Life Among Spanish-Speaking Latina Breast Cancer Survivors
    Chapter 16: Research Democracy in a Randomized Controlled Trial: Engaging Multiple Stakeholders in Patient-Centered Outcomes Research
    Chapter 17: Es Tiempo: Engaging Latinas in Cervical Cancer Research
    Chapter 18: Reaching Latinos Through Social Media and SMS for Smoking Cessation
    Chapter 19: The Need for a Holistic Approach to Prevent Reproductive Cancers among US Latinas: The Potential Impact of Normalizing Sexuality and Improving Communication
    Chapter 20: Critical Steps for Engaging Hispanics in Cancer Research: Building Capacity to Enhance Participation in Biospecimen Donation with Hispanic Communities
    Chapter 21: Emerging Policies in US Health Care
    Chapter 22: A Way Forward: The Future of Cancer Health Disparities Research in Latinos.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Amelie G. Ramirez , Edward J. Trapido, editors.
    Summary: This open access book is a collection of articles based on presentations from the 2020 Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos conference that gives an overview of conference outcomes. The vision of the conference has been to unite researchers, scientists, physicians and other healthcare professionals, patient advocates and students from across the world to discuss research advancements, identify gaps, and develop actionable goals to translate basic research findings into clinical best practices, effective community interventions, and professional training programs to decrease cancer risks and eliminate cancer disparities for Latinos. This conference comes at an especially important time when Latinos the largest and youngest minority group in the U.S. are expected to face a 142% rise in cancer cases in the coming years. Disparities continue to impact this population in critical areas: access to preventive and clinical care, changeable risk behaviors, quality of life, and mortality. Each chapter summarizes the presentation and includes current knowledge in the specific topic areas, identified gaps, and opportunities for future research. Topics explored include: Applying an Exposome-Wide (ExWAS) Approach to Latino Cancer Disparities Supportive Care Needs and Coping Strategies Used by Latino Men Cancer Survivors Optimizing Engagement of the Latino Community in Cancer Research Latino Population Growth and the Changing Demography of Cancer Implementation Science to Enhance the Value of Cancer Research in Latinos A Strength-Based Approach to Cancer Prevention in Latinxs Overcoming Clinical Research Disparities by Advancing Inclusive Research Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos: Building Collaboration for Action will appeal to a wide readership due to its comprehensive coverage of topics ranging from basic science and community prevention research to clinical practice to policy. The book is an essential resource for physicians and other medical professionals, researchers, scientists, academicians, patient advocates, and students. It also will appeal to policy-makers, NCI-designated cancer centers, academic centers, state health departments, and community organizations.

    Contents:
    Part I . Introduction
    Chapter 1. Advancing the Science of Cancer in Latinos
    Part II. Health Threats in the Latino Community
    Chapter 2. Applying an Exposome-Wide (ExWAS) Approach to Latino Cancer Disparities
    Chapter 3. Population Health Challenges for Latinos in the US
    Part III. Vulnerable Populations and Cancer Health Disparities
    Chapter 4. Acute and Long-Term Neurological Complications of Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL) Therapy in Latino Children
    Part IV. Cancer Outcomes and Survivorship in Latinos
    Chapter 5. Supportive Care Needs and Coping Strategies Used by Latino Men Cancer Survivors
    Chapter 6. Cancer Care Delivery Among Breast Cancer Patients: Is It the Same for All?
    Part V. Cancer in the Era of Precision Medicine
    Chapter 7. Genetic Ancestry and Breast Cancer Subtypes in Hispanic/Latina Women
    Chapter 8. Precision Medicine Approaches for Stratification and Development of Novel Therapies of Latin(x) Patients at Risk of Lung Malignancy
    Part VI. Engaging Latinos in Cancer Research
    Chapter 9. Optimizing Engagement of the Latino Community in Cancer Research
    Part VII. Emerging Policies Impacting Latino Care
    Chapter 10. Latino Population Growth and the Changing Demography of Cancer
    Chapter 11. Financial Hardship, Food Insecurity, and Forgone Medical Care
    Part VIII. Implementation Science, Innovative Technologies and the Future of Cancer Care
    Chapter 12. Implementation Science to Enhance the Value of Cancer Research in Latinos: A Perspective from the National Cancer Institute
    Chapter 13. Advancing E-health Interventions in Cancer Control and Survivorship for Hispanic/Latina Breast Cancer Patients
    Part IX. Latino Lifestyles: Acculturation, Nutrition, and Health
    Chapter 14. Impact of Obesity and Related Factors in Breast Cancer Survivorship Among Hispanic Women
    Chapter 15. A Strength-Based Approach to Cancer Prevention in Latinxs
    Part X. Advances in Cancer Therapy and Clinical Trials
    Chapter 16. Overcoming Clinical Research Disparities by Advancing Inclusive Research
    Part XI. HPV Vaccination for Cancer Prevention
    Chapter 17. The Road to Cervical Cancer Elimination
    Part XII. Latino Cancer Health Disparities: Moving Forward
    Chapter 18. Looking Forward: Continuing the Collaboration for Action
    Appendices A-D
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Kathleen Brewer-Smyth.
    Summary: The entire world is in crisis with adverse childhood experiences (ACEs) and other lifetime trauma at an all-time high. This book is a valuable resource to promote optimal brain function for everyone, but especially for survivors of trauma who are particularly at risk throughout the life course. It is critical for healthcare providers, schoolteachers and administration, public safety professionals, foster and adoptive parents, employers and loved ones to understand the potential life-long consequences that ACEs can have in the lives of survivors. This book describes the complexities behind why behaviors occur if hurt people hurt themselves and others. The first half of this book addresses what can go wrong in the brain and body after trauma that potentially leads to life-long poor bio-behavioral health outcomes. The second half of this book addresses how the life-long poor bio-behavioral health outcomes can be prevented, mitigated or potentially reversed. This book is necessary for everyone who is interested in optimizing brain function, especially survivors of ACEs and other trauma throughout the life course who are at greater risk. The major focus of the book is on how to prevent long-term negative consequences of trauma and how to restore the brain, body, behavior and emotions.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword by Ann Wolbert Burgess
    Foreword by Christina D. Spink
    Foreword by Harold G. Koenig
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Book
    About the Author
    Part I: Overview of Adverse Traumatic Experiences
    1: Introduction, Epidemiology, Measurement, and the Cycle of Trauma
    Epidemiology of Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACEs)
    The Cost of ACEs
    Measurement of Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACEs)
    Healthy Stress Versus Toxic Stress
    Intergenerational and Other Cycles of Trauma: Hurt People May Hurt Themselves and Others
    Epigenetics
    Conclusion
    Resources Suicide Resources
    References
    Part II: The Potential Serious Nature of Adverse Childhood Experiences
    2: Adverse Childhood Experiences and Neurodevelopment
    Mental Health Conditions
    Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) and Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD)
    Post-traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
    Bipolar Affective Disorder (BP) and Schizophrenia (SZ)
    Intrauterine Environment
    Exposure to Alcohol and Other Substances
    Maternal Health and the Developing Child
    Summary and Conclusion
    Resources
    References 3: Potential Lifelong Neurobiological, Bio-behavioral, and Other Outcomes of Trauma
    Post-traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
    Complex Trauma
    High-Risk Behaviors: Lack of Regard for Self and Others
    Lifestyle, Mental and Physical Outcomes
    Obesity, Type 2 Diabetes, and Related Health Conditions
    Risky Sexual Behavior and Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Substance Use
    Other Eating Disorders
    The Impact of COVID-19 Trauma on Diet and Weight
    Relationships
    Criminal Behavior
    Antisocial Personality Disorder
    Homelessness
    Summary and Conclusion
    Resources Suicide Resources
    Eating Disorder Resources
    References
    Part III: The Potential Impact of Trauma on the Brain, Body, Behavior and Society
    4: Childhood Physical Abuse (CPA), Childhood Sexual Abuse (CSA), Abusive Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI), Childhood Emotional Abuse (CEA), Neglect, and Other Trauma
    Individual Risk Factors
    Family Risk Factors
    Community Risk Factors
    Childhood Physical Abuse
    Abusive Traumatic Brain Injuries (TBI)
    Long-Term Outcomes
    Childhood Sexual Abuse (CSA) and Other Sexual Trauma
    Neurobiology of the Normal Stress Response Potential Lifelong Hypothalamic-Pituitary-Adrenal (HPA) Axis and Stress System Changes After ACEs
    Implications of Stress Systems Changes on Bio-behavioral Health Outcomes
    Childhood Emotional Abuse (CEA), Neglect, and Poverty
    Human Trafficking
    Secondary Vicarious Trauma
    Summary, Conclusions, and Recommendations
    Resources
    Suicide Resources
    Vicarious Trauma Resources
    References
    5: Absence of a Healthy Parent: Mental and Physical Illness, Substance Misuse, and Trauma in the Life of Parents, Caregivers, and Significant Others
    Mental Health Conditions
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Esen Özkaya, Kurtuluş Didem Yazganoğlu.
    Summary: This book describes adverse cutaneous drug reactions as among the most frequent events in patients receiving drug therapy. Cardiovascular drugs are an important group as there are a greater number of indications for the use of new drugs and their prescription continues to increase. The exact incidence of cutaneous side effects from cardiovascular drugs is difficult to estimate due to sporadic reporting. Moreover, a reliable connection between a certain drug and a certain type of reaction can only rarely be made, aside from the well-known angioedema/urticaria from angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, lichen planus/lichenoid reaction from beta adrenergic blockers, and photosensitivity from thiazid diuretics. These reactions can extend to rare but life-threatening conditions such as erythroderma, Stevens-Johnson syndrome, toxic epidermal necrolysis and drug hypersensitivity syndrome. Adverse Cutaneous Drug Reactions To Cardiovascular Drugs reviews the reported types of reactions to cardiovascular drugs. Each is discussed according to drug class and the type of dermatologic reaction with special emphasize on cross-reactions and the role of patch testing in diagnosis. A total of 116 images are included featuring clinical appearance of common adverse cutaneous drug reactions and diagnostic procedures such as patch and photopatch testing with the suspected drugs. Complementary tables may allow to scan the most common cutaneous reactions and the related cardiovascular drugs along with the possible cross reactions at first glance. It will thus be of considerable importance to all dermatologists and medical professionals who manage the skin, while being an important reference resource for cardiologists in terms of identifying potential adverse reactions to the drugs they prescribe.

    Contents:
    Introduction (General information on different types of ACDR)
    Angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors
    Angiotensin II receptor blockers
    Alpha-2 adrenergic receptor agonists
    Alpha-adrenergic receptor blockers
    Adrenergic neuron blockers
    Class I antiarrhythmic drugs (sodium channel blockers)
    Beta adrenergic receptor blockers (class II antiarrhythmics)
    Class III antiarrhythmics
    Calcium channel blockers (class IV antiarrhythmics)
    Diuretics
    Sympathomimetics
    Vasodilatory drugs
    Lipid lowering drugs
    Platelet inhibitors
    Thrombolytics
    Anticoagulants
    Miscellaneous drugs
    Diagnostic procedure: The role of patch. .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Bengt Fadeel, Antonio Pietroiusti, Anna A. Shvedova.
    Summary: Bio-nano interactions / Dana Westmeier, Shirley K. Knauer, Roland H. Stauber, Dominic Docter -- Physicochemical characterization / Kristen Rasmussen, Hubert Rauscher, Agnieszka Mech -- Toxicity tests / Maria Dusinska, Elise Rundén-Pran, Jürgen Schnekenburger, Jun Kanno -- Computational approaches / Tu C. Le, Vidana Epa, Lang Tran, Dave Winkler -- Exposure Assessment / Kai Savolainen, Antonio Pietroiusti -- Biomonitoring / Enrico Bergamaschi, Irirna Guseva Canu, Adriele Prina-Mello, Regulation and legislation / Kirsten Rasmussen, Brigit Sokull-Klüttgen, IL Je Yu, Jun Kanno, Akihiro Hirose, Maureen R. Gwinn -- Risk assessment and risk management / Robert Landsiedel, Ursula G. Sauer, Wim H De Jong -- Respiratory system, part one / Craig A. Plooand, Ken Donaldson -- Respiratory system, part two / Harri Alenius, Michael R. Shurin, Galina V. Shurin, Don Beezhold, Anna A. Shvedova -- Cardiovascular system / Jennifer B. Raftis, Nicholas L. Mills, Rodger Duffin -- Neurological system / Myrtill Simkó, Mats-olof Mattsson, Robert A. Yokel -- Immune system / Diana Boraschi, Bengt Fadeel, Albert Duschl -- Endorine system / Xuefei Lu, Yong Zhu, Tao Zhu -- Skin / Nancy A. Monteiro-Riviere, Francesca Larese Filon -- Gastrointestinal system / Mark A. Jepson, Hans Bouwmeester -- Reproduction and development / Luisa Campagnolo, Karin S. Hougard -- Genotoxicitiy and cancer / Shareen H. Doak, Ying Liu, Chunying Chen.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Tridente.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Kinases
    Kinase inhibitors
    Adverse events
    Imantinib
    Gefitinib
    Erlotinib
    Sorafenib
    Sunitinib
    Dasatinib
    Lapatinib
    Nilotinib
    Pazopanib
    Vandetanib
    Vemurafenib
    Crizotinib
    Ruxolitinib
    Axitinib
    Bosutinib
    Regorafenib
    Cabozantinib
    Ponatinib
    Dabrafenib
    Trametinib
    Afatinib
    Idelaisib
    Ibrutinib
    Overview
    Conclusion and perspectives.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Tridente.
    Summary: This monograph gathers and evaluates data on adverse events (AEs) associated specifically with those 'biomedicines' - monoclonal antibodies, fusion proteins, and cytokines - that have recently entered therapeutic use in humans. All AEs observed when using each member of this new drug class are covered, with a view to improving understanding of pathogenesis, facilitating prevention, monitoring, and control, and contributing to the development of better drugs that provide benefits while minimizing risk. Further aspects here examined include the role of drug mechanisms of action and immunogenicity in relation to AEs outcome and induction of systemic syndromes. Additional data on AEs in off-label treatments are also considered. Electronic data sheets, downloadable from the Springer Extra Materials platform, include more detailed safety data as well as additional basic information on product characteristics, pre- and post-marketing AEs classified according to frequency, and system/organ targeting. Data on excipients and selected information on drug interactions and associations are also provided. Adverse Events with Biomedicines: Prevention Through Understanding will serve as a detailed, practical guideline to this important new area, which demands the attention of clinicians, immunologists, oncologists, allergologists, public health professionals, and drug companies.

    Contents:
    Part I. General Aspects: 1 Introduction
    2 Adverse drug events to biomedicines
    3 Systemic syndromes caused by biomedicines
    Part II. Monoclonal antibodies: 4 Monoclonal antibodies
    5 Abciximab
    6 Adalimumab
    7 Alemtuzumab
    8 Basiliximab
    9 Belimumab
    10 Bevacizumab
    11 Brentuximab
    12 Canakinumab
    13 Catumaxomab
    14. Certolizumab
    15 Cetuximab
    16 Daclizumab
    17 Denosumab
    18 Eculizumab
    19 Edrecolomab
    20 Efalizumab
    21 Gemtuzumab
    22 Golimumab
    23 Ibritumomab
    24 Infliximab
    25 Ipilimumab
    26 Muromonab
    27 Natalizumab
    28 Nimotuzumab
    29 Ofatumumab
    30 Omalizumab
    31 Palivizumab
    32 Panitumumab
    33 Pertuzumab
    34 Ranibizumab
    35 Rituximab
    36 Tocilizumab
    37 Tositumomab
    38 Trastuzumab
    39 Ustekinumab
    Part III Fusion proteins: 40 Fusion proteins
    41 Abatacept
    42 Aflibercept
    43 Alefacept
    44 Belatacept
    45 Etanercept
    46 Rilonacept
    47 Romiplostim
    Part IV Cytokines : 48 Cytokines
    49 Interleukins
    50 Denileukin-diftitox
    51 Anakinra
    52 Interferons
    53 Hemopoietic stimulatory factors
    54 Myelopoietic stimulatory factors
    55 Thrombopoietic stimulatory factor
    56 Pluripotent growth factors
    57 Epidermal growth factors
    Part V Overview: 58 Biomedicines as adverse event inducers
    59 Conclusions and perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    volume editors, Lluís Puig, Wayne Gulliver.
    Contents:
    Adverse reactions to biologics in psoriasis / Lockwood, S.J., Prens, L.M.; Kimball, A.B.
    Clinical trial and registry data / Gooderham, M., Papp, K.
    Immunosuppression/infections across indications / Al-Khalili, A., Dutz, J.P.
    The immunogenicity of biologic therapies / Garcias, S., Demengeot, J.
    Paradoxical reaction S : anti-tumor necrosis factor alpha agents, Ustekinumab, Secukinumab, Ixekizumab, and others / Puig, L.
    Bullous diseases / Corbaux, C., Joly, P.
    Adverse reactions of antibody-therapy for primary cutaneous lymphomas : Rituximab, Brentuximab vedotin, Alemtuzumab, and Mogamulizumab / Saulite, I., Guenova, E., Hoetzenecker, W.
    Adverse reactions to biologics : melanoma (Ipilimumab, Nivolumab, Pembrolizumab) / Hwang, S.J.E., Fernández-Peñas, P.
    Skin manifestations of targeted antineoplastic therapy / Sanmartín, O.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Fernando Rojo, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the biochemistry and genetics of aerobic degradation of hydrocarbons and lipids by bacteria and yeasts, as well as the functional genomics of the best-known microorganisms involved in these processes. It forms part of the Handbook of Hydrocarbon and Lipid Microbiology Series, a definitive resource of current knowledge on the diverse aspects of the interactions of microbes with hydrocarbons and lipids. Chapters are mainly focused on the new discoveries of recent years. It is aimed to scientists and others interested in different aspects of the microbiology of hydrocarbons.

    Contents:
    A Genomic View of the Catabolism of Aromatic Compounds in Pseudomonas
    A Genomic View of the Catabolism of Short Chain Alkanes
    Aerobic Degradation of Aromatic Hydrocarbons
    Aerobic Degradation of Aromatic Hydrocarbons: Enzyme Structures and Catalytic Mechanisms
    Aerobic Degradation of Chloroaromatics
    Aerobic Degradation of Gasoline Ether Oxygenates
    Aerobic Degradation of Halogenated Aliphatics
    Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Methane Monooxygenase
    Biosynthesis, Insertion and Function of Fe-S Cofactors
    Biosynthesis, Insertion and Function of Flavin Cofactors
    Biosynthesis, Insertion and Function of haem-iron Prosthetic Groups
    Computational Framework for Integration of Lipidomics Data into Metabolic Pathways
    Degradation of Dimethylsulfoniopropionate (DMSP) and Dimethylsulfide (DMS)
    Degradation of Rubber/Polyisoprene
    Diversity and Common Principles in Enzymatic Activation of Hydrocarbons: An Introduction
    Energetic and Other Quantitative Aspects of Microbial Hydrocarbon Utilization: An Introduction:
    Enzymes for Aerobic Degradation of Alkanes in Bacteria
    Enzymes for Aerobic Degradation of Alkanes in Yeasts
    Evolution of New Catabolic Functions Through Gene Assembly by Mobile Genetic Elements
    Experimental Evolution of Novel Regulatory Activities in Response to Hydrocarbons and Related Chemicals
    Functional Gene Diversity, Biogeography, Dynamics
    Genetic Features and Regulation of n-Alkane Metabolism in Bacteria
    Genetic Features and Regulation of n-Alkane Metabolism in Yeasts
    Genetic Features of Methylotrophs
    Genetics and Functional Genomics of Aerobic Degradation of Hydrocarbons: An Introduction
    Genetics and Molecular Features of Bacterial Dimethylsulfoniopropionate (DMSP) and Dimethylsulfide (DMS) Transformations
    Genetics of Biphenyl Biodegradation and Co-Metabolism of PCBs
    Genetics of Rubber/Polyisoprene Degradation
    Genetics and Ecology of Isoprene Degradation
    Genomic View of Mycobacterial High Molecular Weight Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon Degradation
    Global Aerobic Degradation of Hydrocarbons in Aquatic Systems
    Global Aerobic Degradation of Hydrocarbons in Terrestrial Systems
    Global Consequences of the Microbial Production and Consumption of Inorganic and Organic Sulfur Compounds
    Key Features of Aerobic Hydrocarbon Biodegrader Genomes
    Lipid Degradation
    Lipid Cycles
    Lipolytic Enzymes from Bacteria
    Lipolytic Enzymes from Yeasts
    Metabolism of Steroids
    Oxidative Inactivation of Ring-Cleavage Extradiol Dioxygenases: Mechanism and Ferredoxin-Mediated Reactivation
    Pathways for the Degradation of Fatty Acids in Bacteria
    Phylogenomics of Aerobic Bacterial Degradation of Aromatics
    Physiology and Biochemistry of the Aerobic Methane Oxidizing Bacteria
    Potential for Microbial Interventions to Reduce Global Warming
    Rational Construction of Bacterial Strains with New/Improved Catabolic Capabilities for the Efficient Breakdown of Environmental Pollutants
    Regulation of the Degradation of Fatty Acids in Bacteria
    Regulation of the Degradation of Fatty Acids in Yeast
    Stereochemistry of Hydrocarbon-transforming Enzyme Reactions
    Structure-Function Relationships and Engineering of Haloalkane Dehalogenases
    Transcriptional Control of the TOL Plasmid Pathways.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer Live
    2018- Continuously updated edition
  • Digital
    edited by William W. Hurd, William Beninati.
    Summary: Now in its fully revised and expanded second edition, this volume is the definitive resource on long-distance air transport of injured patients in both peacetime and wartime. It discusses the history of aeromedical evacuation, triage and staging of the injured patient, evacuation from site of injury to medical facility, air-frame capabilities, medical capabilities in- flight, response to in-flight emergencies, and mass emergency evacuation. Specific medical conditions are addressed in detail in the second half of the book, including general surgical casualties such as abdominal wounds and soft tissue injuries, vascular injuries, maxillofacial injuries, head and spinal cord injuries, ophthalmologic casualties, orthopedic casualties, burns, pediatric casualties, obstetric-gynecologic casualties, and more. For each medical condition, important topics are addressed such as conditions needed to be met before transportation, special concerns, supplies and needs of the specific patients and possible in-flight emergencies and their appropriated treatment. Containing several new chapters and featuring extensively updated contributions from experts in the field, Aeromedical Evacuation: Management of the Acute and Stabilized Patient, Second Edition is a must-have reference for a whole new generation of military flight surgeons and flight nurses responsible for aeromedical evacuation of casualties as well as civilian physicians and nurses involved in air transport of ill and post-operative patients. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Aeromedical Evacuation: A Historical Perspective
    Military Casualty Evacuation: MEDEVAC
    Civilian Air Medical Transport
    Aircraft Considerations for Aeromedical Evacuation
    Preparation for Long-Distance Aeromedical Evacuation
    Aeromedical Patient Staging
    Military Aeromedical Evacuation Nursing
    Critical-Care Air Transport: Patient Flight Physiology and Organizational Considerations
    Aeromedical Evacuation of Patients with Abdominal, Genitourinary, and Soft Tissue Injuries
    Orthopedic Patients
    Aeromedical Evacuation of the Neurosurgical Patient
    Otorhinolaryngology Head and Neck Surgery Patients
    Care of Ophthalmic Casualties
    Peripheral Vascular Casualties
    Aeromedical Evacuation of Cardiothoracic Casualties
    Burn Casualties
    Patients Requiring Mechanical Ventilation
    Medical Casualties
    Aeromedical Evacuation of Patients with Contagious Infections
    Aeromedical Evacuation of Obstetric and Gynecological Patients
    Overview of Pediatric and Neonatal Transport
    Aeromedical Evacuation of Psychiatric Casualties.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Stefan Gress.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomy and Function
    The?Perfect Look?
    Indications
    Labia minora: Planning the Procedure
    Surgical Techniques
    Pitfalls & Complications
    Aftercare. Labia majora: Planning the Procedure
    Surgical Technique
    Pitfalls & Complications
    Aftercare
    Before surgery
    Aftercare
    Consent
    FAQs.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Preeti Jindal, Narendra Malhotra, Shashi Joshi, editors.
    Summary: Aesthetic or cosmetic gynecology is a rapidly expanding and much in demand field worldwide. This book covers all aspects of cosmetic gynecology in great details and interdisciplinary fields. It provides information and practical tips on the new evolving and fast growing branch of aesthetic and regenerative gynecology. The book covers basics along with illustrations, practical tips and troubleshooting points. Chapters include anatomy, physiology, pathology and comprehensive management of diseases in relation to cosmetic gynecology. The book explains the basics of techniques and devices used in this field such as several energy based and high tech devices like lasers, Hifu, HIFEM, their safety profile, scope and uses in an easy to understand language supported by illustrations. It also covers complications, controversies and medicolegal issues surrounding this field. The book includes chapters from national and international experts of each technique and helps in systematic evidence based learning. The book serves as a comprehensive book for postgraduates and consultants in gynecology, plastic surgery, dermatology, urogynecology, vascular surgery, general surgery, for cosmetologists and those interested in regenerative sciences.

    Contents:
    Introduction to rising field of aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Epidemiological perspective in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Anatomy and physiology in relation to aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Counselling your patient of aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Medicolegal aspects in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Invasive and non-invasive procedures in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Energy based devices - comparisons and indications
    Lasers in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology - physics, types, applications, safety profiles
    Laser in vaginal rejuvenation
    Erbium laser in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Management of urinary incontinence in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Non-cosmetic uses of laser in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology - vulvodynia, incontinence, infections, warts
    Genitourinary syndrome of menopause
    Radiofrequency in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Carboxytherapy in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    High intensity focused ultrasound (HIFU) in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    High intensity focused electronic-magnetic technology (HIFEM) in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    LED therapy in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Sexual rejuvenation in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Non-invasive treatment of varicose veins in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Hymenoplasty, vaginoplasty and perineoplasty in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Labiaplasty and cliteroplasty in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Butt and thigh reshaping in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Nanofat grafting in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Abdominoplasty in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Breast lifting and reduction in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Thread lift in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Hypo pigmentations and hyper pigmentation of face and genital area
    Chemical peels and vulval whitening in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Scars in aesthetic and regenerative (especial reference to acne and stretch marks) gynecology
    Hair transplant and hair removal in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Gender reassignment surgery in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Injectables in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    HA for bio remodeling
    Platelet rich plasma (PRP) in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Role of amniotic fluid in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Role of exosomes in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Stem cell therapy in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Anesthesia in procedures of aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Cool sculpting in aesthetic and regenerative gynecology
    Future of aesthetic and regenerative gynecology.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Lucian Fodor, Yehude Ullmann, editors.
    Summary: With coverage ranging from skin anatomy to patient selection, safety to complications, this book offers complete coverage of Intense Pulsed Light (IPL) treatments. It includes numerous illustrations, tables and color pictures.

    Contents:
    Skin anatomy
    Light-tissue interaction
    IPL safety: legal issue
    Patient selection
    Office-based anesthesia for IPL
    Facial skin rejuvenation with IPL
    IPL hair removal
    IPL for stria distensae
    IPL for acne vulgaris
    IPL for rosacea
    IPL for telangiectasia and reticular veins
    IPL for portwine stain
    IPL for pigmented lesions
    IPL for scars
    Recommendations after IPL treatment
    Other IPL applications.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Roy de Vita, editor.
    Summary: This book deals with the management of difficult breast augmentation revision cases. After critically reviewing the complication rate in aesthetic breast augmentation, the authors go on to discuss the importance of the inframammary fold. Moreover, this book provides detailed instructions on how to manage capsular contracture; wrinkling; animation deformity; implant rotation and waterfall deformities; symmastia; implant rupture; infection and implant exposure; double bubble; and bottoming out. Each chapter starts with a short explanation of the complication, followed by step-by-step revision procedures. Checklists, high-quality images, flowcharts and bullet point-like presentations will help surgeons solve these various problems. Well-structured chapters and a concise format make this book a quick reference guide that aids clinicians in making decisions and providing treatment.

    Contents:
    Aesthetic Breast augmentation complications rate, a critical review
    The importance of inframammary fold (IMF) in aesthetic breast augmentation
    Capsular contracture
    Wrinkling
    Animation deformity
    Implant rotation and waterfall deformities
    Symmastia
    Implant rupture
    Infection and Implant exposure
    Double bubble and bottoming out.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Shilpi Khetarpal, editor.
    Summary: Platelet rich plasma therapy uses a patient's own platelets to encourage and accelerate healing in a variety of tissues. With the growing popularity of using platelet rich plasma for aesthetic procedures, the need for a book that ties together all of the current literature in one place has become more pressing. This book fills in that gap as a comprehensive guide that covers history, basic science and clinical utility of platelet rich plasma with its uses in hair restoration, facial rejuvenation, and some wound healing. It includes the latest studies/literature from peer reviewed journals and clinical, anecdotal experience. Chapters provide an extensive look at how to describe the mechanism of action of platelet rich plasma (PRP) in the skin and hair; how to identify the difference between PRP, platelet rich fibrin, and stem cells; and identify the various PRP preparation systems and how to calculate dosing. Aesthetic Clinician's Guide to Platelet Rich Plasma is written especially for the aesthetic clinician, whether dermatologist or plastic surgeon. This book will find utility across specialties and with it's extensive coverage it is a vital reference.

    Contents:
    History of PRP
    Basic Science of PRP
    Preparation systems
    Microneedling + PRP
    PRP for hair loss (AGA)
    PRP for scarring alopecia
    PRP for immune mediated alopecias
    Platelet rich fibrin (PRF)
    Stem cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Juarez M. Avelar.
    Summary: Rhytidoplasty is a palliative procedure in which face wrinkles are surgically removed to promote a more youthful appearance. This book, written by leading specialists for Brazil and abroad, discusses a wide variety of topics related to facial rejuvenation. The first sections focus on the surgical planning, including psychological considerations, preparation of the patient and anatomical and biochemical changes caused by the aging process. It also describes the surgical anatomy of the forehead, face, neck and eyelids. The third section provides a comprehensive overview of the basic techniques of facelift with details of refined surgical approaches for each segment of the face and neck. It highlights liposuction techniques, lipoinjection as well as transference of stem cells, showing their importance in reshaping the facial contours. It addresses both the treatment of soft tissue and craniofacial bone structures to improve the aesthetics of the face. The next sections present the final scars after face-lifting, minimally invasive procedures as complementary approaches during rhytidoplasty and the associated procedures during rhytidoplasty. The last section discusses postoperative care. Aesthetic Facial Surgery consists of 64 chapters focusing on all aspects of face lifting, and meticulously describes surgical details not covered in other medical books. Featuring numerous figures, photographs, software and videos, it is a valuable resource for young and experience surgeons alike around the world.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Lee L.Q. Pu ; co-editors, Yu-Ray Chen, QingFeng Li, David Daehwan Park, Susumu Takayanagi, Woffles T.L. Wu, Fu-Chan Wei ; with illustrations and cover art by Bill Winn.
  • Digital
    Alberto Di Giuseppe, Melvin A. Shiffman, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive book covers anatomy, recent techniques, postoperative care, possible complications, and outcomes in aesthetic surgery of the abdomen. The extensive section on aesthetic procedures includes many important innovations in abdominoplasty. Detailed consideration is also given to the various potential complications, with guidance on their prevention, diagnosis, and management. The book is written by acknowledged experts in the topics on which they write. It will be of value for residents and fellows and more experienced surgeons in the fields of plastic surgery, general surgery, cosmetic surgery, and general surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hong Ryul Jin.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    Beth Haney.
    Summary: This book is a resource that offers guidance to nurses who are experienced or novice aesthetic practitioners and would like to improve their aesthetic practice and enhance patient safety and satisfaction. This textbook reviews skin structure and anatomy, what happens as facial structures age, the effects of aging coupled with environmental exposures, pharmacology of medications used in aesthetics, light-based device properties, patient selection, and benefits of treatments. In addition, it includes suggestions on how to communicate with patients to achieve successful outcomes. Aesthetic Procedures: Nurse Practitioner's Guide to Cosmetic Dermatology provides practitioners a one-source resource to attain more in-depth learning about cosmetic dermatology. Although there are several texts on individual aspects of aesthetic medicine, there is no all-inclusive book for nurses. This book affords the primary care practitioner the opportunity to add minimally invasive cosmetic dermatology procedures to their practice and perform the treatments safely, efficiently and effectively while avoiding common mistakes and minimizing complication risks. Education is paramount in creating a safe patient environment and as more clinicians turn to aesthetics to augment their practice, this book will be a valuable resource for nurses and practitioners all over the world.

    Contents:
    About the Author (Dr. Beth Haney, DNP)
    Endorsements
    Dedication
    Acknowledgements
    Important Message to Reader
    Foreword
    Introduction
    SECTION 1: Non-Invasive Treatments
    Chapter 1: Fads and Promises
    Chapter 2: Skin Anatomy and Physiology
    Chapter 3: Overview of Topical Treatments and Prescriptions
    SECTION 2: Laser and Light-Based Procedures
    Chapter 4: Laser and Light-Based Treatment Overview
    Chapter 5: Indications for Laser and Light-Based Treatments (conditions treated)
    Chapter 6: Laser and Light-Based Treatments: Patient Selection and Expected Outcomes
    SECTION 3: Minimally Invasive Procedures
    Neuromodulators
    Chapter 7: Neuromodulators; pharmacology of botulinum toxins for cosmetic use
    Chapter 8: Indications for Neuromodulators; Upper face
    Chapter 9: Indications for Neuromodulators; Lower Face
    Chapter 10: Indications for Neuromodulators; Other Uses and Future Possibilities
    Chapter 11: Complications and Corrections
    SECTION 4: Minimally Invasive Procedures - Dermal Fillers
    Chapter 12: Dermal Fillers; pharmacology of various types of dermal fillers for cosmetic use
    Chapter 13: Indications and Placement of Dermal Fillers
    Chapter 14: Complications and Corrections of Dermal Filler
    Section 5: Selected Novel Face and Body Treatments
    Chapter 15: Facial Skin Tightening
    Chapter 16: Body Shaping
    Section 6: Common Skin Conditions Affecting Appearances at Any Age
    Chapter 17: Acne in Adolescents and the Over 40 Age Groups
    Chapter 18: Menopausal Skin Issues and Remedies
    Chapter 19: When to Refer to a Plastic Surgeon
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Bruce Connell, Michael J. Sundine.
    Contents:
    Applied anatomy for safety in facelifting / Dino R. Elyassnia
    Facial analysis for facelifting / Michael J. Sundine
    Analysis of the neck / Nicholas Nikolov
    Facial aging / Bryan G. Forley
    Energy-based treatments for facial aging / Lawrence S. Bass and Jason N. Pozner
    Facial sculpting and facial slimming with neurotoxins / Woffles T.L. Wu
    Soft tissue fillers / Taiba Alrasheed, Paul Schembri, and Trevor M. Born
    Years of progression in facelifting and neck lifting / Steven M. Hamilton and Bruce Connell
    Male versus female facelift surgery : is there a difference? / Steven M. Hamilton
    Foreheadplasty : recognizing and treating aging in the upper face / Bruce Connell
    Endoscopic browlift / Scott R. Miller and Ahmad N. Saad
    Primary superficial musculoaponeurotic system facelift and neck lift / Michael J. Sundine and Bruce Connell
    Submental contouring / Bruce Connell
    Simultaneous facelift and fat grafting / Timothy J. Marten and Dino R. Elyassnia
    Midface lift / Garo Kassabian
    Condition-specific rhytidectomy : an evidence-based paradigm shift in facial rejuvenation / E. Gaylon McCollough and Fred G. Fedok
    Secondary facelifting / Michael J. Sundine
    Avoiding complications in facelifts / G. Hunt Neurohr
    Periorbital rejuvenation with autologous fat / Yifan Guo, Brian C. Drolet, and Patrick K. Sullivan
    Comparison of midface rejuvenation techniques / Michael J. Sundine
    Upper-eyelid blepharoplasty / Robert Flowers and Christopher Costa
    Lower-eyelid blepharoplasty / William P. Chen
    Lateral canthal complications in aesthetic eyelid surgery : prevention and reconstruction / M. Douglas Gossman
    Treatment of the tear-trough deformity / Ramsey J. Chouchair
    Management of the lateral periorbital area / Thomas A.B. Bell.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    Barış Çakır.
    Summary: This extensively revised second edition describes how techniques previously developed by Dr. Rollin Daniel for use in open rhinoplasty can be adapted for the closed approach. The author argues that this offers greater feedback during surgery, a shorter recovery period and absence of scarring. The book includes a full explanation of preoperative preparation, including evaluation of the nasal surface aesthetics using the concept of geometric polygons as aesthetic subunits to define both the existing deformity and the aesthetic goals. Aided by a wealth of color photos, it also provides step-by-step descriptions of the surgical techniques developed and modified to achieve the desired surface appearance, and illustrates how the novel dissection and redrape control methods reduce the healing time and enhance outcomes. Further, the book presents a series of case analyses documenting the benefits of the approach. Written in a "cookbook style" this superbly illustrated book enables plastic surgeons to quickly learn how to utilize the closed approach to rhinoplasty for optimal aesthetic benefit.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Toma T. Mugea, Melvin A. Shiffman, editors.
    Summary: This book covers all aspects of aesthetic breast surgery in an instructive, step-by-step format. The descriptions of procedures are completely up to date, encompassing newly introduced techniques and recent modifications of established techniques. Individual parts of the book are devoted to breast augmentation, mastopexy, and breast reduction. Detailed consideration is also given to risks and complications, with guidance on their avoidance and the treatment of complications. In addition, anatomy, anesthesia, and a range of miscellaneous procedures applicable in specific circumstances are all well covered. The authors are acknowledged experts in their fields who draw on a wealth of experience in describing and illustrating their personally favored techniques. Aesthetic Surgery of the Breast will be an ideal reference for both students (residents and fellows) and practicing cosmetic, plastic, and general surgeons.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Stephen B. Baker, Pravin K. Patel, and Jeffrey Weinzweig.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    [edited by] James D. Frame, Shahrokh C. Bagheri, David J. Smith, Husain Ali Khan.
    Summary: "Changing trends, ethnic and regional preferences, and a hands-on teaching method make cosmetic surgery uniquely challenging for novice and experienced surgeons alike. Aesthetic Surgery Techniques: A Case-Based Approach offers expert, real-world instruction by presenting chapters and patients in a classical fashion, providing a clinical perspective as you work through case after case, honing your knowledge and skills. A diverse, international group of highly reputable faculty takes you step by step through each case"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Introduction. Informed consent: protecting the patient and the surgeon
    Aesthetic medicine - surgical pearls
    Aesthetic applications for fillers
    Part 2: Head and neck. Section 1: forehead and brow
    Brow lift
    Endoscopic brow lift made easy
    Section 2: Eyes. Upper blepharoplasty
    Asian blepharoplasty
    Midface descent and malar support
    Anatomical relationship of SOOF and ROOF in eyelid rejuvenation
    Non-surgical rejuvenation of the periorbital area
    Section 3: Facelift. High SMAS facelift
    Management of the neck
    The turkey neck - surgical management
    Platysma bands
    Section 4: Rhinoplasty. Prominent nose
    Aesthetic nasal tip surgery
    Crooked nose
    The Middle Eastern- Mediterranean nose
    The Oriental rhinoplasty
    Male rhinoplasty
    Cosmetic dermatology of the nose and medical rhinoplasty
    Part 3: Peri oral aesthetics and dentistry. Orthognathic surgery
    Implantology
    Aesthetic dentistry of the smile line
    Part 4: Breast. Small breast
    Breast reduction
    Mastopexy with mesh for breast ptosis
    Simultaneous augmentation and periareolar mastopexy: indications and limitations
    Asymmetric breast
    Male breast
    Part 5: Trunk / abdominal wall. Improving the waistline with the modified Brazilian abdominoplasty
    Post-bariatric abdominoplasty
    Non-excisional management of the anterior abdominal wall
    Body contouring following massive weight loss
    Gluteal augmentation
    Part 6: Upper and lower extremity. Rejuvenation of the arm
    Aesthetic management of the aging hand
    Inner thigh lift
    Inner thigh reduction: reshaping using a two way vector technique.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Lina Triana.
    Summary: This book schematically discusses the available techniques for aesthetic vaginoplasty, including vagina rejuvenation and other related surgical and non-surgical approaches. By furthering our understanding of the field, it promotes a better surgical practice on aesthetic vaginal surgeries. More specifically, this book will enable surgeons to correctly assess patients, choose and plan procedures, and reproduce the most common surgical aesthetic vaginal procedures. Each chapter is written in a pedagogical way, promoting a direct applicability. For each surgical procedure discussed, it features topics such as consultation and patients intentions, clinical examination, anatomy and important landmarks, surgical technique and possible complications. Aesthetic Vaginal Plastic Surgery: A Practical Guide is intended for any medical professional interested in vagina aesthetic and rejuvenation procedures, especially those in the fields of plastic surgery, gynecology and urology.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Chapter 1 Why Genital and Vaginal Rejuvenation
    Chapter 2 Challenges When Starting My Vaginal Rejuvenation Practice
    Part II: Vaginal Rejuvenation—External Aesthetic Surgical Techniques
    Chapter 3 Wedge Labiaplasty
    Chapter 4 Lazy S Labiaplasty (Edge Labiaplasty)
    Chapter 5 Longitudinal Hoodplasty
    Chapter 6 Horseshoe Hoodplasty
    Chapter 7 Labiaplasty and Hoodplasty Combined
    Chapter 8 Labia Majora Augmentation
    Chapter 9 Labia Majora Resection
    Chapter 10 Pubic Region
    Chapter 11 Hymenoplasty
    Part III Vaginal Rejuvenation: Internal Aesthetic Surgical Techniques
    Chapter 12 Perineoplasty
    Chapter 13 Anterior Vaginoplasty
    Chapter 14 Posterior Vaginoplasty
    Chapter 15 Combination of Anterior and Posterior Vaginoplasty plus Perineoplasty
    Part IV: Vaginal Rejuvenation: Nonsurgical and Beyond
    Chapter 16 Labia Majora Non-Surgical Options: Lightening—Fillers—Skin Tightening
    Chapter 17 Non-Surgical Vaginal Tightening Procedures
    Chapter 18 G Spot Enhancement.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    lore m. dickey, Jae A. Puckett.
    Summary: "Expert guidance on a collaborative approach to mental health care guided by client-driven goals This volume provides fundamental and evidence-based information on working with transgender and gender diverse people in mental health services. The authors, who are experts in the field, outline the key qualities of affirming mental health services, and explore strategies for improving inclusivity and evidence-based care with trans clients. dickey and Puckett also provide insight into current topics, such as working with youth, the harmful and ill-advised approach known as rapid onset gender dysphoria, and whether and how autism might be a co-occurring diagnostic concern. Practitioners will find the printable resources provided are invaluable for their clinical practice, including sample letters of support for trans clients who are seeking gender affirming medical care."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Affirmative Counseling for Transgender and Gender Diverse Clients
    Table of Contents
    1 Description
    2 Theories and Models
    3 Assessment and Treatment Indications
    4 Treatment
    5 Case Vignettes
    6 Further Reading
    7 References
    8 Appendix: Tools and Resources
    Digital Access Ovid 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Misty M. Ginicola, Cheri Smith, Joel M. Filmore.
    Contents:
    Preface
    About the editors
    About the contributors
    Acknowledgments
    Foundations
    Developing competence in working with LGBTQI+ communities : awareness, knowledge, skills, and action / Misty M. Ginicola, Joel M. Filmore, and Cheri Smith
    The science of gender and affectional orientation / Misty M. Ginicola
    Counseling considerations and counseling strategies
    Developmental issues for LGBTQI+ people
    Growing up LGBTQI+ : the importance of developmental conceptualizations / Anneliese A. Singh, Kristopher M. Goodrich, Amney J. Harper, and Melissa Luke
    LGBTQI+ youth development / Melissa Luke, Amney J. Harper, Kristopher M. Goodrich, and Anneliese A. Singh
    LGBTQI+ persons in adulthood / Amy Moore-Ramirez, Melanie Kautzman-East, and Misty M. Ginicola
    Identity development, coming out, and family adjustment / Kristopher M. Goodrich and Misty M. Ginicola
    Physical and mental health challenges found in the LGBTQI+ population / Misty M. Ginicola, Joel M. Filmore, Cheri Smith, and Jahaan Abdullah
    Disaffirming therapy : the ascent and descent of sexual orientation change efforts / Peter Finnerty, Michael M. Kocet, Jeff Lutes, and Chad Yates
    Evidence based practice for counseling the lgbtqi+ population / Kristopher M. Goodrich and Misty M. Ginicola
    Affirmative, strength-based counseling with LGBTQI+ people / Peter Finnerty, Michael M. Kocet, Jeff Lutes, and Chad Yates
    Specialized populations
    Counseling lesbian clients / Cindy Anderton and Lindsay Woodbridge
    Counseling gay male clients / Misty M. Ginicola, Sam Sanabria, Joel M. Filmore, and Michael DeVoll
    Counseling bisexual/pansexual/polysexual clients / Misty M. Ginicola and Amney J. Harper
    Counseling transgender clients / Robyn Brammer and Misty M. Ginicola
    Counseling queer and genderqueer clients / Jeffry Moe, Jamie Bower, and Madeline Clark
    Counseling clients questioning their affectional orientation / Jared S. Rose and Eric R. Baltrinic
    Counseling intersex clients / Misty M. Ginicola
    Counseling asexual clients / Misty M. Ginicola and Angela Ruggiero
    Counseling two-spirit clients / Misty M. Ginicola
    Emerging issues
    Role of ethnicity
    Counseling a LGBTQI+ person of color / Joel M. Filmore and Misty M. Ginicola
    Counseling LGBTQI+ immigrants / David Barreto, Amy Moore-Ramirez, Melanie Kautzman-East, and Ryan Liberati
    Role of religion
    The role of religion and spirituality in counseling the LGBTQI+ client / Misty M. Ginicola, Brett H. Furth and Cheri Smith
    The grace model of counseling : navigating intersections of affectional orientation and Christian spirituality / R. Lewis Bozard, Jr., and Cody J. Sanders
    Working with LGBTQI+ clients who have experienced religious and spiritual abuse using a trauma informed approach / Misty M. Ginicola, Joel M. Filmore, and Michael Stokes
    Counselor advocacy
    Becoming an ally : personal, clinical, and school-based social justice interventions / Diane Estrada, Anneliese A. Singh, and Amney J. Harper
    Glossary of terms.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Aron Janssen, Scott Leibowitz, editors.
    Summary: This unique resource offers an in-depth, comprehensive look at different types of mental health needs of transgender and gender diverse youth, how these intersect with gender identity, gender expression, and sexual orientation, and provides practical information on how to ethically, responsibly, and sensitively care for these patients. Affirmative Mental Health Care for Transgender and Gender Diverse Youth: A Clinical Guide begins with three introductory chapters which contain practical information regarding assessment, psychological interventions, and the potential medical and surgical interventions that are indicated for youth with gender identity concerns. The remaining chapters are illustrated by multiple cases build around overarching chapter themes. Each case chapter opens with broad questions applicable to clinical practices, while the cases themselves focus on a particular co-occuring mental health condition. The case chapters are structured with intersectionality in mind, including elements of ethnic, racial, and cultural diversity, and the patients range over the full developmental spectrum, from pre-pubertal children to older adolescents. Chapter cases range in complexity as well, to provide readers with the tools they need to evaluate patients, and to assist in the decision of which presenting factors to prioritize in treatment at which time. Ending each chapter are clinical take-home messages, closing with additional practical knowledge that can be applied to other cases providers may see in their own practices. Written by expert clinicians in the field, Affirmative Mental Health Care for Transgender and Gender Diverse Youth: A Clinical Guide is an ideal resource not only for child and adolescent psychiatrists, but for clinicians across all mental health disciplines working with gender non-conforming youth, and who are interested in providing informed, affirmative, and intersectional care.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Affirming and Gender-Informed Assessment of Gender Diverse and/or Transgender Youth Across Development
    Chapter 2. Social Gender Transition and the Psychological Interventions
    Chapter 3. Transgender Adolescents and the Gender Affirming Interventions: Pubertal Suppression, Hormones, Surgery, and Other Pharmacological Interventions
    Chapter 4. Gender Dysphoria and Family Dynamics, and Culture: A Case Composite
    Chapter 5. The Gender Nonbinary Adolescent
    Chapter 6. "I'm Here to Get Taller and Because I Want to be a Boy": A Case of Down-Turner Mosaicism in a Prepubescent Gender-Nonconforming Child
    Chapter 7. Pre-pubertal Children with Gender Dysphoria: A Case to Illustrate the Management of Co-Occurring Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder and Disruptive Behavior Disorders
    Chapter 8. Gender Dysphoria and Autism Spectrum Disorders
    Chapter 9. Anxiety and Gender Dysphoria
    Chapter 10. Childhood Gender Nonconformity and Trauma Recovery in a Transgender Latina: A Retrospective Case Example
    Chapter 11. Depression and Gender Dysphoria
    Chapter 12. Gender Dysphoria and Psychotic Spectrum Disorders
    Chapter 13. Gender Dysphoria and Multiple Co-Occurring Psychiatric Issues: Compare and Contrast.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Harry P. Selker, June S. Wasser, editors.
    Summary: This book examines the landmark 2010 Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (ACA) from the perspective that health policy innovation is translational research directed at improving health. It delineates a new perspective about the creation and potential impact of the ACA and guides the development of health policy that is supported by best evidence that, in turn, transforms into practice, policy, and public benefit. Told by those involved in the creation and implementation of the ACA, the book reviews the history and impact of this ground-breaking legislation and recommends priorities, objectives, and next steps for translational research as the ACA is implemented. Featuring contributions from nationally renowned leaders in healthcare policy, this book adds to the public conversation about the ACA and its role in shaping health policy and contributes to a more realistic, nuanced, and productive understanding of this ground-breaking legislation by physicians, policy makers, and the public. It also provides a framework for next steps in continuing to improve U.S. health policy.

    Contents:
    Introduction: The Affordable Care Act as a National Experiment
    Objectives of the ACA
    Delivering on the Promise of the Affordable Care Act
    What We Got (and What Might Have Been): A Distinctively American Approach
    Commentary to Section II: Conducting the Experiment
    The Affordable Care Act as an Experiment: Data We Have, Expect to Have, and Should Have, from a Vermont Pilot Study
    The Center for Medicare and Medicaid Innovation: Its Purpose, Processes, and Desired Outcomes
    The Dream of a National Health Information Technology Infrastructure
    Results from a Massachusetts Pilot Study
    Commentary to Section III: Engaging the Public
    The Value Proposition for Individuals and the Public
    Messaging, Medicine, and Obamacare
    Commentary to Section IV: From Personal to Political to Policy: What Next?
    Supreme Court Review of the ACA and Political Gamesmanship
    Medicaid Expansion Challenges States
    Next Experiments in ACA Legislation and Policy
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    DeLellis, Ronald A.; Gardner, William A.; Silverberg, Steven G.; Sobin, L. H.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD651 .A882
    20
  • Digital
    Abdalbasit Adam Mariod, editor.
    Summary: The harvesting, processing and consumption of edible insects is one of the main keys to the sustainability of food chains on the African continent. Insects are the largest and most successful group of animals on the planet and it is estimated that they comprise 80% of all animals. This makes edible insects extremely important to the future survival of large populations across Africa and the world. Insects offer a complete animal protein that includes all 9 essential amino acids and are very competitive with other protein sources. They are also a good source of beneficial unsaturated fats, and many insects have a perfect Omega 3:6 balance. African Edible Insects As Alternative Source of Food, Oil, Protein and Bioactive Components comprehensively outlines the importance of edible insects as food and animal feed and the processing of insects in Africa. The text also highlights indigenous knowledge of edible insects and shows the composition and nutritional value of these insects, plus presents reviews of current research and developments in this rapidly expanding field. All of the main types of edible insects are covered, including their nutritional value, chemical makeup, and harvesting and processing details. The various preparation technologies are covered for each insect, as are their individual sensory qualities and safety aspects. A key aspect of this work is its focus on the role of insects in edible oils and gelatins. Individual chapters focus on entomophagy in Africa and the various key aspects of the continent's growing edible insect consumption market. As it becomes increasingly clear that the consumption of insects will play a major role in the sustainability of food chains in Africa, this work can be used as a comprehensive and up-to-date singular source for researchers looking for a complete overview on this crucial topic.

    Contents:
    Importance of Insects as Food in Africa
    African Edible Insect Consumption Market
    Entomophagy In Africa
    Microbiology of African Edible Insects
    The food safety of edible insects
    Interdisciplinary Uses of Some Edible Species
    Sensory Quality of Edible Insects
    Automation of Insect Mass Rearing and Processing Technologies of Mealworms
    The legislative status of edible insects in the world
    Sorghum bug (Agonoscelis pubescens) as a source of edible oil, protein and gelatin
    Watermelon bug (Aspongopus viduatus) as a source of edible oil, protein and gelatin
    The Nutritional Composition of African Edible Acridians (Grasshoppers)
    Nutrient Composition of Black Soldier Fly, Hermetia illucens
    Production, Nutrient Composition and Bioactive Components of Crickets (Gryllidae) for Human Nutrition
    Nutrient composition and bioactive components of ants Oecophylla smaragdina Fabricius
    Nutrient Composition and Bioactive Components of the Migratory Locust (Locusta migratoria)
    Nutrient composition and bioactive components of Mopane worm (Gonimbrasia belina)
    Nutrient composition of desert locust (Schistocerca gregaria)
    Nutritional Value of Brood and Adult Workers of The Asia Honeybee Species Apis cerana and Apis dorsata
    Nutrient composition of Mealworm (Tenebrio molitor)
    Nutrient composition of Termites Adepoju, Oladejo Thomas
    Ethiopian Termites in the Human Diet: an Investigation into their nutritional profile
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA8 .A51
    4
  • Digital
    Nadia Owusu.
    Summary: "Nadia Owusu grew up all over the world--from Rome and London to Dar-es-Salaam and Kampala. When her mother abandoned her when she was two years old, the rejection caused Nadia to be confused about her identity. Even after her father died when she was thirteen and she was raised by her stepmother, she was unable to come to terms with who she was since she still felt motherless and alone. When Nadia went to university in America when she was eighteen she still felt as if she had so many competing personas that she couldn't keep track of them all without cracking under the pressure of trying to hold herself together. A powerful coming-of-age story that explores timely and universal themes of identity, Aftershocks follows Nadia's life as she hauls herself out of the wreckage and begins to understand that the only ground firm enough to count on is the one she writes into existence"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    First earthquake
    Resettlement registration form
    Foreshocks
    The blue chair
    Topography
    The blue chair
    Faults
    Mainshocks
    Faults
    The blue chair
    Aftershocks
    Mainshocks
    The blue chair
    Terraforming.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    edited by Philippe Humbert, Ferial Fanian, Howard Maibach, Pierre Agache.
    Springer Nature Living Reference.
    Summary: Since the first edition of this book was published in 2004, to much acclaim, the pace of innovation in the field of skin metrology has increased and various new technologies have become available. This new, revised edition of Measuring the Skin reflects these advances by presenting the current theory and practice of noninvasive investigation and measurement of the skin and its appendices in health and disease. The first, extensive part of the book is devoted to the physiology and metrology of the various structural components of the skin. Skin functions and their measurement are then discussed in detail, with sections on mechanical protection, photoprotection, barrier function, immune function, thermoregulation, and sensory function. In addition, careful consideration is given to skin disease rating and skin maps, and a unique list of physical and biological constants and units is provided. Not only is Measuring the Skin the first comprehensive, practical handbook in this domain - it will also serve as a manual of skin physiology and collates anatomical, functional, and physical quantitative data that would otherwise be arduous to retrieve because of their dispersal throughout the literature. It will prove a valuable resource for dermatologists, cosmetologists, bioengineers, physiologists, pharmacists, and all others who deal with the skin in their work.

    Contents:
    Skin Structural Components
    Physiology and Metrology: Skin Surface. Epidermis. Dermis. Epidermal Appendages. Skin Vasculature. Subcutis
    Skin Functions and their Measurement: Mechanical Protection. Photoprotection. Barrier Function. Immune Function. Thermoregulation. Sensory Function
    Skin Maps
    Skin Disease Rating
    Skin Constants
    Physical Units
    Appendix
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer Live 2022
    Continuously updated edition
  • Digital
    Philippe Humbert, Ferial Fanian, Howard I. Maibach, Pierre Agache, editors.
    Summary: Since the first edition of this book was published in 2004, to much acclaim, the pace of innovation in the field of skin metrology has increased and various new technologies have become available. This new, revised edition reflects these advances by presenting the current theory and practice of noninvasive investigation and measurement of the skin and its appendices in health and disease. The first, extensive part of this authoritative work is devoted to the physiology and metrology of the various structural components of the skin. Skin functions and their measurement are then discussed in detail, with sections on mechanical protection, photoprotection, barrier function, immune function, thermoregulation, and sensory function. In addition, careful consideration is given to skin disease rating and skin maps, and a unique list of physical and biological constants and units is provided. Not only is this new edition the first comprehensive, practical handbook in this domain – it will also serve as a manual of skin physiology and collates anatomical, functional, and physical quantitative data that would otherwise be arduous to retrieve because of their dispersal throughout the literature. It will prove a valuable resource for dermatologists, cosmetologists, bioengineers, physiologists, pharmacists, and all others who deal with the skin in their work.

    Contents:
    Skin Structural Components
    Physiology and Metrology: Skin Surface. Epidermis. Dermis. Epidermal Appendages. Skin Vasculature. Subcutis
    Skin Functions and their Measurement: Mechanical Protection. Photoprotection. Barrier Function. Immune Function. Thermoregulation. Sensory Function
    Skin Maps
    Skin Disease Rating
    Skin Constants
    Physical Units
    Appendix
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Crystal R. Emery.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R692 .E44 2015
    1
  • Digital
    David Alfandre, editor.
    Summary: "This first-of-its-kind text provides a multidisciplinary overview of a significant problem in hospital-based healthcare: patients who decline inpatient medical care and leave the hospital against medical advice (AMA). Compared to standard hospital discharges, AMA discharges are associated with worse health and health services outcomes. Patients discharged AMA have been found to have disproportionately higher rates of substance use, psychiatric illness, and report stigmatization and reduced access to care. By providing a far reaching examination of AMA discharges for a wide academic and clinical audience, the book serves as a reference for clinical care, research, and the development of professional guidelines and institutional policy. The book provides both a broad overview of AMA discharges with chapters on the epidemiology, ethical and legal aspects, as well as social science perspectives. For clinicians in the disciplines of hospital medicine, pediatrics, emergency medicine, nursing, and psychiatry, the book also provides a patient-centered analysis of the problem, case-based discussions, and a discussion of best practices. This comprehensive review of AMA discharges and health care quality will interest physicians and other health care professionals, social workers, hospital administrators, quality and risk managers, clinician-educators, and health services researchers."--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Alessandro Plebani, Vassilios Lougaris, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an updated overview of agammaglobulinemia, a rare form of primary immunodeficiency which is considered the prototype of the congenital humoral defects, and which is characterized by the absence of peripheral B cells and very low serum immunoglobulin levels. The book opens by discussing the highly orchestrated early B cell development in the bone marrow and the genes involved based on both human and animal models. The pathogenesis and clinical presentation of X-linked agammaglobulinemia, caused by mutations in the BTK (Bruton's tyrosine kinase) gene, are then presented in detail, followed by descriptions of the clinical manifestations and molecular basis of the less frequent autosomal recessive and autosomal dominant forms of agammaglobulinemia. Patients' management in terms of respiratory complications, gammaglobulin replacement therapy and the potential value of novel experimental therapeutic strategies are discussed. The book's closing chapters offer a comprehensive and updated description of mutations in the BTK gene, and the expression and function of BTK in cells other than B cells.

    Contents:
    Early B Cell Biology
    Agammaglobulinemia: Basic Pathogenesis and Clinical Spectrum (Including X-Linked and Autosomal Recessive Forms)
    Pulmonary Complications in Agammaglobulinemia
    Immunoglobulin Replacement Therapy: Past, Present, Future
    Mutational Spectrum of BTK: A Comprehensive Description
    Novel Therapeutic Options for X-Linked Agammaglobulinemia
    BTK in Non B Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Henry A. Kissinger, Eric Schmidt, Daniel Huttenlocher ; with Schuyler Schouten.
    Summary: "Artificial Intelligence (AI) is transforming human society in fundamental and profound ways. Not since the Age of Reason have we changed how we approach security, economics, order, and even knowledge itself. In the Age of AI, three deep and accomplished thinkers come together to consider what AI will mean for us all."

    Contents:
    Where we are
    How we got here: technology and human thought
    From Turing to today-and beyond
    Global network platforms
    Security and world order
    AI and human identity
    AI and the future
    Afterword: a new reality.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    Q335 .K577 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Weiye Li.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Emily Y. Chew, Anand Swaroop, editors.
    Summary: This edited book focuses on the recent advances in our understanding of age-related macular degeneration (AMD), combining epidemiology and clinical diagnosis, with genetics and immunological aspects as well as the role of proteostasis and mitochondria before diving into new therapies including stem cell based approaches. AMD is a leading cause of largely incurable blindness worldwide and projected to double from 2.07 million to 5.44 million individuals by 2050 in the United States. Globally, 288 million individuals are projected to have AMD by 2040. The disease has enormous socioeconomic impact on the affected individuals, their families and the society. This book will bring together the state of the art basic science knowledge with clinically relevant findings and address the challenges for future research in AMD. The intersection of different disciplines will provide potential areas for further investigations to reduce the burden of blindness from AMD. This book offers an appealing and insightful resource for clinicians, scientists, students and fellows.

    Contents:
    1. Age-Related Macular Degeneration: Epidemiology and Clinical Aspects
    2. Ocular Imaging for Enhancing the Understanding, Assessment, and Management of Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    3. Histopathology of Age-Related Macular Degeneration and Implications for Pathogenesis and Therapy
    4. Bruchs Membrane and the Choroid in Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    5. Innate Immunity in Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    6. Immunological Aspects of Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    7. AMD Genetics: Methods and Analyses for Association, Progression, and Prediction
    8. Making Biological Sense of Genetic Studies of Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    Age-Related Macular Degeneration: From Epigenetics to Therapeutic Implications
    10. Mitochondria: The Retinas Achilles Heel in AMD
    11. Cell-Based Therapies for Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    12. Current Management of Age-Related Macular Degeneration.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Paul Higgs, Chris Gilleard.
    Summary: "Groundbreaking exploration of the sociology of dementia -- with contributions from distinguished international scholars and practitioners. Organised around the four themes of personhood, care, social representations and social differentiation, Ageing, Dementia and the Social Mind provides a critical look at how modern concepts and assumptions regarding dementia can benefit from sociology and other disciplines. This collection addresses the gaps in our sociological knowledge of dementia and provides a forum for the development of new themes and perspectives within the health social sciences. This important work breaks new ground in giving specific attention to the social and cultural dimensions of responses to dementia"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Ageing, dementia and the social mind: past, present and future perspectives / Paul Higgs, Chris Gilleard
    Relational citizenship: supporting embodied selfhood and relationality in dementia care / Pia Kontos, Karen-Lee Miller, Alexis P Kontos
    Shifting dementia discourses from deficit to active citizenship / Linda Birt, Fiona Poland, Emese Csipke, Georgina Charlesworth
    Narrative collisions, sociocultural pressures and dementia: the relational basis of personhood reconsidered / Edward Tolhurst, Bernhard Weicht, Paul Kingston
    Power, empowerment, and person-centred care: using ethnography to examine the everyday practice of unregistered dementia care staff / Kezia Scales, Simon Bailey, Joanne Middleton, Justine Schneider
    Institutionalising senile dementia in 19th-century Britain / Emily Stella Andrews
    Dichotomising dementia: is there another way? / Patricia Mc Parland, Fiona Kelly, Anthea Innes
    When walking becomes wandering: representing the fear of the fourth age / Katherine Brittain, Cathrine Degnen, Grant Gibson, Claire Dickinson, Louise Robinson
    Re-imagining dementia in the fourth age: the ironic fictions of Alice Munro / Marlene Goldman
    Social class, dementia and the fourth age / Ian Rees Jones
    Precarity in late life: rethinking dementia as a 'frailed' old age / Amanda Grenier, Liz Lloyd, Chris Phillipson.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Valquiria Bueno, Janet M. Lord, Thomas A. Jackson, editors.
    Summary: The present book intends to provide an update on immunosenescence and how deficiencies in the immune system contribute to a higher susceptibility to infections, decline in organ function, reduced vaccination responses, age-related disease and the ageing process itself, negatively affecting longevity. Our focus is on the main changes in immune system cells and their products occurring during the ageing process and the possible consequences for health and disease. This includes: discussion of the modulatory and/or suppressive mechanisms associated with the alterations in T regulatory cells, B regulatory cells and Myeloid Derived Suppressor cells; changes in the immune system observed in chronic neurodegenerative diseases, cancer, lung disease and frailty will also be discussed. Most importantly we provide recent literature information about possible interventions (focusing on physical activity) that could alleviate the negative effects of immunosenescence. The Ageing Immune System and Health is a comprehensive guide on the field intended to all physicians, researchers, professors and students interested on relationship between immune system, ageing and health. .

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Innate Immune Response and Ageing (neutrophils, monocytes, dendritic cells, DAMPs, PAMPs
    3. Adaptive Immune Response and Aging (T and B lymphocytes, naïve, effector and memory phenotypes and functions)
    4. Modulatory/Suppressive Cells and Ageing (T regulatory cells, B regulatory cells, Myeloid Derived Suppressor Cells, Modulatory Neutrophils, M1 and M2 macrophages)
    5. Mucosal Immune System and Ageing
    6. Epigenetics and Ageing
    7. Cancer and Ageing
    8. Infections/Vaccination and Ageing
    9. Cytomegalovirus and immmunosenescence
    10. Frailty and Ageing
    11. Inflammation and Neurodegenerative Diseases and Ageing
    12. Effects of chronic inflammatory diseases (chronic kidney disease, rheumatoid arthritis, crohns disease etc) on the ageing of the immune system
    13. Interventions in Elderly focusing Immunosenescence (physical activity, nutrition, supplements).
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Rosalie Hudson.
    Summary: Spending the final chapter of your life in a nursing home is considered, by many, a fate worse than death. Others, however, have found that through enlightened, imaginative care even the frailest of lives can flourish. The key to such a transformation is to replace the constricting custodial centres of the past with a more informed, research-based approach. This book is timely, responding to evidence of the urgent need for change described in the Australian Royal Commission into Aged Care Quality and Safety Final Report: Care, Dignity and Respect and its predecessor subtitled Neglect. In this book, the author proposes a model of care that places the whole person at its centre, sidestepping the constraints of a reductionist funding model that focusses on residents' deficits and the proprietors financial gain. Aged care requires a comprehensive research-based guide to fulfil this aim. Narratives are included throughout the book to reinforce the fact that nursing home care is about individual residents and their unique lives. Topics explored in various chapters include: Ageing in a Changing Community Social, Gerontological Care A Palliative Approach Community Expectations Ageing in a Nursing Home: Foundations for Care takes a realistic approach that draws on contemporary research and narratives from the unique lives of older Australians who, despite their frailty, teach us how to care. Such knowledge informs and influences their future. The book is a resource intended for all who have a stake in the provision of best practice residential aged care, and all who benefit from such care. Its academic appeal will include those who design and teach courses in aged care: gerontology, general practice medicine, nursing, attendant care, allied health, and chaplaincy. Academics and teachers will find useful, well-referenced material for their courses, together with ample scope for researchers.

    Contents:
    Ageing in a changing community
    Communication: the key to care
    Social, gerontological care
    Dementia challenges
    A palliative approach
    Death and dying
    Leadership
    Community expectations.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Subas Dhakal, Alan Nankervis, John Burgess, editors.
    Summary: This book demonstrates that there are wide-ranging potential challenges in addressing issues associated with ageing populations in both developed and developing countries of the region. This book brings together local, national and regional perspectives on the ageing population and sustainable development nexus in selected countries in the Asia Pacific region. The countries selected in this book include a mix of developed and developing economies that all reflect strong trade, investment and migration linkages. While the Asia Pacific region is forecast to enjoy high growth in the coming decade, a recurring common policy challenge is addressing the demographic time bomb posed by ageing populations and workforces (Montague et al., 2017). Consequently, this book focuses on strategic policies and practices of multiple stakeholders, primarily: governments, industry and education systems, together with, the range of aged care services providers in more effectively addressing these key socio-economic challenges associated with the ageing population for sustainable development.

    Contents:
    Part I Context and Setting the Scene
    Chapter 1 Population Ageing: Challenges in the Asia Pacific and Beyond
    Chapter 2 Addressing the Challenges of Ageing: Global Perspectives on Policies and Practices
    Chapter 3 A Bibliometric Analysis of Ageing Literature: Global and Asia-Pacific Trends
    Part II Country Case Studies
    Chapter 4 Ageing, work, care in Australia: Progress and prospects in meeting Sustainable Development Goals of inclusive growth and gender equality
    Chapter 5 Bridging the gap in social infrastructure for the ageing population in Bangladesh
    Chapter 6 Ageing population and sustainable development: Evidence from China
    Chapter 7 Sustainable development Goals and Ageing: Status, Challenges, and Strategies for Policy Implications for India
    Chapter 8 Financial Stability or Instability in their Golden Years: An Analysis of the Financial Preparedness of Malaysians
    Chapter 9 Ageing Population, the Poverty Nexus and Wellbeing of Elderly in Mauritius
    Chapter 10 Ageing and Health Agenda for Nepal: Challenges and Policy Responses for Sustainable Development
    Chapter 11 Recalibrating Social Protection for an Ageing Singapore
    Chapter 12 Population ageing and societal inequalities: the case of Taiwan
    Chapter 13 Ageing, work-life and lifestyle: Reflections from Thailand
    Part III Comparative Analysis and Conclusion
    Chapter 14 Comparative Analysis of Countries Ageing Challenges & Policies.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Emil F. Coccaro and Michael S. McCloskey.
    Summary: Based on the latest research, Aggression: Clinical Features and Treatment Across the Diagnostic Spectrum is designed to aid mental health practitioners in identifying and treating aggression in diverse patient presentations.

    Contents:
    Nature and psychobiology of intermittent explosive disorder / Emil F. Coccaro, Royce Lee, and Michael S. McCloskey
    Treatment of intermittent explosive disorder / Michael S. McCloskey, Martha K. Fahlgren, and Emil F. Coccaro
    Aggression in autism and other developmental disorders / Laura C. Politte, Sarah E. Fitzpatrick, and Craig Erikson
    Aggression in disruptive behavioral disorders beginning in childhood / Beth Krone, Iliyan Ivanov, and Jeffrey Newcorn
    Aggression in primary psychotic disorders / Leslie Citrome, and Jan Volavka
    Aggression in bipolar disorder / Susan L. McElroy, Brian E. Martens, and Paul E. Keck, Jr
    Aggression in unipolar mood disorders / Maurizio Fava, and Ellen Leibenluft
    Aggression in anxiety disorders / Emily B. O'Day, M.A. and Richard G. Heimberg
    Aggression and its relationship to obsessive compulsive disorder / Jon E. Grant and Samuel R. Chamberlain
    Aggression in posttraumatic stress disorder / Jennifer R. Fanning
    Aggression in eating disorders / Karen M. Jennings, Lindsay P. Bodell, and Jennifer E. Wildes
    Aggression and alcohol use disorders / Caroline W. Grant, and David T. George
    Aggression and substance use disorders / Rachel R. Gunn, Kyle R. Gerst, and Daniel J. Fridberg
    Aggression in personality disorders / Royce J. Lee
    Legal and forensic aspects of aggression / Michael Greenage, and Robert L Trestman.
  • Digital
    Georg Lenz, Gilles Salles, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes current knowledge of the biology and molecular pathogenesis of aggressive lymphomas and reviews the state of the art in diagnostic and therapeutic strategies. The aim is both to provide the reader with a sound understanding of the very significant progress that has been achieved in the understanding and management of these malignancies over recent years and to facilitate appropriate choice of the therapeutic strategy in individual cases. The assessment of different prognostic parameters are clearly presented in order to permits effective risk stratification that impacts on treatment choice. Recent insights into lymphomagenesis are exemplified and may assist in identifying emerging therapeutic targets. The comprehensive and up-to-date nature of the book will make it an ideal reference for all physicians and researchers interested in lymphoma, including clinicians from various medical specialties, biologists, pathologists, radiologists and nuclear medicine specialist, as well as students.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology, pathology and molecular pathogenesis
    Standard of care of aggressive lymphomas
    Future directions in aggressive lymphomas.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, Ladislas Robert, Tamas Fülöp.
    Contents:
    The Commitment of human cells to senescence / R. Holliday
    Evolutionary theories of aging can explain why we age / E. Le Bourg
    Control of cell replication during aging / A. Macieira-Coelho
    Cell senescence : role in aging and age-related diseases / J. Campisi, L. Robert,
    Aging of cell membranes : facts and theories / I. Zs.-Nagy
    Oxidative stress, mitochondrial dysfunction, and the mitochondria theory of aging / Y. Kong, S.E. Trabucco, H. Zhang
    Aging of connective tissues : experimental facts and theoretical considerations / J. Labat-Robert, L. Robert
    Aging of cell communication : loss of receptor function / L. Robert, T. Fulop
    On the immunological theory of aging / T. Fulop, J.M. Witkowski, G. Pawelec, C. Alan, A. Larbi
    Aging of the brain, dementias, role of infectious proteins : facts and theories / F. Morinet
    Aging as alteration / P.-A. Miquel
    Longevity and its regulation : centenarians and beyond / L. Robert, T. Fulop.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Print
    Danon, D.; Marois, M.; Shock, Nathan W.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Biology / edited by D. Danon, N.W. Shock, and M. Marois
    v. 2. Medicine / edited by A.J.J. Gilmore, A. Svanborg, M. Marois. Social sciences and social policy / edited by Walter M. Beattie, Jr., Jerzy Piotrowski, M. Marois
    v. 3. Behavioural sciences / edited by James E. Birren ... [et al.]. Conclusions and perspectives / edited by Maurice Marois.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP86 .A3588
    3
  • Digital
    edited by Richard Pak, Anne Collins McLaughlin.
    Summary: Aging, Health and Technology takes a problem-centered approach to examine how older adults use technology for health. It examines the many ways in which technology is being used by older adults, focusing on challenges, solutions and perspectives of the older user. Using aging-health technology as a lens, the book examines issues of technology adoption, basic human factors, cognitive aging, mental health, aging and usability, privacy, trust and automation. Each chapter takes a case study approach to summarize lessons learned from unique examples that can be applied to similar projects, while also providing general information about older adults and technology.

    Contents:
    1. Rethinking technology development for older adults: a responsible research and innovation duty
    2. Challenges associated with online health information seeking among older adults
    3. Improving older adults' comprehension and use of patient portal-based health information
    4. Bringing older drivers up to speed with technology: cognitive changes, training, and advances in transportation technology
    5. Technological supports to increase nature contact for older adults
    6. Design and development of an automated fall risk assessment system for older adults
    7. Checking-in with my friends: results from an in-situ deployment of peer-to-peer aging in place technologies
    8. Enhancing social engagement of older adults through technnology
    9. Virtual cognitive training in healthy aging and mild cognitive impairment
    10. Social agents for aging-in-place: a focus on health education and communication
    11. Design of human centered augmented reality for managing chronic health conditions
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Zhao Wang, editor.
    Summary: "This book provides an overview of recent advances in the study of aging and aging related diseases, discussing the topics at individual, organ, tissue, cell, and molecular levels. It also presents studies on the biomarkers of aging and anti-aging interventions. Aging has been becoming a global health problem. However it was not possible to determine aging as we usually diagnose a disease because there are few biomarkers for age estimation. Since ancient times, people have been seeking anti-aging substances and methods for achieving immortality, while the scientific study of aging has only existed for 100 years. This book appeals to researchers both in institutes and in pharmaceutical companies interested in further studies in this field"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Systems biology in aging research / Xian Xia, Jing-Dong J. Han
    Circular RNA in aging and age-related diseases / Deying Yang, Katie Yang, Mingyao Yang
    Noncoding RNAs in cardiovascular aging / Yongqin Li, Yujiao Zhu, Guoping Li, Junjie Xiao
    Epigenetic regulation of vascular aging and age-related vascular diseases / Yang-Nan Ding, Xiaoqiang Tang, Hou-Zao Chen, De-Pei Liu
    Apoe and neurodegenerative diseases in aging / Yuemiao Yin, Zhao Wang
    Brain aging: HSP90 and neurodegenerative diseases / Kun Wang, Yu Shang, Fei Dou
    Aging of human adult stem cells / Han Xie, Shouliang Zhao, Shangfeng Liu
    Mechanisms of hematopoietic stem cell ageing and targets for hematopoietic tumour prevention / Min Liao, Jianwei Wang
    Microbiota and aging / Maoyang Lu, Zhao Wang
    Intestinal homeostasis and longevity: Drosophila gut feeling / Xiaolan Fan, Uma Gaur, Mingyao Yang
    Aging kidney and aging-related disease / Zhongchi Li, Zhao Wang
    Aging of the bone / Yu Wei, Yao Sun
    Ovarian aging and osteoporosis / Liyuan Li, Zhao Wang
    Biomarkers of aging / Xiaojuan Bai
    Pharmaceutical intervention of aging / Minxian Qian, Baohua Liu
    Application of stem cell technology in antiaging and aging-related diseases / Yanqiu Yu
    Which is the most reasonable anti-aging strategy: meta-analysis / Yaru Liang, Zhao Wang
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    volume editors, Anatoliy I. Yashin, Durham, NC, Michal Jazwinsk, New Orleans, La.
    Contents:
    Introduction to the theory of aging networks / Witten, T.M.
    Applications to aging networks / Wimble, C., Witten, T.M.
    Computational systems biology for aging research / Auley, M.T., Mooney, K.M.
    How does the body know how old it is? Introducing the epigenetic clock hypothesis / Mitteldorf, J.
    The great evolutionary divide : two genomic systems biologies of aging / Rose, M.R., Cabral, I.G., Philips, M.A., Rutledge, G.A., Phung, K.H., Mueller, L.D., Greer, L.F.
    Development and aging : two opposite but complementary phenomena / Feltes, B.C., De Faria Poloni, J., Bonatto, D.
    Aging as a process of deficit accumulation : its utility and origin / Mitnitski, A., Rockwood, K.
    Low-grade systemic inflammation connects aging, metabolic syndrome and cardiovascular disease / Guarner, V., Rubio-Ruiz, M.E.
    Modulating mTOR in aging and health / Johnson, S.C., Sangesland, M., Kaeberlein, M., Rabinovitch, P.
    Melatonin and circadian oscillators in aging : a dynamic approach to the multiply connected players / Hardeland, R.
    Diet-microbiota-health interactions in older subjects : implications for healthy aging / Lynch, D.B., Jeffery, I.B., Cusack, S., O'Connor, E.M., O'Toole, P.W.
    Systems biology approaches in aging research / Chauhan, A., Liebal, U.W., Vera, J., Baltrusch, S., Junghanss, C., Tiedge, M., Fuellen, G., Wolkenhauer, O., Köhling, R.
    Conservative growth hormone/IGF-1 and mTOR signaling pathways as a target for aging and cancer prevention : do we really have an antiaging drug? / Anisimov, V.N.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Bodh I. Jugdutt, editor.
    Summary: This book synthesizes the major research advances in molecular, biochemical, and translational aspects of aging and heart failure over the last four decades and addresses future directions in management and drug discovery. It presents clinical issues and molecular mechanisms related to heart failure, including the changing demographics in the aging population with heart failure; hypertension and prevention of diastolic heart failure in the aging population; polypharmacy and adverse drug reactions in the aging population with heart failure; changes in the heart that accompany advancing age from humans to molecules; aging-associated alterations in myocardial inflammation and fibrosis; and aging-related changes in mitochondrial function and implications for heart failure therapy. The book succinctly summarizes the large volume of data on these key topics and highlights novel pathways that need to be explored. Featuring contributions from leading clinician-scientists, Aging and Heart Failure: Mechanisms and Management is an authoritative resource on the major clinical issues in heart failure therapy in the elderly for cardiologists, gerontologists, and internists.

    Contents:
    Changing demographics of the aging population with heart failure and implications for therapy
    Biology of aging and implications for heart failure therapy and prevention
    Hypertension and prevention of diastolic heart failure in the aging population
    Aging and optimal therapy of systolic heart failure in the elderly
    Atrial fibrillation and heart failure in the aging population
    Optimizing therapy of heart failure in the aging population with monitoring in clinics
    Cardiac alterations in aging, hypertension and diastolic heart failure
    Polypharmacy and adverse drug reactions in the aging population with heart failure
    Aging-related changes in vascular biology and implications for heart failure therapy in the aging population
    Biomarkers and optimal management of heart failure in the aging population
    Benefits of Exercise in the elderly
    The RAAS in heart failure: an update on clinical trials and opportunities for therapy
    Aging and diastolic dysfunction {u2013} the interplay of inflammation and extracellular matrix regulation
    Reperfusion and vasodilator therapy in elderly patients with STEMI and heart failure. Improving outcomes
    Erythropoietin therapy for heart failure
    Role of resistin in heart failure in the elderly
    Role of coronary artery calcium in cardiovascular risk stratification and management in the aging population
    Aging-and remodeling of the RAS and RAAS and related pathways. Implications for heart failure therapy
    Aging and right ventricular failure from pulmonary hypertension: Effect of right ventricular and pulmonary artery remodeling
    Biomarkers of cardiovascular aging
    Changes in the heart that accompany advancing age: Humans to molecules
    Aging-related changes in cell death and cell survival pathways and implications for heart failure therapy
    Aging-related changes in telomeres and telomerases and implications for heart failure therapy
    Aging associated alterations in myocardial inflammation and fibrosis: pathophysiological perspectives and clinical implications
    Aging-related changes in extracellular matrix: implications for ventricular remodeling following myocardial infarction
    Calcium handling defects and changes in cardiac function in the aging heart
    Integrins: Implications for aging in heart failure therapy
    Adipokines as novel biomarkers in aging and heart failure
    Aging-related changes in cellular and molecular mechanisms of post-infarction remodeling. Implications for heart failure therapy
    Aging-related changes in mitochondrial function and implication for heart failure therapy
    Regulation of SERCA via oxidative modifications: Implications for the pathophysiology of diastolic dysfunction in the aging heart
    SMP-30 and aging-related cardiac remodeling and heart failure.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel L. Segal, Sara Honn Qualls, and Michael A. Smyer.
    Contents:
    Introduction. Mental Health and Aging
    Basic Gerontology for Working with Older Adults
    Psychological Bases of Positive Mental Health
    Models of Mental Health in Later Life. Models of Mental Health in Later Life
    Psychodynamic Model / Lacey Edwards
    Cognitive-Behavioral Model
    Stress and Coping Model
    Family Systems Model
    Summary and Commentary
    Introduction to Mental Disorders. Introduction to Mental Disorders
    Cognitive Impairment and Neurocognitive Disorders
    Major Depression and Bipolar Disorder
    Serious Mental Disorders in Older Adults / Stephen J Bartels, Karen L Fortuna, John A Naslund
    Anxiety Disorders, Hoarding Disorder, and Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder
    Sexual Disorders, Sleep Disorders, and Chronic Pain
    Substance-Related Disorders and Personality Disorders
    Settings and Contexts of Mental Health. Settings and Contexts of Mental Health
    Health Services Delivery Systems
    Housing, Social Services, and Mental Health
    Family and Friend Relationships, and Caregiving
    Ethical Issues in Work with Older Adults.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Ronan M. Factora, editor.
    Summary: Increasingly, we hear of more and more elders falling victim to financial exploitation. Although this form of elder abuse has been recognized for years, its incidence, prevalence, and impact on the common individual has been only more recently brought to the spotlight. Despite these circumstances, recognition of risk factors and indicators of financial exploitation are not widely disseminated. Additionally, once situations are identified and confronted, the knowledge of what to do next is lacking. These gaps are present within the medical community, law-enforcement, and the finance community ? areas where opportunities for recognition and intervention are common. Our elders often have no idea of what to do when they see their own risk or when they fall victim. Aging and Money: Reducing Risk of Financial Exploitation and Protecting Financial Resources helps clinicians to integrate identification of such indicators of abuse into their geriatric assessment as well as guide them in performing an assessment of an individuals? financial decision-making capacity when appropriate. Aging and Money: Reducing Risk of Financial Exploitation and Protecting Financial Resources is an essential new text that provides the practicing clinician with information on identifying risk factors and clinical clues associated with financial exploitation and how to incorporate these steps into their practice.

    Contents:
    Financial exploitation of the elderly: Review of the epidemic? its victims, national impact and legislative solutions
    One Piece of the Puzzle ? Financial Exploitation and Elder Abuse
    Barriers to Recognition
    Financial Abuse of the Elderly
    Risk Factors
    Screening Older Patients for Risk Factors Associated with Financial Exploitation
    Clinical Assessment of Financial Decision Making Capacity
    Next Steps: Documentation and Accessing Community Healthcare Resources
    Financial Exploitation ? The Legal Perspective
    Financial and Legal Methods to Protect Individuals from Financial Exploitation
    Critical Documents Associated with Aging: An Organized Guide to Personal Files
    Who Can You Turn To ? the Role of Adult Protective Services (APS) and Other Community Resources
    Being the Advocate ? Disseminating Knowledge About Financial Exploitation to the Community
    Future Directions: Public Policy and Advocacy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ronan M. Factora, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to disseminate and share knowledge about financial exploitation of elders with the purpose of protecting those individuals in our society who are most vulnerable to financial abuse and mistreatment. It instructs practicing clinicians in identification of risk factors, recognition of signs, and implementation of screening methods to protect their patients. This updated edition expands upon and advances the earlier text by including the most recent research and methods used to assess risk of financial exploitation, as well as updates in how the law approaches such cases. It also highlights ways in which community awareness can aid in identifying those most at risk, effectively protecting the elderly community, advocating for those victimized, and pursuing perpetrators to the fullest extent of the law. Professionals from law enforcement, medical clinics, financial institutions, and the legal field are now tasked with acting on suspected situations thanks to increasing recognition of financial abuse and mistreatment of an aging population. This book also guides professionals on how to discuss this information with potential victims. This second edition of Aging and Money expands the knowledge base to highlight the perspectives of different disciplines including professionals in medicine, law, the financial industry, and social services who play an important role in investigating and preventing financial abuse of the elderly.

    Contents:
    Financial Exploitation: Facts and figures
    One Piece of the puzzle-Financial Exploitation and Elder Abuse
    Why We Don't See or Do More
    Barriers to Recognition and Action
    Risk Factors: the Individual and the Caregiver
    Screening for Financial Exploitation in Clinical Settings
    Clinical Assessment of Financial Decision-Making Capacity
    Next Steps: Documentation and Accessing Community Resources
    Financial Exploitation-the Legal Perspective
    Legal Barriers in Investigating Financial Exploitation
    Being the Advocate-Disseminating Knowledge about Financial Exploitation to the Community
    Documents Associated with Aging
    Financial and Legal Methods to Protect Your Assets
    Who Can You Run To
    the Role of Adult Protective Services and Other Community Resources
    Future Directions: Public Policy and Advocacy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Carmen García-Peña, Luis Miguel Gutiérrez Robledo, Mario Ulises Pérez-Zepeda, editors.
    Summary: This is the second edition of a well received book that reviews classical epidemiological and clinical research designs, with a specific focus on aging. Chapters cover basic topics like the scientific method, ethics, and the consequences of certain exclusion criteria. The work also includes a look at clinical concepts like multimorbidity, frailty and functionality. New material includes chapters such as geroscience, health systems research, big data and data mining, financing and future of aging research. The authors reveal the issues and challenges for researchers of age and aging, and also consider, from basic to clinical, and from clinical to public policies of social and health care. The focus on aging is what gives this book its valuable perspective on research methodology. All authors have considerable experience in aging, geriatrics or gerontology, and each chapter includes both a theoretical framework and practical examples of studies in aging. Readers will discover study designs that are reviewed for basic structure, main flaws and advantages, and are analyzed for specific conditions and variables regarding aging. This text is suited to both health care professionals caring for older adults, and researchers who are new to research in aging. It is relevant across the disciplines, including medicine, psychology, social sciences and dentistry, and it supports learning with graphs and figures.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Kiyoshi Makiyama, Shigeru Hirano, editors.
    Summary: "This book discusses the aging voice, one of the interesting issues related to aging. Population aging is an issue in most developed countries, where both physicians and specialists are required to improve clinical and scientific practice for elderly adults. In particular, the need for expertise in the diagnosis and treatment of aging voice pathologies is increasing continually. New developments in regenerative medicine have taken care for the aging voice to new level, and the contributors to this book use their wealth of experience in the field of the aging voice to present the latest advances in this field. This book is a unique resource, providing new perspectives for physicians, clinicians and health care workers who are interested in the aging voice."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Overview / Shigeru Hirano
    Age-Related Histological Changes of the Vocal Folds / Masanobu Mizuta
    Age-Related Changes in the Human Voice / Hideki Kasuya and Hajime Yoshida
    Evaluation of Phonatory Function in the Elderly / Hiroumi Matsuzaki and Kiyoshi Makiyama
    Clinical Assessment of Elderly Vocal Folds by Laryngoscopy / Yoichiro Sugiyama
    Quantitative Analysis of High-Speed Digital Imaging for the Elderly / Akihito Yamauchi and Niro Tayama
    Collagen Injection for the Elderly with Dysphonia / Hiroumi Matsuzaki and Kiyoshi Makiyama
    Fat Injection for Voice Improvement in Atrophic Vocal Folds / Etsuyo Tamura
    Voice Therapy for the Elderly / Mami Kaneko
    Current Topics in Regenerative Medicine for the Laryngeal Tissues / Yo Kishimoto
    Future Prospects / Shigeru Hirano and Shin-ichi Kanemaru.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jean Galiana, William A. Haseltine.
    Summary: This open access book outlines the challenges of supporting the health and wellbeing of older adults around the world and offers examples of solutions designed by stakeholders, healthcare providers, and public, private and nonprofit organizations in the United States. The solutions presented address challenges including: providing person-centered long-term care, making palliative care accessible in all healthcare settings and the home, enabling aging-in-place, financing long-term care, improving care coordination and access to care, delivering hospital-level and emergency care in the home and retirement community settings, merging health and social care, supporting people living with dementia and their caregivers, creating communities and employment opportunities that are accessible and welcoming to those of all ages and abilities, and combating the stigma of aging. The innovative programs of support and care in Aging Well serve as models of excellence that, when put into action, move health spending toward a sustainable path and greatly contribute to the well-being of older adults.

    Contents:
    Demographics
    Healthcare in the United States
    Long-term care financing
    Person-centered long-term care
    Home-based palliative care and aging in place and community
    Coordinated primary care
    Emergency medicine and hospital care in the home and community
    Support for those living with dementia and their caregivers
    Merging health and social services
    Purpose and inclusion
    Eight lessons for social inclusion and high-quality sustainable care.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Peter Jeschke, Evgeni B. Starikov.
    Summary: Agricultural biocatalysis is of immense scientific interest nowadays owing to its increasing importance in the efforts for more sustainable agriculture while optimizing environmental impacts. Plant compatibility is essential for developing eco-friendly andsustainable microbial products.Therefore, our search for novel technologies ought to be in the foreground, for which athorough understanding of biochemical processes, application of agricultural enzymes, traits, and viruses get the highest priority. Volumes 8 to 10 in this series compile the recent research on agricultural biocatalysis by interdisciplinary teams from international institutes for chemistry, biochemistry, biotechnology, and materials and chemical engineering, who have been investigating agricultural-biocatalytic topics related to biochemical conversions or bioremediation, and modern biological and chemical applications exemplified by the use of selected and highly innovative agricultural enzymes, traits, and viruses. The editors are prominent researchers in agrochemistry and theoretical biophysical chemistry, and these three volumes are useful references for the students and researchers in the fields of agrochemistry, biochemistry, biology, biophysical chemistry, natural product chemistry, materials, and drug design. Volume 9 covers the research on plant and soil enzymes, herbicide tolerant traits, biochemical conversions, including aspects from bioremediation, plant viruses, and evaluation of the agricultural enzymes market.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2022
  • Digital
    Fernando López-Valdez, Fabián Fernández-Luqueño, editors.
    Summary: Nanobiotechnology in agriculture is a new knowledge area that offers novel possibilities to achieve high productivity levels at manageable costs during the production and merchandising of crops. This book shows us how we can use the cutting-edge knowledge about agriculture, nanotechnology, and biotechnology to increase the agricultural productivity and shape a sustainable future in order to increase the social welfare in rural areas and preserve the environmental health. Specialists from several countries will provide their feedback on a range of relevant topics such as environment-friendly use of nanofertilisers, nanodevices, nano-food packaging, nanocoating and nanocarriers and their relationship with the modern agriculture.

    Contents:
    Part I. Agronanobiotechnology, an introduction to nanoparticles: Use of agronanobiotechnology in the agro-food industry to preserve environmental health and improve the welfare of farmers
    Design and production of nanofertilizers
    Part II. Fertiliszers and plant nutrients on germination, growth and development of crops: Nanofertilizers and their controlled delivery of nutrients
    Incorporation of nanoparticles into plant nutrients : the real benefits
    Effects of nanoparticles on germination, growth, and plant crop development
    Effect of nanoparticles on the growth and development of crops for indoor agriculture applications
    Part III. Improving the soil and water quality: Nanomaterials : new agrotechnology tools to improve soil quality?
    Agronanobiotechnologies to improve the water quality in irrigation systems
    Part IV. Environmental topics: Effects of nanoparticles on plants, earthworms, and microorganisms
    Engineered nanoparticles : are they an inestimable achievement or a health and environmental concern?
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Buddhi Marambe, Jeevika Weerahewa, Warshi S. Dandeniya, editors.
    Summary: A food system comprises the entire range of actors and interlinked activities related to food production, processing, distribution, marketing and trade, preparation, consumption, and disposal. When a food system operates without compromising the needs of future generations, it is considered to be a "Sustainable Food System." The present-day food systems in Sri Lanka are diverse, and the natural and physical environment, infrastructure, institutions, society and culture, and policies and regulations within which the food systems operate, as well as the technologies employed, have shaped their outcomes. Agricultural research is a key factor in terms of innovation and technological advances. Innovation has been the main driver of food systems' transformation over the past few decades and will be critical to addressing the needs of a rapidly growing population in a context of climate change and scarcity of natural resources. In addition, agricultural research must help meet the rising demand for food at affordable prices. Comprising 17 chapters written by specialist(s) in their respective subject-areas, this Contributed Volume on "Agricultural Research for Sustainable Food Systems in Sri Lanka: A Historical Perspective" shares the scientific knowledge accumulated by the National Agricultural Research System of Sri Lanka, including universities, and offers recommendations on how to make food systems more sustainable in order to address the current needs of Sri Lankan society. It presents perspectives on four key thematic areas, namely: (i) Crop and animal production, management, and improvement, (ii) Agro-product processing technologies, (iii) Natural resource management, and (iv) Socio-economic development and agri-business management.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Abbreviations
    1: Food Systems in Sri Lanka: Components, Evolution, Challenges and Opportunities
    1.1 Food System: The Concept
    1.1.1 What Is a Food System?
    1.1.2 Why Sustainable Food Systems?
    1.1.3 Why Food System Approach Is Needed to Achieve Development Targets?
    1.2 Measuring Performance and Drivers of Food Systems
    1.3 Evolution of Food Systems of Sri Lanka
    1.3.1 The Key Components of the Food System 1.3.2 Agricultural Production System in the Economy of Sri Lanka
    1.4 Performance of Food Systems in Sri Lanka
    1.4.1 Agricultural Production System
    1.4.2 Agricultural Marketing System
    1.4.3 Food and Nutrition Security
    1.4.4 Policies, Institutions and Regulations
    1.5 The Way Forward for Sri Lanka: Opportunities and Challenges
    References
    2: Nutrition Transition in Sri Lanka: A Meta-Analysis of the Nutrition Profile
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Contextual Background
    2.2.1 Key Characteristics of the Sri Lankan Economy 2.2.2 Food and Nutrition Policy Framework During 1977-2017
    2.2.2.1 Food Assistance and Safety Net Programs
    2.2.2.2 Nutritional Interventions
    2.2.3 Diet Transformation
    2.2.3.1 Dietary Nutrient Intake
    2.2.3.2 Vegetable and Fruit Consumption
    2.2.3.3 Meat and Fish Consumption
    2.2.3.4 Sugar and Salt Intake
    2.3 Methodology
    2.3.1 Approach
    2.3.2 Meta-Database and Eligibility Criteria
    2.3.3 Tabular Analysis
    2.3.4 Regression Analysis
    2.4 Results
    2.4.1 Trends in Nutritional Status and Determinants 2.4.1.1 Status of Undernutrition among Preschool Children
    2.4.1.2 Status of Undernutrition Among Adolescents and Adults
    2.4.1.3 Determinants of Undernutrition
    2.4.2 Micronutrient Deficiencies
    2.4.3 Overweight and Obesity
    2.4.3.1 Overweight and Obesity Among Preschool Children
    2.4.3.2 Overweight and Obesity Among Adult Men and Women
    2.4.3.3 Determinants of Overweight and Obesity
    2.5 Diagnosis of Nutrition Transition
    2.5.1 Key Trends, Patterns in Malnutrition and Its Determinants
    2.5.2 Results of the Econometric Analysis 2.6 Summary, Conclusions, and Way Forward
    2.6.1 Summary and Conclusions
    2.6.2 Way Forward
    References
    3: Cascaded Tank-Village System: Present Status and Prospects
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Cascaded Tanks
    3.3 Early Studies of Tank Cascades
    3.4 Cascade Ecology
    3.5 Issues in Tank Cascade Systems
    3.6 Restoration of Tank Ecosystem for Sustainable Use
    References
    4: Soil Survey, Classification and Mapping in Sri Lanka: Past, Present and Future
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Diversity of Soils of Sri Lanka
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ajar Nath Yadav, Shashank Mishra, Divjot Kour, Neelam Yadav, Anil Kumar, editors.
    Summary: Microbes are ubiquitous in nature. Among microbes, fungal communities play an important role in agriculture, the environment, and medicine. Vast fungal diversity has been associated with plant systems, namely epiphytic fungi, endophytic fungi, and rhizospheric fungi. These fungi associated with plant systems play an important role in plant growth, crop yield, and soil health. Rhizospheric fungi, present in rhizospheric zones, get their nutrients from root exudates released by plant root systems, which help with their growth, development, and microbe activity. Endophytic fungi typically enter plant hosts through naturally occurring wounds that are the result of plant growth, through root hairs, or at epidermal conjunctions. Phyllospheric fungi may survive or proliferate on leaves depending on material influences in leaf diffuseness or exudates. The diverse nature of these fungal communities is a key component of soil-plant systems, where they are engaged in a network of interactions endophytically, phyllospherically, as well as in the rhizosphere, and thus have emerged as a promising tool for sustainable agriculture. These fungal communities promote plant growth directly and indirectly by using plant growth promoting (PGP) attributes. These PGP fungi can be used as biofertilizers and biocontrol agents in place of chemical fertilizers and pesticides for a more eco-friendly method of promoting sustainable agriculture and environments. This first volume of a two-volume set covers the biodiversity of plant-associated fungal communities and their role in plant growth promotion, the mitigation of abiotic stress, and soil fertility for sustainable agriculture. This book should be useful to those working in the biological sciences, especially for microbiologists, microbial biotechnologists, biochemists, and researchers and scientists of fungal biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Agriculturally Important Fungi: Plant
    Microbe Association for Mutual Benefits
    Endophytic Fungi: Diversity, Abundance, and Plant Growth Promoting Attributes
    The Role of Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungal Community in Paddy Soil
    Natural Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Colonization of Wheat and Maize Crops under different Agricultural Practices
    Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi, and their Potential Applications for Sustainable Agriculture
    Phosphate Solubilizing Fungi: Current Perspective, Mechanisms and Potential Agricultural Applications
    Fungal Phytohormones: Plant Growth-Regulating Substances and their Applications in Crop Productivity
    Phytohormones Producing Fungal Communities: Metabolic Engineering for Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Crops
    Fungal Biofertilizers for Sustainable Agricultural Productivity
    Role of Algae-Fungi relationship in Sustainable Agriculture
    Fungi as a Biological Tool for Sustainable Agriculture
    Agriculturally Important Fungi for Crop Productivity: Current Research and Future Challenges.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Keith Noble, Tania Dennis, Sarah Larkins.
    Summary: This book examines the mechanisms and strategies farmers in North Australia adopt to manage the setbacks and challenges they face. This social research is based on farmers experiences, but also draws on the authors own experience after his tropical fruit farm was destroyed by two Category 5 cyclones in five years. Through historical analysis, the book compares historic and contemporary aspirations for northern development, and discusses the influence of the built environment on individuals as well as access to health and other social services. Exploring the implications of individual resilience strategies for policy development within the broader context of northern development and evolving environmental governance, the book also highlights the fact that this is occurring in a new geological epoch - the Anthropocene. The book will provide a unique perspective and understanding to government, individuals and industries interested in northern Australia and its relationship to the world.

    Contents:
    Intro; Introduction; Contents; About the Authors; List of Figures; List of Tables; Part I: North Australian Theory and Realities; Chapter 1: Agriculture as a Human Endeavour; 1.1 Northern Australia's Existing Agricultural Capacity; 1.2 Why Consider an Individual's Resilience?; 1.3 Book Structure and Chapter Logic; References; Chapter 2: Resilience Discourse and Adaption Strategies; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 A Resilient Concept; 2.3 Conceptualising Resilience: Origins and Evolution; 2.4 What's in a Name: Theory vs the Vernacular; 2.5 Resilience, Adaptive Capacity and Transformation in Agriculture 2.6 Resilience and Policy Paradoxes2.7 Future Trends and Direction; 2.8 Conclusion; References; Chapter 3: Agricultural Development in Northern Australia; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 The Historic Challenges of Northern Australian Agriculture; 3.3 Contemporary Challenges to North Australian Agricultural Aspirations; 3.4 National Drivers for Growth; 3.5 Global Drivers for Growth; 3.6 Agricultural Policy Paradigms; 3.7 The Importance of Infrastructure; 3.7.1 Freight and Transport Infrastructure; 3.7.1.1 Sea Freight; 3.7.1.2 Rail; 3.7.1.3 Road; 3.7.1.4 Air; 3.7.2 Communication Infrastructure 3.7.3 Water Infrastructure3.7.4 Infrastructure Summary; 3.8 Are We There Yet?; References; Chapter 4: Framing Northern Australian Agriculture's Future; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Australian Environmentalism and the Emergence of Sustainability; 4.3 Ecologically Sustainable Development; 4.4 Capital Ideas; 4.5 Traditional Owners and Agriculture; 4.6 Climate Change and Other Disasters; 4.7 Australian Agricultural Policy in the Anthropocene; 4.8 Global Decision-Making and Evolving Governance; 4.9 What Is Different Now?; References; Chapter 5: Why and How to Consider the Resilience of Individuals? 5.1 Introduction5.2 A Problem-Focus, as Distinct from a Topic-Focus; 5.3 A Review of Theory and Validation of the Methodological Approach; 5.4 The Ontology and Epistemology of This Work; 5.5 Methods and Strategy of Data Collection; 5.6 The Use of Orienteering Concepts to Organise and Analyse Data; 5.7 Approaching the Data; References; Part II: Lived Experience
    Why People, Place, and Services Matter; Introduction; Chapter 6: The Resilience Strategies of Individuals; 6.1 Theme 1: Situational Awareness and Opportunity Seeking
    The Black Art of Experience; 6.1.1 A Good Way of Life 6.1.2 Travel Broadens the Mind6.1.3 Off-Farm Influences; 6.1.3.1 Finance; 6.1.3.2 Infrastructure; 6.1.3.3 Global Drivers; 6.1.3.4 Natural Resource Management and Public Perceptions of Agriculture; 6.1.4 Acts of God, Acts of Parliament, and Other Disasters; 6.1.5 Dealing with It; 6.1.6 Discussion; 6.2 Theme 2: The Capacity to Plan; 6.2.1 Plan the Future, Not the Past; 6.2.2 The Path of Least Resistance; 6.2.3 More Than Just Me; 6.2.4 Stick to the Plan, Man; 6.2.5 Discussion and Conclusion; 6.3 Theme 3: The Capacity to Adapt; 6.3.1 Pay Attention; 6.3.2 Maintain Flexibility
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Arnab Banerjee, Ram Swaroop Meena, Manoj Kumar Jhariya, Dhiraj Kumar Yadav, editors.
    Summary: Agroecological footprints are a unique and popular concept for sustainable food system. Measuring and keeping a tab on the agroecological footprints of various human activities has gained remarkable interest in the past decade. From a range of human activities, food production and agriculture are most essential as well as extremely dependent on the agroecosystems. It is therefore crucial to understand the interaction of agroecosystem constituents with the extensive agricultural practices. The environmental impact measured in terms of agroecological footprints for a healthy for the sustainable food system. The editors critically examine the status of agroecological footprints and how it can be maintained within sustainable limits. Drawing upon research and examples from around the world, the book is offering an up-to-date account, and insight into how agroecology can be implemented as a solution in the form of eco-friendly practices that would boost up the production, curbs the environmental impacts, improves the bio-capacity, and reduces the agroecological footprints. It further discusses the changing status of the agroecological footprints and the growth of other footprint tools and types, such as land, water, carbon, nitrogen, etc. This book will be of interest to teachers, researchers, government planners, climate change scientists, capacity builders, and policymakers. Also, the book serves as additional reading material for undergraduate and graduate students of agriculture, agroforestry, agroecology, soil science, and environmental sciences. National and international agricultural scientists, policymakers will also find this to be useful to achieve the 'Sustainable Development Goals'.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Ecological Footprints in Agroecosystem: An Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Concept of Ecological Footprint
    1.3 Ecological Footprint and Sustainability
    1.4 Ecological Footprint Analysis
    1.5 Forms of Footprints
    1.5.1 Water Footprint
    1.5.2 Energy Footprint
    1.5.3 Climate Footprint
    1.5.4 Land Footprint
    1.5.5 Nutrient Footprint
    1.6 Carbon and Water Footprint in Agroecosystems
    1.7 Research and Development in Ecological Footprint
    1.8 Future Roadmap of Ecological Footprint in Agroecosystems 1.9 Policy and Legal Framework for Managing Footprint in Agroecosystem
    1.10 Conclusion
    References
    2: Natural Resources Intensification and Footprints Management for Sustainable Food System
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Major Components of Agroecology in South Asia
    2.2.1 Diversity
    2.2.1.1 Diversity in Land Resources
    2.2.1.2 Diversity in Water Resources
    2.2.1.3 Diversity in Climate Change
    2.2.1.4 Crops Diversification
    2.2.1.5 Land Diversification
    2.2.2 Establishment and Disseminate of Experiences
    2.2.3 Government Policies, Institutions, and Public Goods 2.2.4 Synergies
    2.2.5 Resource Use Efficiency
    2.2.6 Recycling
    2.2.7 Resilience Building
    2.2.8 Social and Human Values
    2.2.9 Tradition of Culture and Food
    2.3 Impacts of Intensive Agriculture and Climate Change on Agroecology
    2.3.1 Global Warming and Weather Migration
    2.3.2 Land Value Degradation
    2.3.3 Deterioration of Soil Quality
    2.3.4 Worldwide Water Scarcity
    2.3.5 Impact on Crop Production and Associative Environment
    2.3.6 Occurrence of Extreme Events on Human
    2.4 Natural Resources and Footprints in South Asia (SA)
    2.4.1 Natural Resources of South Asia 2.4.2 Different Footprints
    2.4.2.1 Carbon Footprint
    2.4.2.2 Water Footprints
    2.4.2.3 Energy Footprint
    2.4.2.4 Emission Footprint
    2.4.2.5 Nitrogen Footprint
    2.4.2.6 Land Footprint
    2.4.2.7 Biodiversity Footprint
    2.4.2.8 Economic Footprint
    2.4.2.9 Composite Footprint
    Ecological Footprint
    Sustainable Process Index
    2.5 Management of Footprints for Sustainability
    2.5.1 Management of Carbon Footprints
    2.5.2 Crop Residues as Mulch
    2.5.3 Tillage Modifications
    2.5.4 Need to Change Dietary Habits
    2.5.5 Reduces Wastage of Food 2.5.6 Reducing Methane Emissions from Rice Cultivation
    2.5.7 Management of Water Footprints
    2.6 Natural Resources Intensification for Agroecology Sustainability
    2.7 Agroecology for Food Security
    2.8 Adaptive Measures for Soil Ecology
    2.9 Adaptive Measures for Crop Ecology Under Changing Climate
    2.9.1 Adjustment in Sowing Time and Method
    2.9.2 Stress Tolerant Cultivars
    2.9.3 Cropping System
    2.9.4 Conservation Tillage
    2.9.5 Nutrient Management
    2.9.6 Water Management
    2.10 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jacques-Eric Bergez, Elise Audouin, Olivier Therond, editors.
    Summary: There is wide agreement on the need to change the prevalent agricultural models, given their negative impacts and their incompatibility with current societal issues. Agroecological transition has been promoted as a potential solution to the ecological, social and economic problems generated by these models. It however involves a systemic, multi-scale and transdisciplinary process. Due to this complexity, the overall picture of what farms and food systems "actually are" and "might be" may not be apparent at the individual level. Yet individuals' knowledge and values provide complementary insights on how to proceed in deepening ecological modernisation. Expertise can also provide landmarks to be considered in that process. Because local stakeholders' experience and skills are key resources in the adaptation and adoption of agroecological transition, new conceptual and methodological frameworks and tools have to be developed to support them in the design process of such a complex transition. This book presents feedback from the 'Territorial Agroecological Transition in Action'- TATA-BOX research project, which was devoted to these specific issues. The multidisciplinary and multi-organisation research team steered a four-year action-research process in two territories of France. This book presents: i) the key dimensions to be considered when dealing with agroecological transition: diversity of agriculture models, management of uncertainties, polycentric governance, autonomies, and role of actors' networks; ii) an operational and original participatory process and associated boundary tools to support local stakeholders in shifting from a shared diagnosis to a shared action plan for transition, and in so doing developing mutual understanding and involvement; iii) an analysis of the main effects of the methodology on research organisation and on stakeholders' development and application; iv) critical analysis and foresights on the main outcomes of TATA-BOX, provided by external researchers."

    Contents:
    Foreword; Dedieu Benoît
    Chapter 1: General introduction; Jacques-Eric Bergez and Olivier Therond
    Chapter 2: TATA-BOX at a glance; Jacques-Eric Bergez and Olivier Therond Part I: Territorial Agroecological Transition at a concept crossroads
    Chapter 3: Socio-economic characterisation of agriculture models; Gaël Plumecocq, Thomas Debril, Michel Duru, Marie-Benoît Magrini, Jean-Pierre Sarthou and Olivier Therond
    Chapter 4: An integrated approach to livestock farming systems' autonomy in designing and managing agroecological transition at the farm and territorial levels; Marie-Angélina Magne, Guillaume Martin, Marc Moraine, Julie Ryschawy, Vincent Thenard, Pierre Triboulet and Jean-Philippe Choisis
    Chapter 5: Agroecological transition from farms to territorialised agri-food systems: issues and drivers; Marie-Benoît Magrini, Guillaume Martin, Marie-Angélina Magne, Michel Duru, Nathalie Couix, Laurent Hazard and Gaël Plumecocq
    Chapter 6: A plurality of viewpoints regarding the uncertainties of the agroecological transition; Danièle Magda, Nathalie Girard, Valérie Angeon, Célia Cholez, Nathalie Raulet-Croset, Régis Sabbadin, Nicolas Salliou, Cécile Barnaud, Claude Monteil and Nathalie Peyrard
    Chapter 7: Towards an integrated framework for the governance of a territorialised agroecological transition; Pierre Triboulet, Jean-Pierre Del Corso, Michel Duru, Danielle Galliano, Amélie Gonçalves, Catherine Milou and Gaël Plumecocq
    Chapter 8: The key role of actors in the agroecological transition of farmers: a case-study in the Tarn-Aveyron Basin; Julie Ryschawy, Jean-Pierre Sarthou, Ariane Chabert and Olivier Therond Part II: Support methodology for territorial agroecological transition design, and feedback from the TATA-BOX project experience
    Chapter 9: Participatory methodology for designing an agroecological transition at local level; Elise Audouin, Jacques-Eric Bergez and Olivier Therond
    Chapter 10: Towards a reflective approach to research project management; Lorène Prost, Marie Chizallet, Marie Taverne and Flore Barcellini
    Chapter 11: Evaluation of the operationalisation of the TATA-BOX process; Marie Taverne, Sarah Clément, Lorène Prost and Flore Barcellini Part III: New prospects and cross-cutting perspectives
    Chapter 12: Information and communication technology (ICT) and the agroecological transition; Lola Leveau, Aurélien Bénel, Jean-Pierre Cahier, François Pinet, Pascal Salembier, Vincent Soulignac and Jacques -Eric Bergez
    Chapter 13: TATA-BOX: A model for participatory processes?; Sylvie Lardon
    Chapter 14: Review and Critique of the TATA-BOX Model; Charles A. Francis and Geir Lieblein
    Chapter 15: Opening the TATA-BOX to raise new questions on agroecological transition; Jean-Marc Touzard, Jean-Marc Barbier, Laure Hossard.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Mirza Hasanuzzaman.
    Summary: Agronomic crops have been used to provide foods, beverages, fodders, fuels, medicines and industrial raw materials since the dawn of human civilization. Today, agronomic crops are being cultivated by employing scientific methods instead of traditional methods. However, in the current era of climate change, agronomic crops are subjected to various environmental stresses, which results in substantial yield loss. To meet the food demands of the ever-increasing global population, new technologies and management practices are being adopted to boost yield and maintain productivity under both normal and adverse conditions. Scientists are now exploring a variety of approaches to the sustainable production of agronomic crops, including varietal development, soil management, nutrient and water management, pest management, etc. Researchers have also made remarkable progress in developing stress tolerance in crops through different approaches. However, achieving optimal production to meet the increasing food demand is an open challenge. Although there have been numerous publications on the above-mentioned problems, and despite the extensive research being conducted on them, there is hardly any comprehensive book available. In response, this book offers a timely resource, addressing all aspects of production technologies, management practices and stress tolerance in agronomic crops in a single volume.

    Contents:
    Agronomic Crops: Types and Uses
    Climate Resilient Minor Crops for Food Security
    Climatic Variability and Agronomic Cropping Pattern
    Soil Health in Cropping Systems: An Overview
    Agronomic Cropping Systems in relation to Climatic Variability.-Growth and Development Dynamics in Agronomic Crops under Environmental Stress
    Tillage and Crop Production
    Effect of Planting Dates on Agronomic Crop Production
    Crop production under changing climate
    Past, Present and Future
    Cultivation of Aromatic Rice: A review
    Direct Seeding in Rice: Problems and Prospects
    Advanced Production Technologies of Wheat
    Advanced Production Technologies of Maize
    Agrotechnologies of Baby Corn Production
    Advanced Production Technologies of Millets
    Advanced Production Technologies of Legumes Crops
    Advanced Production Technologies of Oilseed Crops
    Advanced Production Technology of Sugar Crops
    Advanced Production Technologies of Potato
    Advanced Production Technology and Processing of Jute
    Tea production in Bangladesh: From bush to mug
    Tea: a worthwhile, popular beverage crop since time immemorial
    Agronomy of Betelvine Crop
    Fundamentals of Crop Rotation in Agronomic Management
    Cool Season Food Legumes in Rice Fallows: An Indian Perspective
    Crop Diversification and Food Security
    Fundamentals of Seed Production and Processing of Agronomic Crops
    Seed Production Technologies of some Major Field Crops
    Postharvest Technologies for Major Agronomic Crops.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, editor.
    Summary: Agronomic crops have provided food, beverages, fodder, fuel, medicine and industrial raw materials since the beginning of human civilization. More recently, agronomic crops have been cultivated using scientific rather than traditional methods. However, in the current era of climate change, agronomic crops are suffering from different environmental stresses that result in substantial yield loss. To meet the food demands of the ever-increasing global population, new technologies and management practices are being adopted to boost yields and maintain productivity under both normal and adverse conditions. Further, in the context of sustainable agronomic crop production, scientists are adopting new approaches, such as varietal development, soil management, nutrient and water management, and pest management. Researchers have also made remarkable advances in developing stress tolerance in crops. However, the search for appropriate solutions for optimal production to meet the increasing food demand is still ongoing. Although there are several publications on the recent advances in these areas, there are few comprehensive resources available covering all of the recent topics. This timely book examines all aspects of production technologies, management practices and stress tolerance of agronomic crops.

    Contents:
    Crop Rotation: Principles and Practices
    Improving Water Use Efficiency in Agronomic Crop Production
    Carbon Dioxide Enrichment and Crop Productivity
    Soil Management for Better Crop Production and Sustainable Agriculture
    Tillage Effects on Agronomic Crop Production
    Alternate Wetting and Drying System for Water Management in Rice
    Tools and Techniques for Nitrogen Management in Cereals
    Biological Nitrogen Fixation in Nutrient Management
    Use of Biofertilizers for Sustainable Crop Production
    Organic Manuring for Agronomic Crops
    Nitrogen Fixation in Nutrient Management
    Weed Seed Bank
    Impacts and Management for Future Crop Production
    Weed Management for Healthy Crop Production
    Integrated Weed Management for Agronomic Crops
    Optimizing Herbicide Use in Herbicide-Tolerant Crops: Challenges, Opportunities, and Recommendations
    Non-chemical Weed Management for Field Crops
    Beneficial Effects of Weed Edophytic Bacteria: Diversity and Potentials of their Usage in Sustainable Agriculture
    Pest Management for Agronomic Crops
    Integrated Pest and Disease Management for Better Agronomic Crop Production
    Green Manuring for Soil Health and Sustainable Production of Agronomic Crops
    Plant-microbes Interactions in Agronomic Crops
    Mycorrhiza in Sustainable Crop Production
    The Role of Mucuna pruriens in Small Holder Farming Systems of Eastern and Southern Africa: A Review
    Scientific Interventions to Improve Land and Water Productivity for Climate Smart Agriculture in South-Asia
    Adaptation Strategies to Mitigate the Evapotranspiration for Sustainable Crop Production: A Perspective of Rice-Wheat Cropping System
    Tools and Techniques of Post-harvest Processing of Food Grains and Seeds
    Nanotechnology and its Role in Agronomic Crops
    Role of ICT in Crop Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, editor.
    Summary: Agronomic crops have been a source of foods, beverages, fodders, fuels, medicines and industrial raw materials since the dawn of human civilization. Over time, these crops have come to be cultivated using scientific methods instead of traditional methods. However, in the era of climate change, agronomic crops are increasingly subjected to various environmental stresses, which results in substantial yield loss. To meet the food demands of the ever-increasing global population, new technologies and management practices are being adopted to boost yield and maintain productivity under both normal and adverse conditions. To promote the sustainable production of agronomic crops, scientists are currently exploring a range of approaches, which include varietal development, soil management, nutrient and water management, pest management etc. Researchers have also made remarkable progress in developing stress tolerance in crops through various approaches. However, finding solutions to meet the growing food demands remains a challenge. Although there are several research publications on the above-mentioned problems, there are virtually no comprehensive books addressing all of the recent topics. Accordingly, this book, which covers all aspects of production technologies, management practices, and stress tolerance of agronomic crops in a single source, offers a highly topical guide.

    Contents:
    Abiotic stress tolerance in field crops : integration of omics approaches / Zahide Neslihan Ozturk Gokce, Seyda Akbas, Sefa Ayten, M. Hussain Azimi, Reyhan Das, Saime Buse Guven et al.
    Use of QTL in developing stress tolerance in agronomic crops / Ali Fuat Gökçe, Usman Khalid Chaudhry
    Abiotic stress and applications of omics approaches to develop stress tolerance in agronomic crops / Subramani Pandian, Kasinathan Rakkammal, Arockiam Sagina Rency, Pandiyan Muthuramalingam, Shunmugiah Karutha Pandian, Manikandan Ramesh
    The possible influence of climate change on agriculture / Sumera Shabir, Noshin Ilyas
    Effect of agricultural pollution on crops / Fatima Bibi, Noshin Ilyas
    Toxicity of soil hydrocarbon pollution in field crops and its remediation / Maimona Saeed, Noshin Ilvas
    Drought and heat stress in cotton (Gossypium hirsutum L.) : consequences and their possible mitigation strategies / Ayman EL Sabagh, Akbar Hossain, Md. Sohidul Islam, Celaleddin Barutcular, Disna Ratnasekera, Ozgul Gormus et al.
    Adverse effect of drought on quality of major cereal crops : implications and their possible mitigation strategies / Ayman EL Sabagh, Akbar Hossain, Celaleddin Barutçular, Mohammad Sohidul Islam, Zahoor Ahmad, Allah Wasaya et al. Growth and morphological changes of agronomic crops under abiotic stress / Aditi Shreeya Bali, Gagan Preet Singh Sidhu
    Impact of climate variability on phenology of rice / Susmita Das, Adyant Kumar, Manashi Barman, Sukanta Pal, Pintoo Bandopadhyay
    Abiotic stress responses and tolerance mechanisms for sustaining crop productivity in sugarcane / Sangeeta Srivastava, Pavan Kumar
    Sugar beet : a sustainable crop for saline environment / Varucha Misra, A. K. Mall, A. D. Pathak
    Agronomic crop responses and tolerance to drought stress / Seyed Yahya Salehi-Lisar, Hamideh Bakhshayeshan-Agdam
    The response of major food crops to drought stress : physiological and biochemical responses / S. Bakht, K. Safdar, K. U. Khair, A. Fatima, A. Fayyaz, S. M. Ali et al.
    Rice production, augmentation, escalation, and yield under water stress / U. Maalik, M. Farid, M. Zubair, S. Ali, M. Riwan, M. Shafqat et al.
    Role of mineral nutrition in improving drought and salinity tolerance in field crops / Fahim Nawaz, Muhammad Asif Shehzad, Sadia Majeed, Khawaja Shafique Ahmad, Muhammad Aqib, Muhammad Munir Usmani et al.
    Drought stress tolerance in legume crops / Savita, Ajay Tomer, Saurabh Kumar Singh
    Drought tolerance : breeding efforts in sugarcane / A. K. Mall, Varucha Misra, B. D. Singh, Mukesh Kumar, A. D. Pathak
    High-temperature response and tolerance in agronomic crops / Albert Maibam, Shabistana Nisar, Sajad Majeed Zargar, Reetika Mahajan
    Agronomic crop responses and tolerance to metals/metalloids toxicity / Nadeem Iqbal, Nida Nazir, Muhammad Nauman, Malik Tahir Hayat, Waquar-un-Nisa
    Arsenic contamination in major food crops : issues and mitigation in Indian subcontinent perspective / Sanchita Mondal, Puspendu Dutta, Pintoo Bandopadhyay, Srijani Maji Responses and tolerance of cereal crops to metal and metalloid toxicity / Iftikhar Ahmad, Muhammad Tahir, Umar Daraz, Allah Ditta, Muhammad Baqir Hussain, Zia Ul Haq Khan
    Agronomic crop responses and tolerance to polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon toxicity / Mahdieh Houshani, Seyed Yahya Salehi-Lisar
    Gene pyramiding : an emerging control strategy against insect pests of agronomic crops / Muhammad Salim, Ayhan Gökçe, Muhammad Nadir Naqqash, Allah Bakhsh
    Agronomic crops response and tolerance to allelopathic stress / Hamideh Bakhshayeshan-Agdam, Seyed Yahya Salehi-Lisar
    Oxidative stress in crop plants / Arun Kumar Maurya
    Herbicide resistance in crops and weeds / Zubair Aslam, Muhammad Saeed Ahmed, Safdar Bashir, Nabeel Khan, Zulfiqar Ahmad Saqib
    Improving crop health and productivity : appraisal of induced mutations and advanced molecular genetic tools / Noor-ul-Huda Ghori, Tahir Ghori, Sameen Ruqia Imadi, Alvina Gul
    Use of biostimulants to improve salinity tolerance in agronomic crops / Dell' Aversana Emilia, D' Amelia Luisa, De Pascale Stefania, Carillo Petronia
    Abiotic stress tolerance in wheat and the role of silicon : an experimental evidence / Mukhtar Ahmed, Ummara Qadeer, Fayayz-ul-Hassan, Shah Fahad, Wajid Naseem, Saowapa Duangpan et al.
    Molecular mechanisms associated with drought and heat tolerance in plants and options for crop improvement for combined stress tolerance / M. S. Parvathi, K. H. Dhanyalakshmi, K. N. Nataraja
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Marilyn S. Arsham, Margaret J. Barch, Helen J. Lawce.
    Contents:
    The cell and cell division / Margaret J Barch, Helen J Lawce
    Cytogenetics: an overview / Helen J Lawce, Michael G Brown
    Peripheral blood cytogenetic methods / Helen J Lawce, Michael G Brown
    General cell culture principles and fibroblast culture / Debra F Saxe, Kristin M May, Jean H Priest
    Prenatal chromosome diagnosis / Kristin M May, Debra F Saxe, Jean H Priest
    Chromosome stains / Helen J Lawce
    Human chromosomes: identification and variations / Helen J Lawce, Luke Boyd
    ISCN: the universal language of cytogenetics / Marilyn S Arsham, Lisa G Shaffer
    Constitutional chromosome abnormalities / Kathleen Kaiser-Rogers
    Genomic imprinting / R Ellen Magenis
    Cytogenetic analysis of hematologic malignant diseases / Nyla A Heerema
    Cytogenetic methods and findings in human solid tumors / Marilu Nelson
    Chromosome instability syndromes / Yassmine Akkari
    Microscopy and imaging / Margaret J Barch, Helen J Lawce
    Computer imaging / Christine E Haessig
    Fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) / Helen J Lawce, Jeffrey S Sanford
    Multicolor FISH (SKY and M-FISH) and CGH / Turid Knutsen
    Genomic microarray technologies for the cytogenetics laboratory / Bhavana J Davé, Warren G Sanger
    Mathematics for the cytogenetic technologist / Patricia K Dowling
    Selected topics on safety, equipment maintenance, and compliance for the cytogenetics laboratory / Helen Jenks, Janet Krueger
    A system approach to quality / Peggy J Stupca, Sheryl A Tran
    Laboratory management / Mervat S Ayad, Adam Sbeiti
    Laboratory information system / Peining Li, Richard Van Rheeden
    Animal cytogenetics / Marlys L Houck, Teri L Lear, Suellen J Charter
    Online genetic resources and references / Wahab A Khan.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Michael J. Paulus and Michael D. Langford.
    Summary: "Artificial intelligence is rapidly and radically changing our lives and world. This book is a multidisciplinary engagement with the present and future impacts of AI from the standpoint of Christian faith. It provides technological, philosophical, and theological foundations for thinking about AI, as well as a series of reflections on the impact of AI on relationships, behavior, education, work, and moral action. The book serves as an accessible introduction to AI as well as a guide to wise consideration, design, and use of AI by examining foundational understandings and beliefs from a Christian perspective."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction / Michael J. Paulus
    An introduction to artificial intelligence / Carlos R. Arias
    What's so artificial and intelligent about artificial intelligence? : a conceptual framework for AI / Rebeka L.H. Rice
    A theological framework for reflection on artificial intelligence / Michael D. Langford
    Artificial intelligence and theological personhood / Michael D. Langford
    Reinforcement in the information revolution / Phillip M. Baker
    21st century learning skills and artificial intelligence / David Wicks, Michael J. Paulus / Automation, apocalypse : imagining the future of work / Michael J. Paulus
    Sin and grace / Bruce D. Baker
    Epilogue : A litany for faithful engagement with artificial intelligence.
    Digital Access EBSCOhost [2022]
  • Digital
    Rob Shimonski.
    Summary: The best source for cutting-edge insights into AI in healthcare operations AI in Healthcare: How Artificial Intelligence Is Changing IT Operations and Infrastructure Services collects, organizes and provides the latest, most up-to-date research on the emerging technology of artificial intelligence as it is applied to healthcare operations. Written by a world-leading technology executive specializing in healthcare IT, this book provides concrete examples and practical advice on how to deploy artificial intelligence solutions in your healthcare environment. AI in Healthcare reveals to readers how they can take advantage of connecting real-time event correlation and response automation to minimize IT disruptions in critical healthcare IT functions. This book provides in-depth coverage of all the most important and central topics in the healthcare applications of artificial intelligence, including: Healthcare IT AI Clinical Operations AI Operational Infrastructure Project Planning Metrics, Reporting, and Service Performance AIOps in Automation AIOps Cloud Operations Future of AI Written in an accessible and straightforward style, this book will be invaluable to IT managers, administrators, and engineers in healthcare settings, as well as anyone with an interest or stake in healthcare technology.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    by Peter Lee, Carey Goldberg, and Isaac Kohane, with Sébastien Bubeck.
    Summary: "Just months ago, millions of people were stunned by ChatGPT's amazing abilities, and its bizarre hallucinations. That was 2022. AI's next generation is coming fast : smarter, more accurate, with deeper technical knowledge. GPT-4 and its competitors are on the verge of transforming medicine. Whether you're a healthcare leader, provider, or a patient, you need to understand these technologies, stat. What can they do? What can't they do, yet? What shouldn't they ever do? To decide, experience the cutting edge for yourself. Join three insiders who've had months of early access to GPT-4 as they reveal its momentous potential ; to improve diagnoses, summarize patient visits, streamline processes, accelerate research, as well as its risks. You'll see real GPT-4 dialogues ; unrehearsed and unfiltered, brilliant and blundering alike, all annotated with invaluable context, candid commentary, real risk insights about potential downsides, and up-to-the-minute takeaways."-- taken from back cover.

    Contents:
    Foreword / by Sam Altman
    First contact / by Peter Lee
    Medicina ex machina / by Peter Lee
    The big question : Does it “understand?” / by Peter Lee
    Trust but verify / by Isaac "Zak" Kohane
    The AI-augmented patient / by Carey Goldberg
    So much more : Math, coding, and logic / by Peter Lee
    The ultimate paperwork shredder / by Peter Lee
    Smarter science / by Isaac "Zak" Kohane
    Safety first / by Isaac "Zak" Kohane, Carey Goldberg, and Peter Lee
    The big black bag / by Carey Goldberg and Isaac "Zak" Kohane
    Epilogue / by Peter Lee.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    R859.7.A78 L447 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Arvind Narayanan & Sayash Kapoor.
    Summary: "A trade book that argues that predictive AI is snake oil: it cannot and will never work. Artificial Intelligence is an umbrella term for a set of loosely related technologies. For instance, ChatGPT has little in common with algorithms that banks use to evaluate loan applicants. Both of these are referred to as AI, but in all of the salient ways - how they work, what they're used for and by whom, and how they fail - they couldn't be more different. Understanding the fundamental differences between AI technologies is critical for a technologically literate public to evaluate how AI is being used all around us. In this book, Arvind Narayanan and Sayash Kapoor explain the major strains of AI in use today: generative AI, predictive AI, and AI for content moderation. They show readers how to differentiate between them and, importantly, make a cogent argument for which types of AI can work well and which can never work, because of their inherent limitations. AI in this latter category, the authors argue, is AI snake oil: it does not and cannot work. More precisely, generative AI is imperfect but can be used for good once we learn how to apply it appropriately, whereas predictive AI can never work - in spite of the fact that it's being sold and marketed today in products - because we have never been able to accurately predict human behavior"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access De Gruyter [2024]
  • Print
    Kai-Fu Lee.
    Summary: The United States has long been the leader in Artificial Intelligence. But Dr. Kai-Fu Lee--one of the world's most respected experts on AI--reveals that China has caught up to the US at an astonishingly rapid pace. As Sino-American competition in AI heats up, Lee envisions China and the US forming a powerful duopoly in AI. He outlines the upheaval of traditional jobs, how the suddenly unemployed will find new ways of making their lives meaningful, and how the Chinese and American governments will have to cope with the changing economic landscape. "Kai-Fu Lee--one of the world's most respected experts on AI and China--reveals that China has suddenly caught up to the United States at an astonishingly rapid and unexpected pace. In AI Superpowers, Kai-Fu Lee argues powerfully that because of the unprecedented developments in artificial intelligence, dramatic changes will be happening much sooner than many of us have expected. Indeed, as the U.S.-China competition in AI begins to heat up, Lee urges America and China to both accept and embrace the great responsibilities that come with significant technological power. Most experts already say that AI will have a devastating impact on blue-collar jobs. But Lee predicts that Chinese and American AI will have a strong impact on white-collar jobs as well. Is universal basic income the solution? In Lee's opinion, probably not. But he provides a clear description of which jobs will be affected and how soon, which jobs can be enhanced with AI, and, most important, how we can provide solutions to some of the most profound changes in human history that are coming soon."--Jacket.

    Contents:
    China's Sputnik moment
    Copycats in the Coliseum
    China's alternate Internet universe
    A tale of two countries
    The four waves of AI
    Utopia, dystopia, and the real AI crisis
    The wisdom of cancer
    A blueprint for human co-existence with AI
    Our global AI story.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    HC79.I55 L435 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Robert Lorway.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Section I. Canada: Professionalization: Chapter 1: A Vital Response
    Chapter 2: Treatment Rebellions
    Section II. India: Techno-Bureaucracies: Chapter 3: Geographies of Intervention
    Chapter 4: Documenting Sovereignty
    Section III. Kenya: Bioexperimentalization
    Chapter 5: A South-to-South Collaboration
    Chapter 6:The Logic of Verification
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Peter Piot ; translated by Laurence Garey.
    Summary: Peter Piot, founding executive director of the Joint United Nations Programme on HIV/AIDS (UNAIDS), recounts his experience as a clinician, scientist, and activist fighting the disease from its earliest manifestation to today. The AIDS pandemic was not only catastrophic to the health of millions worldwide but also fractured international relations, global access to new technologies, and public health policies in nations across the globe. As he struggled to get ahead of the disease, Piot found science does little good when it operates independently of politics and economics, and politics is worthless if it rejects scientific evidence and respect for human rights. Piot describes how the epidemic altered global attitudes toward sexuality, the character of the doctor-patient relationship, the influence of civil society in international relations, and traditional partisan divides. AIDS thrust health into national and international politics where, he argues, it rightly belongs. The global reaction to AIDS over the past decade is the positive result of this partnership, showing what can be achieved when science, politics, and policy converge on the ground. Yet it remains a fragile achievement, and Piot warns against complacency and the consequences of reduced investments. He refuses to accept a world in which high levels of HIV infection are the norm. Instead, he explains how to continue to reduce the incidence of the disease to minute levels through both prevention and treatment, until a vaccine is discovered. -- Publisher description.

    Contents:
    A heterogeneous and still-evolving epidemic
    Hyperendemic HIV in Southern Africa : the heritage of apartheid
    AIDS as an international political issue
    A new type of transnational civil society movement
    The right to treatment
    Combination prevention
    The economics of AIDS
    Prominence of human rights
    The long-term view.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2015
  • Print
    M.J. Harrison, T.E.J. Healy, J.A. Thornton.
    Contents:
    pt. 1. The Basic sciences
    pt. 2. Clinical practice.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD82.2 .H37
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Fothergill, J. Milner; Thorowgood, John C.
    Contents:
    pt. 1. Semeiology, specially designed for students preparing for examinations (1883 : 75 p.)
    pt. 2. Physical (1881 : [2], 61 p.) / J.C. Thorowgood
    pt. 3. What to ask (1882 : 66 p.).
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L71 .F76
    3
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Alethia Jones and Virginia Eubanks ; with Barbara Smith.
    Summary: "'Not a memoir, a biography, nor a reader. It is a reflection and a conversation. It is also a montage of forty years of documents, interviews and articles that provide useful lessons for social justice work' ... As an organizer, writer, publisher, scholar-activist and elected official, Barbara Smith has played key roles in multiple social justice movements, including Civil Rights, feminism, lesbian and gay liberation, anti-racism, and Black feminism. Her four decades of grassroots activism forged collaborations that introduced the idea that oppression must be fought on a variety of fronts simultaneously, including gender, race, class and sexuality. By combining ... historical documents with new unpublished interviews with fellow activists, this book uncovers the deep roots of today's 'identity politics' and 'intersectionality' and serves as an essential primer for practising solidarity and resistance"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Chronicling an activist life
    Home grown : early roots of activism
    Building Black feminism
    Building Black women's studies
    Building Kitchen Table Press
    Building multi-issue movements
    Building progressive urban politics
    "Took Root, Bore Fruit" : legacies and futures of a Black feminist life.
    Digital Access 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    JC599.U6 A56 2014
    1
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Air Force Pamphlet to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Zahid Hussain Khan, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Physiology of the Airway / Yoo Kuen Chan
    2. Airway Assessment: A Critical Appraisal / Zahid H. Khan
    3. Videolaryngoscopy and Indirect Intubating Aids in Airway Management / Sze-Ying Thong and Wendy H. L. Teoh
    4. Perioperative Care of Ambulatory Anaesthesia / Anil Agarwal and Kamal Kishore
    5. The Paediatric Airway: Normal and Abnormal / Ina Ismiarti Shariffuddin and Lucy Chan
    6. Intubation of the Pediatric Patient / Josef Holzki
    7. The Difficult Pediatric Airway: Management Options / Mahesh Vakamudi
    8. Perioperative Management of Obstructive Sleep Apnea / Karen Mak and Edwin Seet
    9. Airway Management in Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI) / Fauzia Anis Khan
    10. Airway Management in Cervical Spine Injured Patients / Srikanth Sridhar and Carin A. Hagberg
    11. Indigenous Devices in Difficult Airway Management / Virendra K. Arya
    12. Cricothyrotomy / Virendra K. Arya
    13. Surgical Airway / Jinbin Zhang and Orlando Hung
    14. Surgical Approaches to Airway Management / Surender K. Malhotra
    15. Difficult Airway in Obstetrics / Sunanda Gupta and Apoorva Gupta
    16. Ultrasonography: Heralding a New Era in Airway Management / Michael Seltz Kristensen and Wendy H. L. Teoh.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    American Joint Committee on Cancer ; editor-in-chief, Mahul B. Amin, MD, FCAP ; editors, Stephen B. Edge, MD, FACS [and 18 others].
    Summary: "The AJCC Cancer Staging Manual is used by physicians and health care professionals throughout the world to facilitate the uniform description and reporting of neoplastic diseases. Proper classification and staging of cancer is essential for the physician to assign proper treatment, evaluate results of management and clinical trials, and to serve as the standard for local, regional and international reporting on cancer incidence and outcome. -- Significantly expanded and developed by international disease site expert panels, the Eighth Edition AJCC Cancer Staging Manual brings together all the currently available knowledge on staging of cancer at various anatomic sites. In this edition, evidence-based TNM staging is supplemented, as appropriate, by selected molecular markers and newly acquired insights into the molecular underpinnings of cancer. This edition features 12 entirely new staging systems, a wide range of changed or new staging definitions, and a refined emphasis on a personalized-medicine approach. To enhance the print and electronic usability of the cancer staging forms, they are now available exclusively for access and downloading at www.cancerstaging.org. -- The Eighth Edition AJCC Cancer Staging Manual remains the gold standard reference for oncologists, surgeons, pathologists, radiologists, cancer registrars and medical professionals world-wide to ensure that all those caring for cancer patients are fully versed in the language of cancer staging." -- from back of book.

    Contents:
    PART 1. General Information on Cancer Staging and End-Results Reporting
    PART 2. Head and Neck
    PART 3. Upper Gastrointestinal Tract
    PART 4. Lower Gastrointestinal Tract
    PART 5. Hepatobiliary System
    PART 6. Neuroendocrine Tumors
    PART 7. Thorax
    PART 8. Bone
    PART 9. Soft Tissue Sarcoma
    PART 10. Skin
    PART 11. Breast
    PART 12. Female Reproductive Organs
    PART 13. Male Genital Organs
    PART 14. Urinary Tract
    PART 15. Opthalmic Sites
    PART 16. Central Nervous System
    PART 17. Endocrine System
    PART 18. Hematologic Malignancies.
    Digital Access STAT!Ref 2017
  • Digital
    American Joint Committee on Cancer ; editor-in-chief, Mahul B. Amin, MD, FCAP ; editors, Stephen B. Edge, MD, FACS [and 18 others].
    Digital Access Stat!Ref 2024
  • Digital
    Binita M. Kamath, Kathleen M. Loomes, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a concise yet comprehensive overview of Alagille syndrome. The book reviews the pathophysiology and genetics of the disorder, discusses recent molecular advances and its impact on diagnostics, and describes management challenges and strategies. The text also touches upon future treatment options. Written by experts in the field, Alagille Syndrome: Pathogenesis and Clinical Management is a valuable resource for physicians and researchers dealing with this disorder, one that will help guide patient management and stimulate investigative efforts.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors Daniel Albert, Joan Miller, Dimitri Azar, Lucy H. Young.
    Digital Access Springer Live 2020-
    Continuously updated edition
  • Digital
    Daniel M. Albert, Joan W. Miller, Dimitri T. Azar, Lucy H. Young, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editors, Jennifer Kromberg, Prashiela Manga.
    Summary: Albinism in Africa: Historical, Geographic, Medical, Genetic, and Psychosocial Aspects provides the first in-depth reference for understanding and treating patients of human albinism in Africa. Leading international contributors examine the historical, geographic, psychosocial, genetic and molecular considerations of importance in effectively and sensitively managing this genetic disorder. Foundational chapters covering the historical and psychosocial aspects of albinism are supplemented by discussions of the pathobiology of the disease, as well as a thorough analysis of the genetics of skin pigmentation, eye pigmentation, hair pigmentation, and incidents of skin cancer involved in the manifestations of this disorder. New prenatal diagnostics and genetic testing methods, genetic risk assessment for individuals, families, and communities, and novel genetic markers that may be used for developing new therapeutics for treating albinism are also discussed in detail. The book provides care management approaches that may be applied to instances of albinism in other regions, along with guiding principles for treating rare genetic disorders and stigmatized patient populations across the globe.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction and Historical Background / Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    2. Clinical Features, Types of Albinism, and Natural History / Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    3. Epidemiology of Albinism / Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    4. Prevalence and Population Genetics of Albinism: Surveys in Zimbabwe, Namibia, and Tanzania / Patricia M. Lund, Mark Roberts
    5. Molecular Biology of Albinism / Prashiela Manga
    6. Dermatological Aspects of Albinism / Sian Hartshorne, Prashiela Manga
    7. Albinism and the Eye / Susan E.I. Williams
    Chapter8. Low-Vision Rehabilitation and Albinism / Rebecca L. Kammer
    9. Psychosocial and Cultural Aspects of Albinism / Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    10. Genetic Counseling and Albinism / Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    11. Genetic Testing, Postnatal, and Prenatal Diagnosis for Albinism / Robyn Kerr, Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    12. Albinism and Social Marginalization / Sam Clarke, Jon Beale
    13. Interventions: Preventive Management, Empowerment, Advocacy, and Support Services / G.R. Kromberg
    14. A Personal Perspective: Living With Albinism / Nomasonto G. Mazibuko, Jennifer G.R. Kromberg
    15. Summary and Conclusion / Jennifer G.R. Kromberg, Prashiela Manga
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Amitava Dasgupta.
    Contents:
    1. Alcohol a double-edged sword
    2. Drugs of abuse
    3. Designer drugs including bath salts and spices
    4. Combined alcohol and drug abuse
    5. Link between environmental factors, personality factors, and addiction
    6. Genetic polymorphisms of alcohol metabolizing enzymes associated with protection from or increased risk of alcohol abuse
    7. Pharmacogenomics of abused drugs
    8. Association between polymorphisms in genes encoding various receptors, transporters, and enzymes and alcohol/drug addiction
    9. Methods of alcohol measurement
    10. Laboratory methods for measuring drugs of abuse in urine
    11. Analysis of drug abuse in serum, hair, oral fluid, sweat and meconium.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Alcohol and Alcoholism (New York, New York (State)) to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Vasilis Vasiliou, Samir Zakhari, Lopa Mishra, Helmut K. Seitz, editors.
    Summary: "Following the Third Alcohol and Cancer Conference, this volume compiles the most up-to-date research on the role of alcohol consumption in carcinogenesis, from epidemiology to pathology metabolism and stem cells. More specifically, it delves into the effects of alcohol consumption and thyroid cancer, CD133+ progenitor cells, carcinogenic iron accumulation, developmental morphogens, and cancer-inducing epigenetic changes"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Alcohol Consumption and Risk of Thyroid Cancer: A Population Based Case-Control Study in Connecticut
    Roles of Cytochrome P450 in Metabolism of Ethanol and Carcinogens
    Glutathione and Transsulfuration in Alcohol-associated Tissue Injury and Carcinogenesis
    Fatty liver disease and hepatocellular carcinoma: The pathologist's view
    Alcoholic liver disease accelerates early hepatocellular cancer in a mouse model
    Chronic ethanol consumption and generation of etheno-DNA adducts in cancer-prone tissues
    Role of TGF-β in Alcohol-Induced Liver Disease
    NANOG-dependent metabolic reprogramming and symmetric division in tumor-initiating stem-like cells
    Diet supplementation with soy protein isolate, but not the isoflavone genistein, protects against alcohol-induced tumor progression in DEN-treated male mice
    ALDH1L1 and ALDH1L2 folate regulatory enzymes in cancer
    Developmental Morphogens & Recovery from Alcoholic Liver Disease
    Suppressed fat mobilization due to PNPLA3 rs738409 -associated liver damage in heavy drinkers: The liver damage feedback hypothesis
    Aldo-Keto Reductases: Multifunctional Proteins as Therapeutic Targets in Diabetes and Inflammatory Disease
    Engineered animal models designed for investigating ethanol metabolism, toxicity and cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Judith Norback.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RC566 .N822
    1
  • Digital
    volume editors, Edith V. Sullivan and Adolf Pfefferbaum.
    Summary: "Alcohol is the most widely used drug in the world, yet alcoholism remains a serious addiction affecting nearly 20 million Americans. Our current understanding of alcohol's effect on brain structure and related functional damage is being revolutionized by genetic research, basic neuroscience, brain imaging science, and systematic study of cognitive, sensory, and motor abilities. Volume 125 of the Handbook of Clinical Neurology is a comprehensive, in-depth treatise of studies on alcohol and the brain covering the basic understanding of alcohol's effect on the central nervous system, the diagnosis and treatment of alcoholism, and prospect for recovery. The chapters within will be of interest to clinical neurologists, neuropsychologists, and researchers in all facets and levels of the neuroscience of alcohol and alcoholism"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Introduction
    Alcoholism: diagnosis, prognosis, epidemiology, and burden of the disease / Thomas Beresford
    Perspectives on the neuroscience of alcohol from the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism / Kenneth Warren and Matthew Reilly
    Section 2. Animal models: neurochemistry and metabolism of alcohol
    Neurocircuitry of alcoholism: synthesis from animal models / George F. Koob
    Metabolism / David Crabb and Martin Plawecki
    Use of animal models of alcohol-related behavior / John C. Crabbe
    Section 3. Molecular basis of alcoholism
    Molecular basis of alcoholism / Dana Most, Laura Ferguson and R Adron Harris
    Section 4. Neurological signs and consequences
    Alcohol: intoxication and poisoning: diagnosis and treatment / Young-Chul Jung
    Acute withdrawal: diagnosis and treatment / John CM Brust
    Neurochemical mechanisms of alcohol withdrawal / Howard C. Becker
    Molecular and neurological responses to chronic alcohol use / Michael F. Miles
    Section 5. Neuropsychology
    Methods of association and dissociation for establishing selective brain-behavior relations / Rosemary Fama and Edith V. Sullivan
    Profiles of impaired, spared, and recovered neuropsychological processes in alcoholism / Marlene Oscar-Berman
    Component processes of memory in alcoholism: pattern of compromise and neural substrates / Anne-Lise Pitel and Helene Beaunieux
    Decision making, risky behavior, and alcoholism / George Fein
    Motor systems and postural instability / Jessica Rose
    Sex differences in alcohol-related neurobehavioral consequences / Sara Jo Nixon
    Section 6. Neuroimaging of brain macrostructure and microstructure
    Structural and microstructural imaging of the brain in alcohol use disorders / Natalie May Zahr
    Section 7. Neuroimaging of neurochemical markers
    Molecular imaging in alcohol dependence / Annisa Abi-Dargham
    Brain proton magnetic resonance spectroscopy of alcohol use disorders / Dieter Meyerhoff
    Section 8. Neuroimaging of brain function
    Cognition, emotion, and attention / Tilman Schulte and Eva Muller-Oehring
    The neurobiology of alcohol craving and relapse / Rajita Sinha
    Compensatory recruitment of neural resources in chronic alcoholism / Sandra Chanraud
    Section 9. Neuroelectrophysiology
    Understanding alcohol use disorders with neuroelectrophysiology / Bernice Porjesz
    Sleeping eeg / Ian Colrain
    Section 10. Fetal alcohol spectrum disorder
    Neurobehavioral, neurological, and neuroimaging characteristics of fetal alcohol spectrum disorders / Leila Glass, Ashley L. Ware and Sarah Mattson
    Fetal alcohol spectrum disorder: pathogenesis and mechanisms / Kathleen Sulik
    Current hypotheses on the mechanisms of alcoholism / Fulton Crews
    Section 11. Adolescent drinking
    The effect of alcohol use on human adolescent brain structures and systems / Susan F. Tapert
    Section 12. Other topics
    Peripheral systems: neuropathy / Robert O. Messing and Rajani Maiya
    Pharmacological treatment of alcoholism / Raymond Francis Anton
    Alcohol-medical drug interactions / Bankole A. Johnson and Chamindi Seneviratne
    Genetics of alcoholism / Howard J. Edenberg
    Co-occurring psychiatric disorders and alcoholism / J Stephen Rich and Peter R. Martin
    Hepatic encephalopathy in alcoholic cirrhosis / Roger F. Butterworth
    Neuropathology of alcoholism / Jillian Kril
    Genetic differences in response to alcohol / Sachio Matsushita and Susumu Higuchi
    Epidemiology of drinking, alcohol use disorders, and related problems / Raul Caetano, Patrice A.C. Vaeth, Karen Chartier and Britain A. Mills
    Alcohol and the law / Michael J. Ostacher
    Clinical management of alcohol use disorders in the neurology clinic / Anna Lembke and Mark Stanford.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Otto-Michael Lesch [and others].
    Summary: In this book, new therapeutic approaches are comprehensively described, outlining the different interactions between personality, environment and the effects of the substance. In addition, the book provides a broad overview of the American and European epidemiology of alcohol and nicotine addictions. The book is written for all those who care for and offer professional therapy for alcohol and nicotine-addicted patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by David B. Cooper.
    Summary: The book brings together the most up-to-date knowledge and expertise covering the whole topic of alcohol. It presents the practical skills needed to offer ethical intervention and treatment and implement ethical person-centered care. It is a practice-based text that aims to improve ethical relationships, responses, care and practice necessary to be effective in interventions and treatment with those experiencing alcohol use and health problems. The focus is on combining the principles and philosophy of alcohol prevention and intervention, in hospital and community. Each chapter provides self-assessment exercises, reflective practice exercises, key points and a "to learn more" section, and develops a theoretical framework, before broadening to include application in care and practice. This work will appeal to a wide readership, from professionals working within the mental health care and practice environment to mental health students.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Alcohol use: Introduction. Alcohol use. Ethical practice. Palliative care. Transcultural considerations. Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, Transgender and Questioning. Mental health. Physical health
    Section 2: Assessment: Referral. Response. Assessment. Adolescent and young adult
    Female adult. Male adult. Older adult. Supporting the family. Binge drinking. Brief intervention
    Section 3: Detoxification: Who needs detoxification. Assessment of risk in detoxification. Hospital detoxification. Home detoxification
    Section 4: Treatment: Post-detoxification. Relapse. Motivational interviewing. End-of-life care
    Section 5: Conclusion: The challenges ahead. Appendices.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    edited by David M. Guidot, Ashish J. Mehta.
    Summary: Alcohol Use Disorders and the Lung: A Clinical and Pathophysiological Approach is an excellent resource for clinicians who care for individuals affected by alcohol use disorders in diverse settings. Although alcohol abuse alone does not cause acute lung injury, it renders the lung susceptible to dysfunction in response to the inflammatory stresses of sepsis, trauma, and other clinical conditions recognized to cause acute lung injury. In parallel, these same pathophysiological effects of alcohol abuse significantly increase the risk of a wide range of serious lung infections. Many clinicians involved in the primary treatment of alcohol use disorders, such as addiction psychiatrists, will find this text of interest as it will expand their understanding of the health consequences of alcohol use disorders. In parallel, clinicians who specialize in pulmonary and/or critical care medicine will have a unique resource that provides a comprehensive review of the pathophysiology of alcohol-related lung disorders and insights into evolving therapeutic options in these vulnerable individuals. Alcohol Use Disorders and the Lung: A Clinical and Pathophysiological Approach fills a gap in the literature and presents the evolving clinical research that may soon lead to novel therapies that can improve lung health in individuals with alcohol use disorders and co-existing conditions such as HIV infection.

    Contents:
    A Brief History of Alcohol Use and Abuse in Human History
    Overview of the Evolving Recognition of the Health Effects of Excessive Alcohol Use Over the Past Two Centuries Including the Classic Citations
    Current Definitions of Alcohol Use Disorders and the Use of Validated Questionnaires in Clinical Practice and Research
    The Epidemiology of Alcohol Abuse and Pneumonia
    The Epidemiology of Alcohol and Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Alcohol, the Upper Airway, and Mucociliary Dysfunction in the Conducting Airways
    Alcohol and the Alveolar Macrophage
    Alcohol and the Alveolar Epithelium
    Alcohol-Mediated Oxidative Stress in the Airway: The Unique Role of Thiol Depletion
    Alcohol and the Adaptive Immune Response in the Airway: Dendritic Cell and Lymphocyte Impairments
    Alcohol Impairment of Granulocyte Function During Lung Infection
    Disruption in the Dynamic Balance Between Transforming Growth Factor- and Granulocyte/Macrophage Colony-stimulating Factor Signaling within the Alveolar Space of the Alcoholic Lung: Impact on Epithelial and Macrophage Function
    Alcohol-mediated Zinc Deficiency within the Alveolar Space: A Potential Fundamental Mechanism Underlying Oxidative Stress and Cellular Dysfunction in the Alcoholic Lung
    The Impact of Alcohol Abuse on Multiple Organ Dysfunction in the Surgical Patient
    Alcohol and HIV: Experimental and Clinical Evidence of Combined Impact on the Lung
    Maternal Alcohol Use and the Neonate.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hitoshi Yoshiji, Kosuke Kaji, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the latest advances concerning the molecular mechanisms of and therapeutic strategies for alcohol- and non-alcohol-related digestive diseases. Alcohol abuse causes not only liver injury but can harm various organs, resulting in esophageal and colorectal cancers, GERD, pancreatitis, etc. Similar to alcoholic abuse, metabolic syndrome based on obesity and diabetes is also strongly associated with the development of various digestive diseases. Although these diseases may be differentiated by the presence or absence of alcohol intake, the pathologic findings and pathogenesis reveal a number of similarities. This volume covers clinical and basic approaches for esophageal, gastric, hepatic, colorectal and pancreatic diseases associated with alcohol abuse and metabolic syndrome; further, it discusses the roles of microbiota, oxidative stress, and apoptosis, the critical factors causing alcoholic and metabolic digestive diseases. Also, it showcases new pathological and therapeutic perspectives in gastric and pancreatic cancers. Alcoholic/Non-Alcoholic Digestive Diseases will provide invaluable information for doctors specializing in gastroenterology and hepatology and researchers seeking new research on digestive diseases based on alcohol consumption and obesity.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Senate Select Committee on Laws Relating to Alcoholic Beverages.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Final report
    v. 2. Alcohol abuse and alcoholism
    v. 4. Summary of Federal and state alcoholism programs.
    Digital Access Google Books [1974]-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L565 .C11
    1
  • Digital
    Amer Z. Aldeen, MD, FACEP, Executive Medical Director, Center for Emergency Education, Vice Chair, National Clinical Governance Board, US Acute Care Solutions, Chicago, Illinois, David H. Rosenbaum, MD, FACEP, FAAEM, Wake Emergency Physicians, P.A., WakeMed Health and Hospitals, Raleigh, North Carolina, Adjunct Professor of Emergency Medicine, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
    Summary: Fully revised and updated based on valuable reader feedback, Aldeen and Rosenbaum's 1200 Questions to Help You Pass the Emergency Medicine Boards, Third Edition gives you the tools you need to pass the ABEM board exam on the first try. Questions are slightly more difficult than the average exam question, in order to challenge and add to your knowledge and fully prepare you for questions you're likely to see. Every question in this Third Edition has been reviewed for quality and relevance, ensuring that this unique study tool is an ideal choice to prepare for both the in-service residency exam and the board exam in emergency medicine.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2017
  • Digital
    Jun Ren, Yingmei Zhang, Junbo Ge, editors.
    Summary: This volume covers the science of ALDH enzymes in relation to chronic disease processes and the future therapeutic potentials of targeting ALDH in these processes. It thoroughly reviews the roles of ALDH family in alcohol metabolism, as well as recent findings of their emerging roles in a variety of human pathologies such as cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, obesity, stroke, cancer, liver diseases and kidney diseases. Delicate contribution of ALDH enzymes in the therapeutics against chronic diseases is also discussed. It demonstrates the unique value of targeting genetic polymorphism in ALDH enzymes in personalized medicine. The book will appeal to scientists, physicians, graduate and professional students in the fields of ALDH enzymes, alcohol metabolism, cardiometabolic and other chronic diseases. Pharmaceutical and other companies developing new tools for cardiometabolic and chronic diseases treatment will also find this a valuable resource.

    Contents:
    1. Role of alcohol oxidative metabolism in its cardiovascular and autonomic effects
    2. Environmental aldehyde sources and the health implications of exposure
    3. ALDH2 and cardiovascular disease
    4. Aldehyde dehydrogenases: From alcohol metabolism to human health and precision medicine
    5. Aldehyde dehydrogenase 2 and heart Failure
    6. Mitochondrial aldehyde dehydrogenase in myocardial ischemic and ischemia-reperfusion injury
    7. East Asian variant aldehyde dehydrogenase 2 genotype (ALDH2*2*) contributes to coronary artery spasm and acute myocardial infarction
    8. Aldehyde dehydrogenases genetic polymorphism and obesity: from genomics to behavior and health
    9. Aldehyde dehydrogenase (ALDH) 2 in diabetic heart diseases
    10. The role of ALDH2 in sepsis and the to-be-discovered mechanisms
    11. ALDH2 and stroke
    12. ALDH2 and hypertension
    13. ALDH2 and cancer therapy
    14. ALDH2 polymorphism and ethanol consumption: A genetic-environmental interaction in carcinogenesis
    15. ALDH2 and aging.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jan Klimaszewski, E. Richard Hoebeke, Benoit Godin, Anthony Davies, Kayla I. Perry, Caroline Bourdon, Neville Winchester.
    Summary: Aleocharine beetles are among the most poorly known and difficult-to-identify groups of Coleoptera worldwide. This book presents the first comprehensive synopsis of aleocharine rove beetle species (Coleoptera, Staphylinidae) from British Columbia, Canada. It is important to generate a structured inventory of species in hotspots of biodiversity like British Columbia, to provide baseline biodiversity data for monitoring species responses related to climate change. It is the first book to treat and illustrate every recorded and new species. For every species, color illustrations are provided, including color habitus and genital diagnostic structures of both sexes. Two hundred and twenty-seven valid species, including 14 new species, 16 new generic records, and 36 (excluding new species) new provincial and 6 state records, in 79 genera and 14 tribes.Tribes and subtribes are arranged in phylogenetic order as it is currently recognized, and genera and subgenera are listed alphabetically within each tribe or subtribe. Species are listed alphabetically or in species groups to better reflect their relationships. Species distribution is listed by provinces and territories in Canada and states in the United States, and the geographic origin of each species is categorized as native, Holarctic, adventive or undetermined (either adventive or Holarctic). Every species is presented with a morphological diagnosis including external and genital characters of both sexes. Collection and habitat data are presented for each species, including collecting period, and collecting methods. A list of all eastern Canadian species with their currently known distribution in North America is presented at the end of the book. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Prominent forebearers of modern Aleocharine systematics in North America
    Historical review of research on Aleocharinae in Canada, with a focus on British Columbia
    Material and methods
    British Columbia : hotspot of Canadian biodiversity
    Faunal analysis and discussion
    List of recorded species of British Columbian Aleocharinae and their composition
    Key to tribes of Aleocharine and their composition
    Key to tribes of Aleocharine occurring in British Columbia
    Tribe Gymnusini Heer, 1839
    Tribe Aleocharini Fleming, 1821
    Tribe Oxypodini C.G. Thomson, 1859
    Tribe Tachyusini C.G. Thomson, 1859
    Tribe Hypocyphtini Laporte, 1835
    Tribe Myllaenini Ganglbauer, 1895
    Tribe Diglottini Jakobson, 1909
    Tribe Liparocephalini Fenyes, 1918
    Tribe Autaliini C.G. Thomson, 1859
    Tribe Homalotini Heer, 1839
    Tribe Placusini Mulsant and Rey, 1871
    Tribe Athetini Casey, 1910
    Tribe Falagriini Mulsant and Rey, 1873
    Tribe Lomechusini Fleming, 1821.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jan Klimaszewski [and 9 others].
    Summary: A first comprehensive synopsis of all aleocharine rove beetle species (Coleoptera, Staphylinidae) recorded from eastern Canada, from Ontario to the Maritime Provinces inclusively, is presented. Four hundred and seven species in 96 genera, and 16 tribes are presented and discussed. Tribes and subtribes are arranged in presumably phylogenetic order as it is currently recognized. Genera and subgenera are listed alphabetically. Species are listed alphabetically or in species groups to better reflect their relationships. Species distribution is listed by abbreviated provinces and territories in Canada and abbreviated states in the United States. Geographic status is given to every species as Native, Holarctic or adventive with some species listed with undetermined status - adventive or Holarctic. Every treated species is presented with a diagnosis, including short description of body and description of the median lobe of aedeagus, spermatheca, and tergite and sternite VIII of both sexes. For each species a plate with colour habitus image and black and white images of genital structures is provided to aid with positive identification. Collection and habitat data (often new) are presented for each species, including data on macrohabitat, microhabitat, collecting period, and collecting methods.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Historical review of research on eastern Canadian taxa
    3. Material and methods
    4. Faunal analysis and discussion
    5. List of recorded species of eastern Canadian Aleocharinae and their composition
    6. Key to tribes of Aleocharinae occurring in eastern Canada
    7. Tribe Gymnusini Heer, 1839
    8. Tribe Aleocharini Fleming, 1821
    9. Tribe Hoplandriini Casey, 1910
    10. Tribe Oxypodini C.G. Thomson, 1859
    11. Tribe Tachyusini C.G. Thomson, 1859
    12. Tribe Boreocyphini Klimaszewski and Langor, 2011
    13. Tribe Hypocyphtini Laporte, 1835
    14. Tribe Myllaenini Ganglbauer, 1895
    15. Tribe Diglottini Jakobson, 1909
    16. Tribe Autaliini C.G. Thomson, 1859
    17. Tribe Homalotini Heer, 1839
    18. Tribe Placusini Mulsant and Rey, 1871
    19. Tribe Athetini Casey, 1910
    20 Tribe Falagriini Mulsant and Rey, 1873
    21. Tribe Lomechusini Fleming, 1821
    22. Tribe Taxicerini Lobse, 1989
    Appendix
    Taxonomic index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Philip Rubin, Louis S. Constine, Lawrence B. Marks, editors.
    Summary: The literature on the late effects of cancer treatment is widely scattered in different journals since all major organ systems are affected and management is based on a variety of medical and surgical treatments. The aim of ALERT Adverse Late Effects of Cancer Treatment is to offer a coherent multidisciplinary approach to the care of cancer survivors. The central paradigm is that cytotoxic multimodal therapy results in a perpetual cascade of events that affects each major organ system differently and is expressed continually over time. Essentially, radiation and chemotherapy are intense biologic modifiers that allow for cancer cure and cancer survivorship but accelerate senescence of normal tissues and increase the incidence of age-related diseases and second malignant tumors. Volume 1 of this two-volume work focuses on the general concepts and principles relevant to late effects and on the dynamic interplay of molecular, cytologic and histopathologic events that lead to altered physiologic and metabolic functions and their clinical manifestations. Chapters are also included on legal issues, economic aspects, nursing, psychological issues and quality of life.

    Contents:
    Prologue : Surviving cancer : SEER statistics
    Biobontinuum of the pathophysiology paradigm
    Biophysiopathology of the microvascular and microcirculation
    Molecular mechanisms of radiation induced therapy
    Biodetection and biointervention : cytokine pathways as a rationale for anti-cytokine interventions post-radiation
    Quantitative/objective analyses of RT-induced late normal tissue injury using functional imaging
    Biograding of normal tissue TNM toxicity taxonomy : scoring the adverse effects of of cancer treatment
    Understanding and predicting radiation-associated normal tissue injury : a global and history perspective
    Biotoxity of chemotherapy
    BioSurveillance and longitudinal lifelong guidelines
    BioPediatric complexities of growth and development
    BioGenetic and host implications
    Bioengineering of irradiated normal tissues by bone marrow stem cells
    Radiotherapy-induced carcinogenesis and Leukemogenesis : mechanisms and quantitative moeling
    The bioepidemiology of MultiplePrimary cancers
    Radiation-related second primary cancers : clinical perspectives
    The psychosocial and functional impact of radiation therapy
    Nursing
    Economic consequences of late effects
    Radiological and nuclear terrorism : relevance to the radiation oncology and biology communities.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Philip Rubin, Louis S. Constine, Lawrence B. Marks, editors.
    Summary: The literature on the late effects of cancer treatment is widely scattered in different journals since all major organ systems are affected and management is based on a variety of medical and surgical treatments. The aim of ALERT Adverse Late Effects of Cancer Treatment is to offer a coherent multidisciplinary approach to the care of cancer survivors. The central paradigm is that cytotoxic multimodal therapy results in a perpetual cascade of events that affects each major organ system differently and is expressed continually over time. Essentially, radiation and chemotherapy are intense biologic modifiers that allow for cancer cure and cancer survivorship but accelerate senescence of normal tissues and increase the incidence of age-related diseases and second malignant tumors. Volume 2 of this two-volume work comprehensively documents potential late effects in all the normal tissue anatomic sites in the human body. The detection, diagnosis, management and prevention of effects are all considered in detail, and prognostic outcomes are discussed. Radiation risk factors and interactions with chemotherapy effects are clearly presented. The text is accompanied by numerous supportive illustrations and tables.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jane Rothrock ; associate editor, Donna R. McEwen.
    Contents:
    Unit I: Foundations for practice
    Concepts basic to perioperative nursing
    Patient safety and risk management
    Workplace issues and staff safety
    Infection prevention and control
    Anesthesia
    Positioning the patient for surgery
    Sutures, sharps, and instruments
    Surgical modalities
    Wound healing, dressings, and drains
    Postoperative patient care and pain management
    Unit II: Surgical interventions
    Gastrointestinal surgery
    Surgery of the biliary tract, pancreas, liver, and spleen
    Hernia repair
    Gynecologic and obstetric surgery
    Genitourinary surgery
    Thyroid and parathyroid surgery
    Breast surgery
    Ophthalmic surgery
    Otorhinolaryngologic surgery
    Orthopedic surgery
    Neurosurgery
    Reconstructive and aesthetic plastic surgery
    Thoracic surgery
    Vascular surgery
    Cardiac surgery
    Unit III: Special considerations
    Pediatric surgery
    Geriatric surgery
    Trauma surgery
    Interventional and image-guided procedures
    Integrative health practices: complementary and alternative therapies
    Appendix A: Laboratory values.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Alexander Leff, Randi Starrfelt.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive review of the main acquired disorders of reading: hemianopic, pure and central alexia. The authors review the diagnostic criteria for each of the different types of disorder, and the efficacy of the therapeutic studies that have attempted to remediate them. The different theoretical models of adult reading, which largely rest on how the reading system responds to injury, are also discussed and evaluated. Focal brain injury caused by stroke and brain tumors are discussed in depth as are the effects of dementia on reading. This book starts with a chapter on normal reading, followed by chapters on hemianopic alexia, pure alexia and central alexia, each structured in the same way, with: a description of the condition; a historical review of cases to date; psychophysics; consideration of the causative lesions; evidence from functional imaging studies on patients and, most importantly, a review of the evidence base for treating each condition. Finally, there is a chapter on how patient data has informed how we think about reading.

    Contents:
    How do we read?
    Hemianopic alexia
    Pure alexia
    Central alexia
    Alexia theory and therapies: a heuristic.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sachin Kumar Mandotra, Atul Kumar Upadhyay, Amrik Singh Ahluwalia, editors.
    Summary: This book presents diverse applications of microalgal renewable resources to meet modern demands for energy and value-added products. It also comprehensively describes the role of algae in sustainable and cost-effective wastewater treatment strategies, and highlights the latest research on, advances in and biotechnological relevance of algae in the areas of bioenergy, bioremediation, pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals and green economy. The book addresses gaps in the fields of bioenergy, waste management, health and economy by providing broad information on bioenergy production, management strategies, drug development, nutraceuticals products and biobased economy using algae at the commercial level. The book introduces researchers to key and emerging innovations in the field of algal biology research and will assist policymakers, environmentalists, scientists, students and global thinkers in defining sustainable developmental goals for the future. It was written for researchers and students in the environmental sciences, life sciences and chemistry, experts in the energy sector and policymakers alike.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Valorisation of wastewater via nutrient recovery using algae-based processes
    Chapter 2.Constructed wetland and microalgae: A revolutionary approach of boremediation and sustainable energy production
    Chapter 3. Mitigation of Heavy Metals Utilizing Algae and its Subsequent Utilization for Sustainable fuels
    Chapter 4. Adaptive and tolerance mechanism of microalgae in removal of cadmium from wastewater
    Chapter 5. Algae as miniature waste water scavengers
    Chapter 6. Parametric modeling and optimization of phycoremediation of Cr(VI) using artificial neural network and simulated annealing
    Chapter 7. An insight on potential application of microalgae in pharmaceutical and nutraceutical production
    Chapter 8. The budding potential of algae in cosmetics
    Chapter 9. Food supplements formulated with Spirulina
    Chapter 10. Fucoxanthin Production from Diatoms: Current Advances and Challenges
    Chapter 11. Liquid Biofuels from Algae
    Chapter 12. UV-B coupled lipid induction: A strategies towards economical biofuel production through algae
    Chapter 13. Microalgae Mediated Nanomaterials Synthesis
    Chapter 14. Algae-mediated biological synthesis of metallic nanoparticles and their applications
    Chapter 15. Cyanobacterial blooms and Cyanotoxins: Occurrence and Detection
    Chapter 16. Potential of Golden Brown Algae in Forensic Analysis: A Review. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    R. Douglas Collins, Former Associate Professor of Medicine, Medical University of South Carolina, Former Associate Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of Florida School of Medicine, Chatsworth, California.
    Contents:
    Getting the most out of your history and physical examination
    Algorithms of symptoms and signs
    Diseases that are symptoms of other diseases.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Safiya Umoja Noble.
    Summary: A revealing look at how negative biases against women of color are embedded in search engine results and algorithms Run a Google search for "black girls"-what will you find? "Big Booty" and other sexually explicit terms are likely to come up as top search terms. But, if you type in "white girls," the results are radically different. The suggested porn sites and un-moderated discussions about "why black women are so sassy" or "why black women are so angry" presents a disturbing portrait of black womanhood in modern society. In Algorithms of Oppression, Safiya Umoja Noble challenges the idea that search engines like Google offer an equal playing field for all forms of ideas, identities, and activities. Data discrimination is a real social problem; Noble argues that the combination of private interests in promoting certain sites, along with the monopoly status of a relatively small number of Internet search engines, leads to a biased set of search algorithms that privilege whiteness and discriminate against people of color, specifically women of color. Through an analysis of textual and media searches as well as extensive research on paid online advertising, Noble exposes a culture of racism and sexism in the way discoverability is created online. As search engines and their related companies grow in importance-operating as a source for email, a major vehicle for primary and secondary school learning, and beyond-understanding and reversing these disquieting trends and discriminatory practices is of utmost importance.

    Contents:
    Acknowledgments
    Introduction: the power of algorithms
    A society, searching
    Searching for Black girls
    Searching for people and communities
    Searching for protections from search engines
    The future of knowledge in the public
    The future of information culture
    Conclusion: algorithms of oppression
    Epilogue
    Notes
    Bibliography
    Index
    About the author.
  • Digital
    Jan Dirk Blom.
    Summary: The book provides the first state-of-the-art overview of Alice in Wonderland syndrome, an enigmatic neurological condition characterized by a range of perceptual distortions (for example, seeing things as being larger or smaller than they actually are; seeing human faces change into animal faces; feeling one's body growing larger or smaller; experiencing time as slowing down or speeding up; etc.). It describes the clinical presentation of the syndrome, including its huge variety of symptoms and the variability of its natural course.The book starts out with several vivid vignettes, and then explains how and why the concept was introduced. In addition, it explains what is currently known about the underlying medical conditions and brain mechanisms, proposes a diagnostic algorithm, and makes recommendations for treatment. Throughout the book, a recurring question is whether or not Charles Dodgson (aka Lewis Carroll) suffered from the symptoms he described so aptly in Alice's Adventures in Wonderland. Accordingly, it should appeal to anyone interested in the brain and its disorders, as well as readers interested in the life of Lewis Carroll.

    Contents:
    Inside the consulting room
    The making of a syndrome
    Charles Dodgson
    Neurobiology
    Diagnosis and treatment
    Did Charles Dodgson suffer from Alice in Wonderland syndrome?
    Appendix A: Table 1 Charles Dodgson's medical history
    Table 2 Visual distortions (metamorphopsias)
    Table 3 Somesthetic and other non-visual distortions
    Table 4 Conditions causing Alice in Wonderland syndrome
    Appendix B: Transcript of On Catching Cold, by Charles Dodgson (Oxford: University Press, 1881)
    Appendix C: Proposed diagnostic criteria for Alice in Wonderland syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Susana Palma Moya, Javier Lozano Zafra.
    Summary: "Provides theoretical and practical clinical information on different aligner techniques including Invisalign Offers clear and simple methods to treat patients using different aligner techniques. Explains how to use clear aligners to treat a given malocclusion. Written by renowned experts in Align and Invisalign technology"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Basic principles with aligners
    Why Invisalign?
    Patient communication skills
    Keys for practice growth
    Patient selection
    Movement predictability with aligners
    Types of treatments with Invisalign
    Pillars of Invisalign technique
    Attachments and SmartForce features
    Clinical preferences
    Attachments bonding & IPR
    Digital workflow
    ClinCheck software
    Treatment monitoring and appointments protocol
    Troubleshooting and retention
    Arch length discrepancies
    Growing patients
    Transverse discrepancies
    Sagittal discrepancies
    Vertical discrepancies
    Asymmetries
    Extraction cases
    Multidisciplinary cases : implants
    Pre-restorative orthodontics.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital/Print
    von Dr. Julius Schmidt ...
    Digital Access Google Books 1904-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    C421 .S351 1911
    1
  • Digital
    Jozef Rovenský, Tibor Urbánek, Boldišová Olʹga, James A. Gallagher, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively describes alkaptonuria and ochronosis. Beginning with the history, genetics, pathophysiology and diagnostics of the disease, the authors subsequently present a detailed characterization of its clinical manifestation in the spine, peripheral joints, eyes, ears, visceral organs and respiratory tract, its pathological anatomy and histology, as well as differential diagnosis. This is complemented by the latest data on therapy and experimental models of alkaptonuria, and supported by several case reports. Numerous pictures and radiological images document the clinical symptoms, giving the reader a solid understanding of the disease. On the basis of the editor?s and authors? own extensive observations, the book offers an analysis of protein metabolism and aromatic amino acids in the context of alkaptonuria. Written by international experts in the field, the book offers a valuable reference guide for healthcare professionals working in rheumatology, dermatology, pulmonology, otolaryngology and histopathology.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Alkaptonuria and Ochronosis
    History
    Metabolism of Aromatic Amino Acids
    Tyrosine Metabolism Disorders
    Detection of Homogentisic Acid in Plasma and Urine
    Alkaptonuria Genetics
    Experimental Alkaptonuria in Animals
    Experimental Models of Alkaptonuria and Ochronosis
    Ochronotic Arthropathy
    Clinical Manifestation of Ochronotic Arthropathy in the Spine
    Analysis of X-Ray Symptomatology of Ochronotic Arthropathy in the Spine
    Clinical Manifestation of Ochronotic Arthropathy in the Peripheral Joints
    Clinical and Ultrasound Evaluation of Enthesopathy in Alkaptonuria in the Romani Community
    Analysis of X-Ray Symptomatology of Ochronotic Arthropathy in the Area of the Peripheral Joints
    Manifestations of Alkaptonuric Ochronosis in the Eye
    Symptoms of Alkaptonuria and Ochronosis in the Ear
    Manifestations of Alkaptonuria and Ochronosis in the Visceral Organs
    Manifestations of Alkaptonuria and Ochronosis in the Respiratory Tract
    Pathological Anatomy and Histology of Ochronosis
    Cellular and Molecular Patholgenesis of Ochronosis
    Picture of Synovial Effusion in Ochronosis
    Coincidence of Alkaptonuric Ochronosis with Other Diseases
    Differential Diagnosis of the Disease
    Sine Syndromes in Alkaptonuria
    History of Nitisinone (NTBC)
    Case Reports
    References.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Jason Reynolds, Brendan Kiely.
    Summary: Sixteen-year-old Rashad is mistakenly accused of stealing. Classmate Quinn witnesses his brutal beating at the hands of a police officer who's the older brother of his best friend.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PZ7.R33593 Al 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Cemal Cingi, Nuray Bayar Muluk, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to provide all the information required for a sound understanding of diseases of the nose and paranasal sinuses and the surgical techniques used in their management. After an opening section on basic science, clinical and radiological assessment is explained and individual chapters focus on conditions ranging from infectious diseases, allergic rhinitis, and nasal polyposis to trauma, malignancies, and skin diseases. A wide variety of surgical techniques are then described with the aid of high-quality illustrations, covering nasal airway procedures and surgical approaches to the paranasal sinuses, including diverse endoscopic and image-guided procedures, nasal reconstruction, and endonasal and external rhinoplasty. The book is a collaborative project between the new generation of Turkish specialists and well-known experts from across the world. It will be of value for ENT doctors in all countries, as well as for students and trainees and those working in ENT-related fields such as maxillo-facial surgery, pediatrics, allergology, neurology, infectious diseases, and neurosurgery.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    PART I: BASIC SCIENCE OF NOSE & PARANASAL SINUSES Chapter 2: History of Rhinology
    Chapter 3: Histology and Embryology of the Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 4: Surgical Anatomy of the External and Internal Nose
    Chapter 5: Surgical Anatomy of the Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 6: Physiology of the Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 7: Mucociliary Clearance and Its Importance
    Chapter 8: Olfactory Function
    Chapter 9: Application of Computational Fluid Dynamics Methods to Understand Nasal Cavity Flows
    Chapter 10: The Evaluation of the Nose and Nasal Cavity and Airway
    Chapter 11: Clinical Assessment of Nasal Airway Obstruction
    PART II: ASSESSMENT OF NOSE AND PARANASAL SINUSES Chapter 12: Clinical Assessment of Mucociliary Disorders
    Chapter 13: Clinical Assessment of Olfactory Disorders
    Chapter 14: Acoustic Rhinometry
    Chapter 15: Principles of Allergy Skin Testing
    Chapter 16: Nasal Provocation Tests
    Chapter 17: Radiological Assessment of Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 18: Imaging of Nasal Cavity and Paranasal Sinus Tumors
    PART III DISEASES OF THE NOSE AND PARANASAL SINUSES Chapter 19: Congenital Malformations of the Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 20: Superantigens and Biofilms in Sinus Diseases
    Chapter 21: Infantile Rhinitis
    Chapter 22: Microbiology of Rhinosinusitis and Antimicrobial Resistance
    Chapter 23: Acute Viral Rhinitis
    Chapter 24: Acute Bacterial Rhinosinusitis: Pediatric and Adult
    Chapter 25: Chronic Rhinosinusitis: Pediatric and Adult
    Chapter 26: Complications of Rhinosinusitis
    Chapter 27: Acute Invasive Fungal Rhinosinusitis
    Chapter 28: Allergic Fungal Rhinosinusitis
    Chapter 29: Sinusitis and Chronic Progressive Exercise-induced Cough and Dyspnea
    Chapter 30: Role of Anosmia on Personal Communication
    Chapter 31: Quality of Life in Rhinosinusitis
    PART IV: ALLERGIC AND NON-ALLERGIC RHINITIS Chapter 32: Pathophysiology of Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 33: Epidemiology of Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 34: Hypersensitivity to Aspirin and Other Non-Steroidal Anti-Inflammatory Drugs
    Chapter 35: Medical Treatment of Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 36: Immunotherapy for Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 37: Herbal Remedy Alternatives for Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 38: Allergic Rhinitis in Pediatric Patients
    Chapter 39: Role of Allergic Rhinitis on Personal Communication
    Chapter 40: Local Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 41: Nonallergic Rhinitis
    PART V: NASAL POLYPOSIS Chapter 42: Epidemiology of Nasal Polyposis
    Chapter 43: Pathophysiology of Chronic Rhinosinusitis with Nasal Polyps
    Chapter 44: Medical Treatment of Nasal Polyposis
    Chapter 45: Surgical Treatment of Nasal Polyposis
    Chapter 46: Evidence-based Treatment of Nasal Polyposis
    PART VI: SURGERY OF NASAL CAVITY AND AIRWAY Chapter 47: Paranasal Sinus Mucoceles
    Chapter 48: Management of Epistaxis
    Chapter 49: Rheumatological Diseases of the Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 50: Surgical Management of the Nasal Septum
    Chapter 51: Nasal Valve Surgery
    Chapter 52: Surgical Management of Septal Perforation
    Chapter 53: Surgical Management of the Turbinates
    Chapter 54: Odontogenic Casuese of Sinus Infections and Treatment
    Chapter 55: Management of Trauma to the Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 56: Pediatric Septoplasty
    Chapter 57: Surgical Management of Choanal Atresia
    Chapter 58: Tumors and Malignancies of Nasal Cavity
    Chapter 59: Robot Assisted Surgery Around the Nose
    PART VII: SURGICAL MANAGEMENT OF PARANASAL SINUSES Chapter 60: Minimally Invasive Endoscopic Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 61: Functional Endoscopic Sphenoethmoidectomy
    Chapter 62: Frontal Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 63: Complications of Endoscopic Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 64: Revision Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 65: Dacryocystorhinostomy
    Chapter 66: Laser Dacryocystorhinostomy
    Chapter 67: Functional Endoscopic Dilatation of the Paranasal Sinuses
    Chapter 68: Endoscopic Sinus Surgery in Pediatric Patients
    Chapter 69: External Approaches for Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 70: Combined Open and Endoscopic Approaches to the Paranasal Sinus
    Chapter 71: Endoscopic Management of Malignant Sinonasal Tumors
    Chapter 72: Endoscopic Optic Nerve Decompression
    Chapter 73: Endoscopic Management of Cerebrospinal Fluid Leaks and Encephaloceles
    Chapter 74: Endoscopic Transsphenoidal Hypophysectomy
    Chapter 75: Endoscopic Skull Base Surgery - Anatomical Basis of Skull Base Approaches
    Chapter 76: Conventional and Powered Instrumentation for Endoscopic Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 77: Conventional and Powered Instrumentation for Endoscopic Skull Base Surgery
    Chapter 78: Image-guided Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 79: 3D Modeling Before Sinus Surgery
    Chapter 80: Robotic Surgery of Skull Base
    PART VIII: NASAL RECONSTRUCTION Chapter 81: Management of Small Nasal Defects
    Chapter 82: Grafting in Nasal Reconstruction
    Chapter 83: Local Nasal Flaps
    Chapter 84: Regional Nasal Flaps: Forehead Flaps
    Chapter 85: Inner Lining Reconstruction of the Nose. - Chapter 86: Management of Full-thickness Nasal Defects
    Chapter 87: Regenerative Medicine in Rhinology
    Chapter 88: Orthodontic Abnormalities of Upper Jaw as a Cause of Maxillary Sinus Problems
    PART IX: RHINOPLASTY Chapter 89: Preoperative Facial Analysis
    Chapter 90: Anesthesia for Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 91: Endonasal and External Approaches in Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 92: Basic Techniques for Endonasal Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 93: Basic Techniques for External Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 94: Osteotomies
    Chapter 95: Management of the Midvault
    Chapter 96: Management of the Deviated Septum
    Chapter 97: Nasal Tip Surgery
    Chapter 98: Alar Base Surgery
    Chapter 99: Reconstruction of Saddle Nose Deformity
    Chapter 100: Complications of Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 101: Revision Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 102: Rib Grafting in Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 103: Allografts in Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 104: Application of Fillers in Nonsurgical Rhinoplasty
    Chapter 105: Communication Disorders due to Facial Deformities.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    George M. Johnson.
    Summary: In a series of personal essays, prominent journalist and LGBTQIA+ activist George M. Johnson explores his childhood, adolescence, and college years in New Jersey and Virginia. From the memories of getting his teeth kicked out by bullies at age five, to flea marketing with his loving grandmother, to his first sexual relationships, this young-adult memoir weaves together the trials and triumphs faced by Black queer boys.

    Contents:
    Author's note ; Introduction: Black. Queer. Here.
    Act 1. A different kid: Chapter 1. Smile ; Chapter 2. Identity ; Chapter 3. "Honeychild" ; Chapter 4. Fags play football, too ; Chapter 5. "Honest Abe" lied to me ; Chapter 6. You can't swim in cowboy boots.
    Act 2. Family: Dear little brother ; Chapter 7. Nanny : the caregiver, the hustler, my best friend ; Chapter 8. Daddy's second chance ; Chapter 9. Losing hope ; Chapter 10. Dear Mommy ; A lesson before dying.
    Act 3. Teenagers: Chapter 11. Boys will be boys ; Chapter 12. The prom kings we never were ; Chapter 13. Setting myself free or setting myself up?
    Act 4. Friends: Chapter 14. Caught in a haze ; Chapter 15. Losing my virginity twice ; Chapter 16. Don't know why I didn't call.
    Afterword: All boys aren't blue ; Acknowledgments.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    HQ76.27.A37 J644 2020
    1
  • Print
    Elizabeth Comen, MD.
    Summary: "For as long as medicine has been a practice, women's bodies have been treated like objects to be examined and ignored, idealized and sexualized, shamed, subjugated, mutilated, and dismissed. The notion that female bodies are flawed inversions of the male ideal lingers on, as do the pervasive societal stigmas and ignorance that shape women's health and relationships with their own bodies. The author draws back the curtain on the collective medical history of women to reintroduce us to our whole bodies: how they work, the actual doctors and patients whose perspectives and experiences laid the foundation for today's medical thought, and the many oversights that remain unaddressed. She examines the eleven organ systems to share unique and untold stories, drawing upon medical texts and journals, interviews with expert physicians, and her own observations from treating thousands of women." -- Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Skin (Integumentary: it's what's inside that counts)
    Bones (Skeletal: skulls and whalebones)
    Muscle (Muscular: who's the weakest of them all?)
    Blood (Circulatory: matters of the heart)
    Breath (Respiratory: perhaps women breathe different air)
    Guts (Digestive: the price of going (and not going) with your gut)
    Bladder (Urinary: a thousand years of holding it in)
    Defense (Immune: self-sabotage)
    Nerves (Nervous: the "bitches be crazy" school of medicine)
    Hormones (Endocrine: the hormone hangover)
    Sex (Reproductive: the mother of all moral panics)
    Conclusion
    Acknowledgments
    Index.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    RA564.85 .C625 2024
    1
  • Print
    Malavika Kannan.
    Summary: Sixteen-year-old queer Indian American, Maya, who falls for her white, wealthy, and complicated female classmate, Juneau, is asked to join a secret society of artists, vandals, and mischief-makers who fight for justice at their school. Maya Krishnan is fiercely protective of her friends, immigrant community, and single mother, but she knows better than to rock the boat in her conservative Florida suburb. Her classmate Juneau Zale, on the other hand, is a wealthy white heartbreaker who won't think twice before capsizing that boat. Juneau invites Maya to join the Pugilists-- a secret society of artists, vandals, and mischief-makers who fight for justice at their school. Their friendship inspires Maya to confront the challenges in her own life. As their relationship grows romantic, Maya must learn to speak her truth in this mixed-up world-- even if it results in heartbreak. -- adapted from jacket
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PZ7.1.K278 Al 2023
    1
  • Print
    uitgegeven, geïllustreerd en van aanteekeningen voorzien door een Commissie van Nederlandsche geleerden.
    Contents:
    v 1. 1673-1676
    v. 2. 1676-1679
    v. 3. 1679-1682
    v. 4. 1683-1684
    v. 5. 1685-1686
    v. 6. 1686-1687
    v. 7. 1687-1688
    v. 8. 1688-1692
    v. 9. 1692-1694
    v. 10. 1694-1695
    v. 11. 1695-1696
    v. 12. 1696-1699
    v. 13. 1700-1701
    v. 14. 1701-1704
    v. 15. 1704-1707
    v. 16. 1707-1712.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    QH9 .L487
    16
  • Digital
    Waseem Mushtaq, Mohammad Badruzzaman Siddiqui, Khalid Rehman Hakeem.
    Summary: Allelopathic studies may be defined in various aspects; weed against weed/crop and vice versa. This book focuses on the ways to utilize the allelopathic potential of weeds or crops for controlling weeds in the agroecosystems. Vigorous use of herbicides is poisoning our environment at an alarming rate; allelopathy can be employed as a useful alternative to control weeds naturally under field conditions. The book contains chapters on the history of allelopathy; allelopathic potential of several important crops (rice, wheat, sorghum, maize, mustard, sunflower) and weeds (members of Solanaceae, Convolvulaceae, Asteraceae, Verbenaceae). Moreover, it highlights how the allelopathic potential of these weeds and crops can be employed effectively to suppress weeds under field conditions. The book also discusses topics on the role of allelochemicals in agroecosystems; impact on local flora; biotic stress induced by allelochemicals; mechanism of action of allelochemicals and future prospective of allelopathy. Prepared with basic concepts and importance of allelopathy, this book is intended for the agricultural community, botanists, students and researchers.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    History of allelopathy
    Allelopathy potential of important crops
    Allelopathy potential of weeds belonging to the family
    Role of allelochemicals in agroecosystems
    Allelopathic control of native weeds
    Mechanism of action of allelochemicals
    Future prospective.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Mieczyslaw Pokorski.
    Summary: Respiratory allergy is constantly encountered and is sharply on the rise, particularly in the two most vulnerable age-groups: young children and seniors. Allergy results in airway hyperactivity and increased airway resistance, with all inflammatory sequelae being ensued. The chapters show how respiratory allergy research is interconnected with other disciplines by discussing neurotransmitter, membrane receptor, and ionic channel mechanisms of allergy and by giving diagnostic and pharmacological cues on desensitization and therapy.

    Contents:
    The Influence of L-NAME on iNOS Expression and Markers of Oxidative Stress in Allergen-Induced Airway Hyperreactivity
    Influence of Roflumilast on Airway Reactivity and Apoptosis in Ovalbumin-Sensitized Guinea Pigs
    Antitussive Activity of Withania Somnifera and Opioid Receptors
    Effects of Provinol and Its Combinations with Clinically Used Antiasthmatics on Airway Defense Mechanisms in Experimental Allergic Asthma
    Potassium Ion Channels and Allergic Asthma
    Impulse Oscillometry in the Diagnosis of Airway Resistance in Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Efficacy of Noninvasive Volume Targeted Ventilation in Patients with Chronic Respiratory Failure due to Kyphoscoliosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Allergic Disease and Therapy to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    David R. Stukus, editor.
    Summary: This unique book is intended to assist readers in understanding various allergic diseases as they pertain to the adolescent, with a strong focus on encouraging their transition into self-management. Allergies and Adolescents thoroughly addresses both the cognitive and social development of adolescents and provides effective strategies for involving them in their own self-management. Different types of nonadherence are covered in detail, and specific conditions such as allergic rhinitis, asthma, food allergy, and eczema each have a chapter devoted to a comprehensive discussion of basic concepts surrounding diagnosis and management. These chapters are then followed by a separate chapter providing details as to how that condition can specifically impact adolescents. Chapters containing practical tips that can be immediately implemented by adolescents and their families as well as clinicians conclude the book. Written by experts in their respective fields, Allergies and Adolescents is a comprehensive resource for multiple audiences, including the allergist, pediatrician, and any other healthcare provider working with adolescents, guiding them towards self-management, and preparing them for independent living.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Wiley v. 1-, 1982-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 1-72, 74-80, 1982-2005.
    No. 1 BOUND WITH: Allergy ; v. 37.; Nos. 76-80 BOUND WITH: Allergy ; v. 60 JL-DE.
    11
  • Digital
    Massoud Mahmoudi, editor.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Immune System
    Chapter 2. The History and Physical Examination of the Allergic Patient
    Chapter 3. Prevalence of Allergic Diseases in Children, adults and Elderly
    Chapter 4. Allergic Diseases of the Eye
    Chapter 5. Prevalence of Pollens in the United States and Elsewhere
    Chapter 6. Allergic Rhinitis: Diagnosis and Treatment
    Chapter 7. The Effect of Rhinitis on Sleep, Quality of Life, Daytime Somnolence, and Fatigue
    Chapter 8. Sinusitis
    Chapter 9. Allergic Diseases of the Ear
    Chapter 10. Cough and Allergic Diseases
    Chapter 11. Urticaria and Angioedema
    Chapter 12. Atopic Dermatitis
    Chapter 13. Allergic Contact Dermatitis
    Chapter 14. Pediatric Asthma
    Chapter 15. Adult Asthma
    Chapter 16. Exercise-Induced Bronchoconstriction
    Chapter 17. Occupational Asthma
    Chapter 18. Asthma and Pregnancy
    Chapter 19. Asthma and Pseudo-asthma
    Chapter 20. Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis
    Chapter 21. All Allergic Bronchopulmonary Aspergillosis
    Chapter 22. Serum Sickness
    Chapter 23. Complement Systems and Allergy Diseases
    Chapter 24. Food Allergy
    Chapter 25. Insect Allergy
    Chapter 26. Latex Allergy
    Chapter 27. Drug Allergy
    Chapter 28. Smoke, Pollution, and Allergy
    Chapter 29. Sick Building Syndrome
    Chapter 30. Allergy in the Elderly
    Chapter 31. Diagnostic Testing in Allergic Diseases
    Chapter 32. Primary Immunodeficiencies
    Chapter 33. HIV Infection
    Chapter 34. Complementary and Alternative Medicine in treatment of Allergic and Asthmatic Disease
    Chapter 35. Nutrition, Diet and Allergic Diseases
    Chapter 36. Prevention and Control Measures in Management of Allergic Diseases
    Chapter 37. Antihistamines and Mast Cell Stabilizers
    Chapter 38. Bronchodilators
    Chapter 39. Glucocorticoids
    Chapter 40. Anti-Immunoglobulin E (IgE) Therapy
    Chapter 41. Allergy Immunotherapy
    Chapter 42. Anaphylaxis and Its Management. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Massou Mahmoudi, editor-in-chief.
    Summary: Allergy and Asthma: The Basics to Best Practices is intended to serve as a single comprehensive reference covering all needed knowledge of allergic diseases. Allergy is a unique and distinctive area of medicine wherein learning the fundamentals requires gathering information from various different disciplines. Allergic diseases affect various organ systems and the practice of a wide range of physicians from otolaryngologists, and pulmonologists, to gastroenterologists, dermatologists, and ophthalmologists. Clinicians and trainees alike will benefit from a resource that introduces the basic concepts, as well as providing comprehensive, consistently up-to-date instruction on intermediate and advanced conditions, research, and treatment strategies. The book is divided into nine sections and is written by some of the foremost experts in the field. Allergy and Asthma opens with an introduction which covers the epidemiology of allergic diseases, fundamentals of allergy and immunology, and a thorough grounding of different types of allergens. Early sections address allergic upper airway diseases, allergic skin diseases, and asthma in detail, using a structured, consistent format from chapter to chapter to provide continuity and ease of reference. Later sections thoroughly cover various food allergies, insect allergies, drug allergy, anaphylaxis, and utilize ample tables and illustrations to provide additional learning tools for the reader. This major reference not only provides basic knowledge on diagnosing and treating allergies, but moves beyond these basics to emphasize using a systematic approach to working up and treating a patient. A variety of techniques used in diagnosing asthma and allergy will be examined, of which include prick skin tests, in-vitro testing, patch testing and non-conventional allergy tests. Concluding this book are sections dedicated to management, therapeutic strategies of allergy and asthma, with a look to future research directions for this un ique field. Physicians and residents in allergy and immunology, pulmonology, otolaryngology, gastroenterology, dermatology, ophthalmology and other specialties will find the work of value in enhancing their practice and studies. Researchers in a range of areas especially immunology and food science will also find this text to be a compelling and reliable resource.

    Contents:
    SECTION-1: Introduction
    Background
    allergic diseases
    Introduction to the immune system
    Epidemiology of allergic diseases
    Evaluation of an allergic patient
    Environmental allergens
    SECTION-2: Common Allergic Diseases and Related Illnesses
    Allegic diseases of the eye
    Allergic Rhinitis
    Allergic disease of ear
    Sinsusitis and allergies
    Eosinophilic Esophagitis
    Urticaria & Angioedema
    Atopic Dermatitis
    Allergic contact Dermatitis
    Food Allergy
    Drug Allergy
    Latex Allergy
    Insect Sting Allergy
    Allergy in School Children
    Anaphylaxis
    SECTION 3- Asthma and respiratory allergy
    Asthma phenotype
    Asthma
    Allergic asthma
    Exercise induced asthma
    Aspirin-induced asthma
    Cough and cough-variant asthma
    Occuaptiponal asthma
    Asthma in elderl
    Astham in pregnancy
    Astham Masquerader
    Allergic Bronchopulmonary Asperigillus
    Hypersensitivity pneumonitis
    SECTION 3-Diagnoses
    Prick skin tests
    In-Vitro testing
    Patch Testing
    Non-conventional allergy tests
    SECTION 4-Management and Treatment of Allergic Disease
    Preventive and Control measures in Management of Allergic Diseases
    Antihistmaiens
    Bronchodilateros
    Corticosteroids
    Anti-IgE Therapy
    Anti-IL-5 Therapy
    Immunotherapy
    Sublingual Immunotherapy
    Complementary and Alternative Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Massoud Mahmoudi (editor-in-chief).
    Springer Nature Living Reference.
    Summary: Allergy is a unique area of medicine that is not taught as a single subject in medical or allied health schools. Therefore learning the fundamentals of this distinctive area of medicine requires gathering information from various disciplines. This is because the allergic diseases affect various organ systems and the practice of a wide range of physicians such as Ear, Nose, and Throat (ENT) specialists, pulmonologists, gastroenterologists, dermatologists, and ophthalmologists, among others; all encounter patients with such problems. As knowledge in this area of medicine grows, clinicians and trainees need a resource to learn the basics as well as intermediate and advanced concepts and strategies. This title is intended to serve as a single comprehensive reference covering all needed knowledge of allergic diseases. The authors of this work will be comprised of some of the foremost experts in the field, coming primarily from the United States. They will cover their topics using a structured, consistent format from chapter to chapter to provide continuity and uniformity to the work. This reference will not only provide basic knowledge on diagnosing and treating allergies, but will go beyond the basics and also emphasize using a systematic approach to working up and treating a patient. Ample numbers of tables and illustrations for better visualization of the complicated areas will be provided in each chapter. Discussion about trends, current research, and future research directions for each disorder will be incorporated as warranted. Summary sections will be used. Following initial publication, new information to the existing chapters, or entirely new chapters, will be added as necessary via continuous updating. The audience for this reference work includes physicians and residents in allergy and immunology, pulmonology, ENT, gastroenterology, dermatology, ophthalmology and other specialties; physician assistants, nursing professionals, allergy fellows (in-training), primary care providers, and allied health personnel are also part of the audience. Medical students will also find the work of value, as will researchers in a range of areas especially immunology and food science.
    Digital Access Springer Live 2020-
    Continuously updated edition
  • Digital
    Takemi Otsuki, Claudia Petrarca, Mario Di Gioacchino, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Takemi Otsuki, Mario Di Gioacchino, Claudia Petrarca, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a collection of the latest clinical and research findings in the field of allergy and immunotoxicology, covering the allergic responses to various nanoparticles and nanomaterials, posttreatment immune reconstruction, and monitoring the workplace environment. Following on from its acclaimed predecessor, the book provides readers with novel insights into immune effects, autoimmune diseases, and theimmunotoxicity of various substances, such as silica and asbestos. Allergy and Immunotoxicology in Occupational Health - The Next Step invites readers in the occupational health sector to reflect on critical yet unresolved questions, and provides a foundation for future research on the health impairments resulting from environmental and occupational exposure to these substances.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Spirometry or Body Plethysmography for the Assessment of Bronchial Hyperresponsiveness, R. Merget, F. Nensa, E. Heinze, D. Taeger, T. Bruening
    Chapter 2. Clinical Effects, Exhaled Breath Condensate pH and Exhaled Nitric Oxide in Humans after Ethyl Acrylate Exposure, F. Hoffmeyer, J. B?nger, C. Mons?, H. Berresheim, B. Jettkant, A. Beine, T. Br?ning, K. Sucker
    Chapter 3. Effectiveness of PCR and Immunofluorescence Techniques for Detecting Human Cytomegalovirus in Blood and Bronchoalveolar Lavage Fluid, A. Ro?y, K. Duk, B. Szumna, P. Jagu?, D. Gawryluk, J. Chorostowska-Wynimko
    Chapter 4. The Role of Ion Channels to Regulate Airway Ciliary Beat Frequency During Allergic Inflammation, M. Joskova, M. Sutovska, P. Durdik, D. Koniar, L. Hargas, P. Banovcin, M. Hrianka, V. Khazaei, L. Pappova, S. Franova
    Chapter 5. Content of Asthmagen Natural Rubber Latex Allergens in Commercial Disposable Gloves, C. Bittner, M. Velasco Garrido, L.H. Krach, V. Harth
    Chapter 6. Thermal Sensitivity and Dimethyl Sulfoxide (DMSO), K. Takeda, M. Pokorski, Y. Okada
    Chapter 7. IgE Reactivity, Work Related Allergic Symptoms, Asthma Severity, and Quality of Life in Bakers with Occupational Asthma, C. Bittner, M. Velasco Garrido, V. Harth, A.M. Preisser
    Chapter 8. Effects of Selective Inhibition of PDE4 by YM976 on Airway Reactivity and Cough in Ovalbumin-Sensitized Guinea Pigs, J. Mokry, A. Fulmekova, I. Medvedova, M. Kertys, P. Mikolka, P. Kosutov?, D. Mokr?
    Chapter 9. Airway Defense Control Mediated via Voltage-Gated Sodium Channels, M. Kocmalova, M. Joskova, S. Franova, P. Banovcin, M. Sutovska
    Chapter 10
    Virological Characteristics of the 2014/2015 Influenza Season Based on Molecular Analysis of Biological Material Derived from I-MOVE, E. Hallmann-Szeli?ska, K. Bednarska, M. Korczy?ska, I. Paradowska-Stankiewicz, L.B. Brydak.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Anna Fishbein, Stephen H. Sheldon, editors.
    Summary: Sleep-related abnormalities occurring as a result of allergic disorders can impact an affected individualâ#x80;#x99;s health and overall well-being in a myriad of ways. This comprehensive book thoroughly covers the management of allergic and sleep disorders, providing a detailed discussion on how these co-occurring, often overlapping conditions can be treated in a personalized and patient-oriented manner. Allergy and Sleep: Basic Principles and Clinical Practice takes care to include a wide range of multidisciplinary perspectives required to effectively assess and manage allergy and sleep disorders, from allergists, sleep medicine specialists, otolaryngologists, and dermatologists, to primary care physicians, pharmacists, psychologists, and other researchers. Allergy and Sleep begins with a thorough grounding on the science of sleep, allergy, immunology, circadian rhythms and circadian immunology. Part II addresses assessment and treatment of common allergic diseases with comorbid sleep components, in a practical, easy-to-use case-based format. Later sections closely examine sleep-related disturbances commonly associated with asthma, allergic rhinitis, and atopic disease; providing treatment guidelines, and detail various approaches to management throughout the patientâ#x80;#x99;s lifespan. This resource concludes with a review of disease, sleep and circadian-specific therapeutics. Written by experts in their respective fields, Allergy and Sleep: Basic Principles and Clinical Practice is an ideal resource and important reference for any clinician working with patients suffering from sleep-related abnormalities due to allergic disorders.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I. Science of Sleep.-1. Sleep, Sleep Disorders, and Immune Function
    2. Overview of Basic Immunology
    3. Overview and Understanding of Basic Circadian Physiology
    4. Overview and Understanding of Human Circadian Immunology
    5. Overview and Understanding of Allergic Reactions and Allergic Disease
    6. Ontogeny of Sleep in Infants, Children, and Adolescent
    II. Clinical Science
    7. Screening for Allergic Disease in a Child with Sleep Disorder and Screening for Sleep Disturbance in Allergic Disease
    8. Evaluation and Management of a Sleepy Child
    9. Evaluation and Management of the Sleepless Child
    10. Evaluation and Management of Movement Disorders in Children
    11. Evaluation and Management of Allergic Disorders Related to Sleep Pathology
    III. Asthma
    12. Sleep-Related Disturbances Commonly Associated with Asthma
    13. Obesity Asthma and Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders
    14. Monitoring Asthma During Sleep: Methods and Techniques
    15. Asthma Treatment Outcome Measures
    16. Guidelines for Management of Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders and Asthma.-IV. Allergic Rhinitis
    17. Pathophysiology of Sleep-Disordered Breathing and Allergic Rhinitis
    18. Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders and Inflammation: TNF-α and IL-6 as Prototypic Examples
    19. Circadian Rhythm of Allergic Rhinitis, Skin Testing and Allergen Immunotherapy
    20. Differentiating Upper Airways Resistance in Adenoid Hypertrophy, Allergic Rhinitis and Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Imaging and Approaches
    21. Allergic Rhinitis and Sleep: Approaches to Management
    V. Atopic Dermatitis
    22. Sleep-Related Disorders Associated with Atopic Dermatitis
    23. Sleep Disruption in Atopic Dermatitis
    24. Sleep Dysregulation in Chronic Rhinosinusitis
    VI. Therapies for Sleep and Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders Associated with Atopic Disease
    25. Behavioral Management
    26. Chronotherapy
    27. Melatonin, Sleep, and Allergy
    28. Pharmacologic Management of Allergic Disease and Sleep
    29. Alternative/Integrative Medical Approaches in Allergy and Sleep: Basic Principles and Clinical Practice
    30. Assessment and Therapies for Sleep and Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders Associated with Atopic Disease in Children: A Dental Perspective
    31. Surgical Management of Allergic Disease to Treat Sleep Disturbance in Children and Adults
    Appendix: Food Allergy and Sleep
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ailin Tao, Eyal Rax, editors.
    Contents:
    Allergic Disease Epidemiology
    The Pathogenesis of Allergy: A Brief Introduction
    Genetics and Epigenetic Regulation in Allergic Diseases
    Cross-Reactivity
    From Allergen Extracts to Allergen Genes and Allergen Molecules
    Allergen Gene Cloning
    High Throughput Screening of Allergy
    Surrogate Markers for Allergen-Specific Immunotherapy
    Immune Responses to Allergens in Atopic Disease: Considerations for Bioinformatics
    Antigenicity, Immunogenicity and Allergenicity
    Bioinformatic Classifiers for Allergen Sequence Discrimination
    Strategies for the Modification and Evaluation of Allergenicity
    Bioinformatics Methods to Predict Allergen Epitopes
    Allergen Database.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Robyn E. O'Hehir, Stephen T. Holgate, Gurjit K. Khurana Hershey, Aziz Sheikh.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Lubarsch, Otto.
    Digital Access Google Books 1905-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J25 .L92
    1
  • Print
    von A. von Tschermak.
    Contents:
    Bd.
    1. Groundlagen der allgemeinen Physiologie. T.
    1. Allgemeine Charakteristik des Lebens physikalische und chemische Beschaffenheit der lebenden Substanz.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F31 .T87
    1
  • Print
    begründet von Martin Kirschner.
    Contents:
    Bd. 1. Allgemeine Operations lehre / Gerd Hegemann
    Bd. 2. Die Eingriffe am Gehirnschädel, Gehirn an der Wirbelsäule und am Rückenmark / N. Guleke
    Bd. 4. Gesicht/Gesichtsschädel Kiefer
    Bd. 5. Die Oto-Rhino-Laryngologischen operationen / H.J. Denecke
    Bd. 6, T.1. Die Eingriffe an der Brust und in der Brusthöhle / Alfred Brunner
    Bd. 7, T. 1. Die Eingriffe in der Bauchhöhle / Martin Kirschner
    Bd. 7, T. 2. Die Eingriffe bei den Bauchbüchen / Martin Kirschner
    Bd. 8. Die Eingriffe an den Harnorganen Nebennieren und männlichen Geschlechtsorganen / Leonhard Lurz
    Bd. 9 Gynäkologische Operationen / K.G. Ober [und] H. Meinrenken
    Bd. 10. Die Operationen an den Extremitäten / Werner Wachsmuth.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M32 .K61
    1
  • Print
    von Martin Kirschner ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M32 .K61
    11
  • Digital/Print
    Kraus, Friedrich.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Allgemeiner Teil
    v. 2. Besonderer Teil, I. Tiefenperson.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J111 .K91
    2
  • Digital
    Mariya Miteva.
    Summary: Get a quick, expert overview of alopecia with this concise, practical resource. Dr. Mariya Miteva covers high-interest clinical topics including hair cosmeceuticals, new medications in clinical trials, off-label treatment technologies, and much more. It's an ideal resource for dermatologists, dermatopathologists, students, fellows, and researchers interested in hair loss.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Pooya Khan Mohammad Beigi.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Overview
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Part 2: Diffuse Alopecia
    Chapter 2
    Diffuse alopecia areata
    Chapter 3
    Alopecia totalis / universalis
    Chapter 4
    Telogen effluvium
    Chapter 5
    Anagen effluvium
    Chapter 6
    Loose anagen syndrome
    Part 3: Focal Alopecia
    Non-scarring Alopecias
    Chapter 7
    Androgenetic alopecia (AGA)
    Chapter 8
    Alopecia areata
    Chapter 9
    Tinea capitis
    Part 4: Focal Alopecia
    Traumatic Hair Loss
    Chapter 10
    Trichotillomania (hair pulling disorder)
    Chapter 11
    Traction alopecia
    Part 5: Focal Alopecia
    Cicatricial Alopecia
    Chapter 12
    Chronic cutaneous lupus erythematosus
    Chapter 13
    Lichen planopilaris
    Chapter 14
    Central centrifugal cicatricial alopecia
    Part 6: Pathology slides
    Chapter 15
    Pathology slides
    Part 7: Research studies
    Chapter 16
    Research study 1
    Chapter 17
    Research study 2
    Part 8: Case reports and photos
    Chapter 18
    Patient descriptions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    volume editors, Dimitrios Ioannides, Antonella Tosti.
    Contents:
    Normal and aging hair biology and structure 'aging and hair'
    Evaluation of hair loss
    Scalp dermoscopy or trichoscopy
    Androgenetic, diffuse and senescent alopecia in men: practical evaluation and management
    Female pattern hair loss
    Hair loss in children
    Alopecia areata
    Primary scarring alopecias
    Molecular genetics of alopecias
    Alopecias due to drugs and other skin and systemic disorders
    Effect of ultraviolet radiation, smoking and nutrition on hair
    Hair care and dyeing
    Age-related hair pigment loss
    Ethnic hair disorders
    Advances in hair transplantation: longitudinal partial follicular unit transplantation.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Adam Wanner, Robert A. Sandhaus, editors.
    Contents:
    Alpha-1- Antitrypsin and the Serpins
    Alpha-1 Antitrypsin: The protein
    Misfolding and Polymerisation of Alpha1-Antitrypsin ? Conformational Pathology and Therapeutic Targeting
    Managing the Adaptive Proteostatic Landscape: Restoring Resilience in Alpha-1 Antitrypsin Deficiency
    United States Targeted Detection Program for Alpha-1 Antitrypsin Deficiency
    Lung Disease of Alpha-1 Antitrypsin Deficiency
    Alpha-1-Antitrypsin Deficiency: Role in Health and Disease
    Alpha-1 Antitrypsin as a Therapeutic Agents for Conditions not Associated with Alpha-1 Antitrypsin Deficiency
    The Alpha-1 Constellation of Voluntary Health Organizations as a Paradigm for Confronting Other Rare Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Zhong-li Sha, Yan-rong Wang, Dong-ling Cui.
    Summary: As one of the largest families within the Caridea, the Alpheidae have attracted much attention for its species richness, especially on coral reefs. The Alpheidae are one of the most abundant decapods in tropical and subtropical areas, with 48 genera and more than 700 known species. The Alpheidae present a particular challenge in terms of both taxonomy and systematics as they are difficult to identify (some species vary in their growth and there are often large differences between the sexes). Traditional, morphology-based research on the Alpheidae still plays an important role in identifying species, compared with new methods, such as the short gene sequences. Based on more than 2000 specimens collected from the China Seas, this book describes and clearly illustrates 146 species belonging to 16 genera of the Alpheidae. It also presents the key features of every genus and every species within every genus, to enable readers to easily identify the alphid shrimps of the China Seas.

    Contents:
    Part I Introduction
    Part II Taxonomy of Alpheidae from China seas
    Chapter 1 Genus Alpheopsis Coutière., Chapter 2 Genus Alpheus Fabricius
    1) Brevirostris Group., 2) Crinitus Group
    3) Diadema Group
    4) Edwardsii Group
    5) Macrocheles Group
    6) Obesomanus Group
    7) Sulcatus Group
    Chapter 3 Genus Arete Stimpson
    Chapter 4 Genus Aretopsis De Man., Chapter 5 Genus Athanas Leach
    Chapter 6 Genus Automate De Man
    Chapter 7 Genus Batella Holthuis
    Chapter 8 Genus Bermudacaris Anker and Iliff
    Chapter 9 Genus Betaeus Dana
    Chapter 10 Genus Metalpheus Coutière
    Chapter 11 Genus Prionalpheus Banner & Banner
    Chapter 12 Genus Rugathanas Anker & Jeng
    Chapter 13 Genus Salmoneus Holthuis
    Chapter 14 Genus Stenalpheops Miya
    Chapter 15 Genus Synalpheus Spence Bate
    Chapter 16 Genus Thuylamea Nguyên.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Christian Körner.
    Summary: This book is a completely revised, substantially extended treatment of the physical and biological factors that drive life in high mountains. The book covers the characteristics of alpine plant life, alpine climate and soils, life under snow, stress tolerance, treeline ecology, plant water, carbon, and nutrient relations, plant growth and productivity, developmental processes, and two largely novel chapters on alpine plant reproduction and global change biology. The book explains why the topography driven exposure of plants to dramatic micro-climatic gradients over very short distances causes alpine biodiversity to be particularly robust against climatic change. Geographically, this book draws on examples from all parts of the world, including the tropics. This book is complemented with novel evidence and insight that emerged over the last 17 years of alpine plant research. The number of figures -- mostly in color -- nearly doubled, with many photographs providing a vivid impression of alpine plant life worldwide. Christian Körner was born in 1949 in Austria, received his academic education at the University of Innsbruck, and was full professor of Botany at the University of Basel from 1989 to 2014. As emeritus Professor he is continuing alpine plant research in the Swiss Alps.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Herbert Schoenhuber, Andrea Panzeri, Simone Porcelli, editors.
    Summary: This book provides detailed information on the different forms of injury that are associated with training for and participation in Alpine skiing, covering risk factors and epidemiology, incidence, injury patterns, and, above all, preventive strategies and current management approaches. Conditions addressed in individual chapters include concussion, traumatic dislocations due to high-energy trauma or inappropriate movements, overuse injuries resulting from dry-land training or skiing on snow, the fractures typically associated with present-day Alpine skiing accidents, and musculoskeletal disorders. The importance of a sound understanding of biomechanics and physiological systems for the design of suitable training protocols and trauma prevention is clearly explained, and in-depth information and guidance are provided on training and testing for elite skiers and return to sporting activity following injury. Among the other topics addressed in individual chapters are the relationship of changes in skiing equipment over recent decades to particular types of injury and the potential consequences of exposure to hypobaric hypoxia and other stressors at high altitude. The book will be of great value to all medical professionals who work with or care for Alpine skiers, as well as for trainers and the skiers themselves.

    Contents:
    Biomechanics of Alpine skiing
    Physiology of Alpine skiing
    Training and testing for elite skiers
    Epidemiology of Alpine skiing injuries
    Concussion in Alpine ski
    Traumatic dislocation and fractures
    Overuse injuries in alpine skiers
    Prevention of overuse injuries in Alpine skiers
    Musculoskeletal disorders among elite Alpine skiing racers
    Return to elite Alpine sports activity after injury
    Role of ski equipment on injury rate
    Respiratory system illness and hypoxia.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Caroline Elton.
    Summary: Entering a doctor's office can be terrifying, sometimes for the doctor most of all. Vocational psychologist Caroline Elton introduces doctors who face psychological challenges that threaten to destroy their careers and lives, including an obstetrician grappling with his own homosexuality, a high-achieving junior doctor who walks out of her first job within weeks of starting, and an oncology resident who faints when confronted with cancer patients. By examining the inner lives of these professionals, Also Human offers readers insight into, and empathy for, the very real struggles of those who hold power over life and death.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Medicine in the mirror
    Wednesday's child
    Finding the middle
    Which doctor
    Brief encounter
    Role reversal
    Leaky pipes
    Risky business
    No exit
    Natural selection
    Epilogue: There's no such thing as a doctor.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    R690 .E48 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Daniel Goleman and Richard J. Davidson.
    Summary: Sweeps away the misconceptions around mindfulness and other forms of meditation, showing how smart practice can change our personal traits and even our genome for the better. Goleman and Davidson reveal what we can learn from a one-of-a-kind data pool that includes world-class meditators. They share for the first time findings that show how meditation--without drugs or high expense--can cultivate qualities such as selflessness, equanimity, love and compassion, and redesign our neural circuitry.

    Contents:
    The deep path and the wide
    Ancient clues
    The after is the before for the next during
    The best we had
    A mind undisturbed
    Primed for love
    Attention!
    Lightness of being
    Mind, body, and genome
    Meditation as psychotherapy
    A Yogi's brain
    Hidden treasure
    Altering traits
    A healthy mind.
    Limited to 2 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Mark Trombetta, Jean-Philippe Pignol, Paolo Montemaggi, Luther W. Brady, editors.
    Summary: This book, written by leading international experts, describes alternate fractionation strategies in which technology-driven precise targeting and dosing allow for improved conformance and decreased volumes, with concordant lessening of toxicity, reduction in treatment time, and lower overall health care expense. The aim is to provide the advanced clinician with an up-to-date evidence-based reference that will assist in the delivery of enhanced patient care in daily practice. Traditional multi-week fractionation schedules were established at a time when the inclusion of relatively large amounts of normal tissue was unavoidable owing to the lack of accurate target localization during treatment. Such schedules are time and resource consuming, difficult for patients, and expensive. Nevertheless, acceptance of alternate fractionation strategies has been slow in some countries. The paradigm is, however, changing as evidence accumulates to demonstrate improved local control, equivalence of tolerance, or both. In documenting these alternate strategies, this book will be of value for radiation oncologists, medical physicists, and oncologists worldwide.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eric T. Wong, editor.
    Summary: This concise text provides a complete overview of alternating electric fields therapy -- also known as tumor treating fields -- for glioblastoma and other types of solid tumor malignancies. Readers are given a fundamental understanding of this novel anti-cancer treatment modality by learning from clinical trial data as well as the physical and cell biology effects on tumor cells when alternating electric fields are applied both in vitro and in vivo. Chapters illustrate the physics behind electric field propagation in space and other media. This is followed by a review of our current understanding of the electric field effects on dividing cells - including the disruption of cytokinesis, proper chromosome segregation and activation on the cell surface chaperons that induce immunogenic cell death. Data from phase III trials for the treatment of recurrent and newly diagnosed glioblastomas are included, as well as some of the ancillary post hoc analyses that were performed by various investigators. The remainder of the chapter covers other solid tumor malignancies, including non-small cell lung cancer, pancreatic cancer and ovarian cancer, as this treatment modality is being applied to systemic malignancies. Alternating Electric Fields Therapy in Oncology offers oncologists, neurologists, radiation oncologists, biomedical engineers, cell biologists and mitosis researchers the fundamentals needed for clinical practice.

    Contents:
    1. Cell Biological Effects of Alternating Electric Fields
    2. Fundamental Physics of Alternating Electric Fields Therapy
    3. Biophysical Effects of Alternating Electric Fields
    4. Computer Simulation of Alternating Electric Fields Therapy
    5. Response Pattern and Modeling of Tumor-Treating Fields
    6. Clinical Efficacy of Alternating Electric Fields for Recurrent Glioblastoma
    7. Alternating Electric Fields in Clinical Practice with Emphasis on PRiDe Registry
    8. Alternating Electric Fields Therapy for Newly Diagnosed Glioblastoma
    9. Supportive Care in Patients Using Alternating Electric Fields Therapy
    10. Future Directions for Alternating Electric Fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Edzard Ernst.
    Summary: Alternative medicine (AM) is hugely popular; about 40% of the US general population have used at least one type of alternative treatment in the past year, and in Germany this figure is around 70%. The money spent on AM is considerable: the global market is expected to reach nearly US $ 200 billion by 2025, with most of these funds coming directly out of consumers pockets. The reasons for this popularity are complex, but misinformation is certainly a prominent factor. The media seem to have an insatiable appetite for the subject and often report uncritically on it. Misinformation about AM on the Internet (currently about 50 million websites are focused on AM) is much more the rule than the exception. Consumers are thus being bombarded with misinformation on AM, and they are ill-protected from such misinformation and therefore prone to making wrong, unwise or dangerous therapeutic decisions, endangering their health and wasting their money. This book is a reference text aimed at guiding consumers through the maze of AM. The concept of the book is straightforward. It has two main parts. The first, short section provides essential background on AM, explaining in simple terms what is (and what is not) good, reliable evidence, and addressing other relevant issues like, for instance, the placebo response, informed consent, integrative medicine, etc. The second and main part consists of 150 short chapters, topically grouped and each dedicated to one single alternative therapeutic or diagnostic method. In each of them, seven critical points are raised. These points relate to issues that are important for consumers decisions whether it is worth trying the method in question. Restricting the discussion to just seven points means that issues must be prioritized to those themes which are most relevant in the context of each given modality.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Why evidence?
    The attractiveness of alternative medicine
    The unattractiveness of alternative medicine
    Ethical problems in alternative medicine
    Other issues
    Diagnostic techniques
    Medicines and oral treatments
    Physical therapies
    Other therapies
    Umbrella terms.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Muhammad Zia-Ul-Haq, May Nasser Bin-Jumah, Sarah I. Alothman, Hanan A. Henidi, editors.
    Summary: This research volume examines the available alternative, complementary, pharmaceutical and vaccine methods for treating, mitigating, or preventing COVID-19. Coverage includes traditional Chinese medicine, herbal remedies, nutraceutical/dietary options, and drug/vaccine therapies. All the methods discussed will be critically examined to provide readers with a full, unbiased overview that includes pros/cons of each method. While the nature of COVID-19 is still being studied, and new research and theories are being published daily, this book endeavors to provide readers with a comprehensive summary of current research on alternative and mainstream treatment and prevention methods.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: Introduction to COVID-19
    Introduction
    Origin of COVID
    Emergence and Epidemiology
    Human-Animal Interaction as Risk Factor
    Best Suitable Animal Model
    COVID and Animal Welfare
    Molecular Differences Between Different Animal Species
    Vaccines for COVID from Animals
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Medicinal Plants as COVID-19 Remedy
    Introduction
    Existing Plants with Potential Therapeutic Applications for Coronavirus Family (SARS-CoV)
    Plants as Specific Inhibitors of HCoV Target Proteins Bupleurum Species
    Artemisia annua L.
    Isatis indigotica Fortune ex Lindl.
    Alcea digitata (Boiss.) Alef.
    Lycoris radiata (L'Hér.) Herb.
    Pyrrosia lingua (Thunb.) Farw.
    Houttuynia cordata Thunb.
    Torreya nucifera L.
    Lindera aggregata (Sims) Kosterm.
    Rheum palmatum L.
    Cerasus avium (L.) Moench.
    Polygonum multiflorum Thunb.
    Citrus aurantium L.
    Rubia tinctorum L.
    Onopordum acanthium L.
    Quercus infectoria G. Olivier
    Crataegus microphylla C. Koch
    Berberis integerrima Bunge
    Alnus japonica (Thunb.) Steud.
    Paulownia tomentosa (Thunb.) Steud. Psoralea corylifolia L.
    Tribulus terrestris L.
    Medicinal Plants as Potential Source of Natural Antiviral Agents Against COVID -19
    Allium Sativum (Garlic)
    Azadirachta indica (Neem)
    Curcuma domestica (Turmeric, Haldi)
    Echinacea purpurea L. (Echinacea)
    Foeniculum vulgare Mill. (Fennel)
    Glycyrrhiza glabra (Licorice)
    Melissa officinalis L. (Lemon Balm)
    Mentha piperita L. (Peppermint)
    Nigella sativa L. (Black Seeds)
    Origanum vulgare L. (Oregano)
    Ocimum bacilicum L. (Basil)
    Rosmarinus officinalis L. (Rosemary)
    Salvia officinalis L. (Sage) Senna alexandrina Mill. (Senna Makki)
    Zingiber officinale Rosc. (Ginger)
    Limitations
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 3: Traditional Chinese Medicines as Possible Remedy Against SARS-CoV-2
    Introduction
    Traditional Chinese Medical Practices
    Laws for TCM Formulation
    Antiviral Potential of Plant Metabolites
    Structure of SARS-CoV-2
    Relevance of SARS-CoV with SARS-CoV-2
    Entry of SARS-CoV vs. SARS-CoV-2 into Host Cell
    TCM and SARS-CoV
    TCM and SARS-CoV-2 (COVID-19)
    Most Practiced Herbs in Formulations Against COVID-19 Utilization Frequency of Herbs in the Formulation of (COVID-19) Decoctions
    Approved/Proposed Decoctions with Successful Clinical Trials
    Qingfei Paidu Decoction (QFPD) (Approved)
    Huashi Baidu Decoction (HBD) (Approved)
    Xiaochaihu Decoction (XCHD)
    Xuanfei Baidu Decoction (XFBD) (Approved)
    Jinhua Qinggan (JQ) (Approved)
    Huoxiang Zhengqi (HZ) Capsule
    Lianhua Qingwen (LQ)
    Xuebijing Injection (XbI) (Approved)
    Reduning Injection (RdI)
    Shufeng Jiedu Capsule (SFJC)
    Ma Xing Shi Gan Decoction (MXSGD) (Approved)
    Yin Qiao San (YQS)
    Yupingfeng San (YPFS)
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Chantra Eskes, Erwin van Vliet, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Concepts
    Skin irritation
    Skin corrosion
    Skin sensitization
    UV-induced effects (phototoxicity & photoallergy)
    Skin genotoxicity
    Other exploratory areas of relevance.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Hajime Kojima, Troy Seidle, Horst Spielmann, editors.
    Summary: This open access book presents recent advances in the pure sciences that are of significance in the quest for alternatives to the use of animals in research and describes a variety of practical applications of the three key guiding principles for the more ethical use of animals in experiments - replacement, reduction, and refinement, collectively known as the 3Rs. Important examples from across the world of implementation of the 3Rs in the testing of cosmetics, chemicals, pesticides, and biologics, including vaccines, are described, with additional information on relevant regulations. The coverage also encompasses emerging approaches to alternative tests and the 3Rs. The book is based on the most informative contributions delivered at the Asian Congress 2016 on Alternatives and Animal Use in the Life Sciences. It will be of value for those working in R & D, for graduate students, and for educators in various fields, including the pharmaceutical and cosmetic sciences, pharmacology, toxicology, and animal welfare. The free, open access distribution of Alternatives to Animal Testing is enabled by the Creative Commons Attribution license in International version 4: CC BY 4.0.

    Contents:
    1. Zebrafish, Danio rerio as a replacement alternative model useful in CKDu experiments
    2. Testing Method Development and Validation for In Vitro Skin Irritation Testing (SIT) by Using Reconstructed Human Epidermis (RhE) Skin Equivalent
    EPiTR
    3. Development the technique for the Preparation and Characterization of Reconstructed Human Epidermis (RHE)
    4. Alternative Research (3Rs) in the World, Asia and Japan
    5. Approaches to Reducing Animal Use for Acute Toxicity Testing: Retrospective Analyses of Pesticide Data
    6. Progress in deleting the 1-year dog study for the safety assessment of pesticides
    7. Cosmetic regulation and alternatives to animal experimentation in India
    8. Guidance on the Use of Alternative Test Methods for the Safety Assessment of Cosmetics and Quasi-Drugs
    9. Alternatives and Refinement for Animal Experimentation in Cancer Research
    10. 3Rs in quality control of human vaccines: opportunities and barriers
    11. The Use of Adverse Outcome Pathways (AOPs) to Support Chemical Safety Decisions within the Context of Integrated Approaches to Testing and Assessment (IATA)
    12. Mechanism-based evaluation system for hepato- and nephrotoxicity or carcinogenicity using omics technology
    13. Alternative methods for developmental toxicity testing using mouse ESCs
    14. Futuristic approach to alternative model organisms: Hydra stakes its claim
    15. The Lush Prize and Young Researcher Asia Awards 2016.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nejat Erverdi, Melih Motro.
    Contents:
    Brief History of Distraction Osteogenesis
    Formation and Mineralization of Maxillary Membranous Bone during Distraction Osteogenesis: Principles and Periods of Distraction Osteogenesis
    Bone Histology and Quality after Distraction Osteogenesis
    Diagnosis and Treatment Planning: Need for Alveolar Distraction Osteogenesis
    ArchWise Distraction Appliance
    Class II Div I Cases
    Lengthening Ankylosed Teeth by Local Alveolar Distraction Osteogenesis
    Different Clinical Aspects of ArchWise Distraction Treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    David Ludwig, MD, PhD.
    Summary: "Inspired by the New York Times op-ed "Always Hungry," ALWAYS HUNGRY? will change everything readers ever thought about weight loss, diet, and health. Groundbreaking new research shows that calorie counting does not work for weight loss: one diet causes weight gain whereas another diet with the same calorie count doesn't. It's your fat cells that are to blame for causing excessive hunger and increased weight. By eating the wrong foods, our fat cells are triggered to take in too many calories for themselves, setting off a dangerous chain reaction of increased appetite and a slower metabolism. Now, Harvard Medical School's David Ludwig, MD, PhD, offers an impeccably researched diet that will turn dieting on its head, teaching readers to reprogram their fat cells, tame hunger, boost metabolism, and lose weight--for good"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Prologue: A new way to think about weight loss
    The big picture
    The problem
    The science
    The solution
    Prepare to change your life
    Phase 1: Conquer cravings
    Phase 2: Retrain your fat cells
    Phase 3: Lose weight permanently
    Recipes
    Epilogue: Ending the madness
    Appendix A: The glycemic load of carbohydrate-containing foods
    Appendix B: Trackers
    Appendix C: Guides to preparing vegetables, whole grains, nuts, and seeds.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM222.2 .L74 2016
    1
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for ALZA Conference Series to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by Gunhild Waldemar and Alistair Burns.
    Summary: "Part of the Oxford Neurology Library series, this second edition of Alzheimer's Disease is a succinct and practical introduction to the diagnosis, evaluation and management of Alzheimer's disease. This practical pocketbook contains 14 fully updated chapters on key topics such as pathophysiology, epidemiology, pharmacological treatments, and psychological symptoms. The introduction of new chapters on atypical presentations, end-of-life issues, and case vignettes ensure the reader is fully equipped with the latest understanding of the possible causes of the disease, methods of diagnosis, and management techniques. Content is presented in a concise and easy to read format designed for quick reference, with helpful key points listed at the start of each chapter"--www.amazon.com.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Jha Arun, Kaushik Mukhopadhaya.
    Summary: This book provides a practically focused resource on the methodologies available for diagnosing and treating Alzheimer's disease. The number of individuals affected by the disease continues to grow and as such there is an ever-increasing need for clear easy-to-digest guidance on how to appropriately diagnose and treat these patients. Within this work, chapters provide concise informative details of what this form of dementia is, how it can be diagnosed, managed and prevented making it ideal for those with limited experience in dealing with these patients. Information is provided on how to use a variety of the latest relevant techniques including mental state examinations, functional assessments, special investigations and the available drug treatments. Alzheimer's Disease: Diagnosis & Treatment Guide is a concise clinical guide detailing how to diagnose and treat these patients. It's easy-to-follow ideal for use by front-line physicians and trainees, who have no previous experience of diagnosing and treating this disease. The assessment component of the book is based on the WHO Mental Health Gap Action Plan (mhGAP) Dementia Intervention Guide for non-specialized settings.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Chapter 1: Memory, Cognitive Impairment and Dementia
    1.1 The First Meeting
    1.2 Introduction
    1.3 What Is Normal?
    1.4 Memory
    1.4.1 Long-and Short-Term Memory
    1.4.2 Measures of Memory
    1.4.3 How and Why We Forget?
    1.4.4 How Fast Do We Forget?
    1.4.5 Ageing and Memory
    1.4.5.1 Amnesia
    1.4.5.2 Memory and Hippocampus
    1.4.6 Biological Ageing
    1.5 What Is Dementia?
    1.5.1 Why Should Dementia Be Identified Early?
    1.5.2 Prevalence of Dementia in South Asian Countries 1.5.3 Risk Factors for Alzheimer's Dementia
    1.5.3.1 Modifiable Risk Factors
    1.5.4 Inside Alzheimer's Brain [13]
    1.6 Preventing Alzheimer's by Active Ageing
    1.6.1 WHO Dementia Risk Reduction Guideline
    References
    Chapter 2: Dementia Due to Alzheimer's Disease (AD)
    2.1 Presentation and Progression of AD
    2.2 Role of Frontline/Non-specialist Physicians
    2.2.1 Presentation of Alzheimer's Disease
    2.2.2 Presenting Symptoms of AD
    2.2.2.1 Clinical Presentation
    2.2.3 Five A's of Alzheimer's
    2.2.3.1 Amnesia
    2.2.3.2 Aphasia
    2.2.3.3 Apraxia
    2.2.3.4 Agnosia 2.2.3.5 Abnormal Executive Function
    2.3 Natural History/Progression of AD
    2.3.1 Early Stage of Dementia
    2.3.2 Middle Stage of Dementia
    2.3.3 Late Stage of Dementia
    References
    Chapter 3: Dementia Assessment
    3.1 Assessment: The OBAMA Index
    3.2 Steps of Clinical Assessment
    3.2.1 Step 1: History Taking
    3.2.2 Step 2: Physical Examination
    3.2.3 Step 3: Mental State Examination
    3.2.4 Step 4: Assess for Signs of Dementia
    3.2.5 Step 5: Differential Diagnosis-Delirium and Depression
    3.2.6 Basic Laboratory Tests
    3.2.6.1 Current Medication
    3.2.7 Genetic Testing 3.3 Cognitive Screening Instruments
    3.3.1 Mini-Cog
    3.3.2 RUDAS
    3.3.3 Functional Assessment: FAQ
    3.3.4 Functional Activities Questionnaire [10]
    3.3.4.1 Administration
    3.3.5 ECG
    3.3.6 Neuroimaging (CT and MRI Scans)
    3.3.7 Functional and Molecular Imaging
    3.4 Assessment Summary
    References
    Chapter 4: RUDAS Cognitive Scale
    4.1 RUDAS: Rowland Universal Dementia Assessment Scale (Appendix A)
    4.1.1 Administration and Interpretation of RUDAS
    4.1.1.1 Item 1: Memory
    4.1.1.2 Item 2: Body Orientation (Maximum Score 5) 4.1.1.3 Item 3: Praxis (Test for Visuospatial Difficulties, Apraxia and Agnosia)
    4.1.1.4 Item 4: Drawing (Test for Constructional Dyspraxia)
    4.1.1.5 Item 5: Judgement (Test for Agnosia)
    4.1.1.6 Item 1b: Memory (Recall-Max 8 Points)
    4.1.1.7 Item 6: Language (Animal Naming-Test for Verbal Fluency-Max 8 Points)
    Total Score
    4.2 Screening for Depression
    4.2.1 Geriatric Depression Scale (GDS)
    References
    Chapter 5: Diagnosis
    5.1 Diagnosis of Dementia
    5.1.1 DSM-5 Criteria for Dementia Due to AD
    5.1.2 Probable AD Dementia: Core Clinical Criteria
    5.2 Differential Diagnosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Amy R. Borenstein, Ph.D, M.P.H., and James A. Mortimer, Ph.D., and James Mortimer, University of South Florida, Department of Epidemiology and Biostatistics, Department of Neurology, Tampa, FL, USA.
    Contents:
    The "first" case
    Clinical appearance, progression, and classification
    Epidemiologic definition of a case
    Neuropathology of Alzheimer's disease
    The threshold model of dementia
    The prevalence of Alzheimer's disease
    The incidence of Alzheimer's disease
    Survival and mortality in Alzheimer's disease
    Introduction to the analytic epidemiology of Alzheimer's disease
    Family history, genetics, and down syndrome
    Early-life factors
    Traumatic brain injury
    Cigarette smoking and alcohol consumption
    Vascular disease
    Diet
    Physical activity
    Cognitive activity
    Social engagement
    Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, hormone replacement therapy, and anticholinergic medications
    Prodromal markers of disease or causal risk factors? Depression, olfaction, and subjective memory complaints
    Fluid, imaging, and cognitive biomarkers
    Risk assessment and prevention of Alzheimer's disease
    Summary and recommendations.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Stephen M. Stahl, University of California, San Diego, Debbi Ann Morrissette, Nueroscience Education Institute ; Nancy Muntner, illustrations.
    Summary: "Although a disease-altering treatment has yet to be found, our understanding of Alzheimer's disease (AD) genetics and neurobiology has increased exponentially over the past few decades, as has our ability to detect Alzheimer's pathology using various biomarkers. In this chapter, we will review the genetic, pathological, and behavioral features of Alzheimer's disease and discuss how the use of biomarkers for the detection of AD has potentially opened up new avenues for the prevention (or possible reversal) of AD"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Alzheimer's disease
    Lewy body dementias and other synucleinopathies
    Frontotemporal labor degeneration and taopathies
    Other dementias
    Treatment of secondary behavioral symptoms of dementia.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Jack C. de la Torre.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. How does Alzheimer's begin and who gets it?
    Chapter 2. Forming memories
    Chapter 3. Masquerading as dementia
    Chapter 4. Alzheimer's
    then and now
    Chapter 5. Unproven hypotheses on the cause of Alzheimer's
    Chapter 6. Other hypotheses on the cause of Alzheimer's disease
    Chapter 7. Alzheimer noise
    Chapter 8. Social contract and Alzheimer's
    Chapter 9. Genetics of Alzheimer's
    Chapter 10. Powering the brain
    Chapter 11. Pharmaceuticals and Alzheimer's
    Chapter 12. Alzheimer vascular risk factors
    Chapter 13. The Good, The Bad and The Ugly of Advanced Aging
    Chapter 14. A Personal Account of How a Scientific Hypothesis Blooms Into a Life of Its Own
    Chapter 15. Clinical tools to detect and predict individuals at risk of Alzheimer's
    Chapter 16. The turning point for Alzheimer's
    Chapter 17. How poor brain blood flow promotes Alzheimer's disease
    Chapter 18. Interventions that may increase cerebral blood flow
    Chapter 19. Great Expectations
    Chapter 20. A road to new thinking.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] J. Mark Melhorn, James B. Talmage, William E. Ackerman III, Mark H. Hyman.
    Summary: "The second edition of AMA Guides to the Evaluation of Disease and Injury Causation is dedicated to updating the science, expanding the focus, and including additional perspectives to improve the understanding of causation, which will eventually improve the treatment outcomes for the injured worker as they stay-at-home or return-to-work"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Understanding work-relatedness
    Casual associations and determination of work-relatedness
    Methodology
    Apportionment
    The causality examination
    Report writing
    Spine
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Musculosketel disorders: conditions of uncertain pathophysiology - acute and chronic pain
    Causation of common cardiovascular problems
    Causation in common pulmonary problems
    Neurological disorders
    Rheumatologic diseases
    Mental illness
    Genitourinary
    Gastroitestinal
    Ear, eye, nose and throat
    Selected topics: gender, leukemia related to radiation, and occupational skin lesions (sun exposures)
    Chemical exposure claims: a framework for causation analysis
    Putting it all together: causation analysis as illustrated by example
    Example of causation methodology
    Causation: the attorney's perspective
    Causation: a judge's perspective
    Causation: the employer's perspective
    Causation: The insurer's (payer's) perspective
    Causation: the worker's compensation commission perspective
    Causation: the occupational physician's perspective
    Causation: the international perspective
    Causation issues for public safety personnel
    Effects of whole-body vibration on the spine
    Evaluating causation of favoring for the opposite limb.
    Digital Access Ebsco 2014
  • Digital
    Stacy L. Christiansen, Cheryl Iverson, Annette Flanagin, Edward H. Livingston, Lauren Fischer, Connie Manno, Brenda Gregoline, Tracy Frey, Phil B. Fontanarosa, Roxanne K. Young.
    Summary: "The AMA Manual of Style, 11th edition, is a must-have guide for those seeking to publish research findings and anyone involved in medical, health, or scientific writing and publishing. The manual offers guidance on nuts-and-bolts topics including punctuation, capitalization, and grammar. It also provides guidance on how to navigate the dilemmas that authors, researchers and their institutions, medical editors and publishers, writers, and members of the news media who cover scientific research confront on a daily basis. Written by an expert committee of JAMA Network editors, this 11th edition thoroughly covers ethical and legal issues, authorship, conflicts of interest, scientific misconduct, and intellectual property, in addition to preparation of articles for publication, style, terminology, measurement, and quantification"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2020
  • Digital
    Robert B. Taylor.
    Summary: "This book tells the intriguing and often colorful stories of the medical words we use. The origins of clinical and scientific terms can be found in Greek and Latin myths, in places such as jungles of Uganda and the islands of the Aegean Sea, in the names of medicine's giants such as Hippocrates and Osler, and in some truly unlikely sources. In this book you will learn the answers to questions such as: What disease was named for an American space flight? Do you know the echoic word for elephantine rumbling of the bowels? What drug name was determined by drawing chemists' notes out of a hat? What are surfer's eye, clam digger's itch, and hide porter's disease? This book can give you new insights into the terms we use every day in the clinic, hospital, and laboratory. Knowing a word's history assists in understanding not only what it means, but also some of the connotative subtleties of terms used in diagnosis and treatment. The Amazing Language of Medicine is intended for the enrichment of physicians, other health professionals, students, and anyone involved in clinical care and medical science."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    About Medical Words and Their Origins
    Medical Words with Mythological Origins
    Descriptive Medical Terms: Activities, Actions, and Appearances
    Medical Words from Various Languages
    Medical Words Linked to Places
    Medical Metaphor, Simile, and Onomatopoeia
    Eponymous and Honorary Medical Terms
    Medical Authorisms and Their Creators
    Medical Words with Intriguing Origins
    Medical Words with Confusing and Controversial Origins.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Guang-Hui Dong, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on the health impacts of air pollution in China, especially the epidemiology-based exposure-response functions for the mortality, morbidity, and hospital admissions for respiratory diseases, cardiovascular diseases, lung cancer, and mental health related to pollution. It also provides the latest estimates of the magnitude of the adverse effects of air pollution on the health of the Chinese population. By providing a better understanding of the impact of air pollution on health, it improves the scientific basis of risk assessment, and also helps governments develop policies and other health protection initiatives to reduce the impacts of air pollution. The book offers environmental scientists, engineers, researchers and students a comprehensive and organized body of information in the area of air pollution.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Hualiang Lin, Wenjun Ma, Qiyong Liu, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the Chinese health impact induced by ambient temperature variation, especially the epidemiology-based exposure-response relationship with the mortality and morbidity from respiratory, cardiovascular diseases, and mental health among Chinese population.A great number of epidemiological studies have reported that ambient temperature is closely associated with a wide range of health outcomes, such as mortality, cardiovascular and respiratory events, adverse birth outcome, and some infectious diseases, such as dengue fever, malaria. Although a number of epidemiological studies in western countries have evaluated the adverse health effects of ambient temperature, the exposure-response relationship from these countries cannot simply be applied to the Chinese population due to the large differences in temperature profile, exposure pattern, as well as the population vulnerability. This book will provide up-to-date estimates of the magnitude of adverse health effects of ambient temperature in the Chinese population. We hope to provide readers with a comprehensive and organized body of information in the area of Ambient Temperature and health.

    Contents:
    Overview of climate change in China.- Ambient temperature and mortality in Chinese population.- Ambient temperature and morbidity in China.- Heat wave and mortality/morbidity in China.- Ambient temperature and major infectious diseases in China.- style="font-size: 12pt; text-align: justify;">Ambient temperature and reproductive healthoutcomes.- Health vulnerability assessment to climate change in China.- Adapting to climate change in China.- Health co-benefits in relation to greenhouse gas emission reductions in China.- Ambient temperature and diseases burden in China.- Comparison of health impacts between China and other countries.- Perspectives and future research directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Paresh Wankhade, Kevin Mackway-Jones, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Understanding the Management of Ambulance Services / Paresh Wankhade and Kevin Mackway-Jones
    Historical Perspectives in the Ambulance Service / Alexander Pollock
    A Strategy for Managing Quality in Ambulance Services / Mary Peters, Steve Barnard, Michael Dorrian and Kevin Mackway-Jones
    Management of Emergency Demand / Bob Williams
    Ethical Commissioning of Emergency Ambulance Services / Mark Docherty
    Organisational and Professional Cultures: An Ambulance Perspective / Paresh Wankhade, James Radcliffe and Geoffrey Heath
    Leadership and System Thinking in the Modern Ambulance Service / Andy Newton and Graham Harris
    Ambulance Service Modernisation / Robert Till and Anthony Marsh
    Interoperability and Multiagency Cooperation / John Stephenson
    Responding to Diversity and Delivering Equality in Prehospital Care: Statutory Responsibilities, Best Practice and Recommendations / Viet-Hai Phung, Karen Windle and A. Niroshan Siriwardena
    Dealing with the Austerity Challenge / Robert Till and Anthony Marsh
    The Ambulance Service of the Future / Mark Docherty, Andrew Carson and Matthew Ward
    Future Perspectives for the UK Ambulance Services: Evolution Rather than Revolution / Kevin Mackway-Jones and Paresh Wankhade
    International Perspectives: Australian Ambulance Services in 2020 / Paul M Middleton
    International Perspectives: South African Ambulance Services in 2020 / Craig Vincent-Lambert
    International Perspectives: Finnish Ambulance Services in 2020 / Juha Jormakka and Simo Saikko
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    co-editors: Linda Brixey, RN-BC, Carol A. Newman, DNP, MSED, RN, CPNP-PC.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    John V. Knaus, Marko J. Jachtorowycz, Allan A. Adajar, Teresa Tam, editors.
    Summary: There are approximately 55,000 practicing ob/gyns in the United States. The obstetrics and gynecology residency training authority (the Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education) has now pushed ambulatory primary and preventative care to the top of its list for residency training. Interest in the area of ambulatory gynecology is not just growing in the field of ob/gyn, however; family and primary care practitioners, emergency room physicians, and advance practice nurses all must know how to diagnose, manage, and treat gynecological conditions. Since office technology has expanded and decision-making has become increasingly complex, physicians need a guide through the endless list of treatment options for commonly presenting gynecologic disorders. Ambulatory Gynecology gives practitioners tools for diagnosis, investigation and management of these disorders, including decision-making algorithms. The text is evidence-based. From endocrine disorders to breast disease, preventative measures for osteoporosis to management of an abnormal pap smear, from adolescent gynecology to menopause, this book is crucial for office-based physicians to feel confident practicing in all areas of gynecology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Abhay Rane, Ajay Rane ; with co-editors, Jordan Durrant, Arjunan Tamilselvi, Sandhya Gupta.
    Summary: "According to the International Association for Ambulatory Surgery (IAAS), ambulatory surgery should be defined as: 'an operation/procedure, excluding an office or outpatient operation/procedure, where the patient is discharged on the same working day'. The origins of ambulatory surgery can be traced back to the pioneering work of James Nicholl at the Glasgow Royal Hospital who reported 8988 paediatric day case procedures between 1899-1908. Despite initial scepticism from the surgical profession, there has been a rapid expansion in the complexity and amount of ambulatory surgery in recent years: between 1989-2003 the percentage of elective surgery undertaken as day case in the UK increased from 15% to 70%. Many health services have set targets for the percentage of elective surgeries to be done as day-case procedures and in the UK this target is set at 75%"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    American Academy of Pediatrics
    Summary: The American Academy of Pediatrics celebrates its 90th year in 2020. This collection of articles reprinted from AAP News recaps the Academy's accomplishments by decade and illustrates the organization's remarkably consistent goal of ensuring better health for all children. Highlights include Academy programs to prevent injury, promote immunization, provide professional and public education, create standards for child health, and advocate for legislation that benefits children at the national and local level.

    Contents:
    The American Academy of Pediatrics: 90 Years of Caring for Children 1930-2020
    Table of Contents
    Marking History...Making History
    Preface
    The 1920s: Many societal factors converged as founders organized the AAP
    The 1930s: AAP organizational efforts, growth of pediatrics flourished in 1930s
    The 1940s: Amid war in 1940s, AAP extended influence,undertook major child health study
    The 1950s: AAP jumpstarts injury prevention efforts in 1950s,with nationwide impact
    The 1960s: Tumultuous decade of the 1960s ushers in Head Start, medical achievements The 1970s: In the 1970s, AAP reaffirms mission, doubles membership,opens D.C. office
    The 1980s: AAP built new headquarters, helped ensure future vaccine supply
    The 1990s: In the 1990s, the AAP pushed access to care, helped slash SIDS rates
    The 2000s: AAP focused on health coverage, disaster readiness, obesity in early 2000s
    The 2010s: Laying the groundwork for the future, AAP tackles challenges of 2010-'20
    Our Mission Endures and Our Work Continues
    The Children's Charter
    Articles of Incorporation
    Membership Invitation
    Early Membership Form
    AAP Headquarters 1930-2020
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    Thomas K. McInerny, editor in chief ; co-editors, Henry M. Adam, Deborah E. Campbell, Thomas G. DeWitt, Jane Meschan Foy, Deepak M. Kamat ; tools editors, Rebecca Baum and Kelly J. Kelleher.
    Contents:
    Pt. 1: Delivering pediatric health care
    Pt. 2: Principles of care
    Sect. 1: Pediatric assessment
    Sect. 2: Preventive pediatrics
    Sect. 3: General management of children with health and behavioral problems
    Sect. 4: Care of special population
    Pt. 3: Maternal and fetal health: effect on pregnancy outcomes and perinatal health
    Pt. 4: Care of healty and high-risk infants
    Sect. 1: Routine care issues
    Sect. 2: Assessment and physical examination of the newborn
    Sect. 3: Neonatal medical conditions
    Sect. 4: Perinatal care: caring for the high-risk infant
    Sect. 5: Neonatal outcomes
    Sect. 6: Supporting families during perinatal illness and death
    Pt. 5: Adolescence
    Pt. 6: Presenting signs and symptoms
    Pt. 7: Specific clinical problems
    Pt. 8: Critical situations.
  • Digital
    edited by American Cancer Society.
    Contents:
    Sect. 1: Thoracic cancers
    Sect. 2: Digestive system cancers
    Sect. 3: Head and neck
    Sect. 4: Urinary system
    Sect. 5: Female reproductive cancer
    Sect. 6: Male reproductive cancers
    Sect. 7: Breast cancer
    Sect. 9: Skin cancer
    Sect. 10: Endocrine cancers
    Sect. 11: Cancer of the nervous system and eye
    Sect. 12: Bone and soft tissue tumors
    Sect. 13: Cancer of unknown primary, paraneoplastic syndromes, and peritoneal carcinomatosis
    Sect. 14: Pediatric and adolescent oncology.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    edited by The American Cancer Society.
    Contents:
    Cancer Causes, Prevention, and Early Detection. Descriptive Epidemiology / Rebecca L Siegel, Kimberly D Miller, Ahmedin Jemal
    Fundamentals of Cancer Epidemiology / Susan M Gapstur, Eric J Jacobs
    Socioeconomic Inequalities in Cancer Incidence and Mortality / Gopal K Singh, Ahmedin Jemal
    The Global Burden of Cancer / Ahmedin Jemal, Lindsey A Torre
    Counseling and Testing for Inherited Predisposition to Cancer / Emily Glogowski, Kasmintan A Schrader, Kelly L Stratton, Kenneth Offit
    Tobacco / Thomas J Glynn, Richard D Hurt, J Lee Westmaas
    Microbial Carcinogens / Edgar P Simard, Ahmedin Jemal
    Environmental and Occupational Carcinogens / Elizabeth Ward
    Nutrition and Physical Activity for Cancer Prevention / Stacey Fedewa, Rebecca L Siegel, Colleen Doyle, Marji L McCullough, Alpa V Patel
    Sun Protection / Andrew C Walls, Martin A Weinstock
    Screening and Early Detection / Robert A Smith, Otis W Brawley, Richard C Wender
    Cancer Biology. The Principles and Drivers of Cancer / Charles Saxe, William C Phelps
    Diagnosis. Imaging in Oncology / Andreas G Wibmer, Andreas M Hötker, Maura Miccò, David M Panicek, Hedvig Hricak
    The Pathologic Evaluation of Neoplastic Diseases / John D Pfeifer, Mark R Wick
    Cancer Staging / Frederick L Greene, Lauren A Kosinski
    Treatment Modalities. Surgical Oncology Overview / M Andrew Sicard, Benjamin D Li
    Radiotherapy / Curtiland Deville, Gaurav Shukla, Ramesh Rengan, Charles R Thomas
    Cytotoxic Chemotherapy / R Donald Harvey, Fadlo R Khuri
    Hormonal Therapy for Cancer / Amelia B Zelnak, Bradley C Carthon
    Immunotherapy of Cancer / Diwakar Davar, Ahmad A Tarhini, John M Kirkwood
    Targeted Therapies / Elizabeth Kessler, Paul Brittain, S Lindsey Davis, Stephen Leong, S Gail Eckhardt, Christopher H Lieu
    Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation for Cancer / Joshua F Zeidner, Christopher G Kanakry, Leo Luznik
    Diet, Physical Activity, and Weight Control for Cancer Patients and Survivors / Wendy Demark-Wahnefried, Laura Q Rogers, Catherine M Alfano, Cynthia A Thomson, Kerry S Courneya, Jeffrey A Meyerhardt, Nicole L Stout, Elizabeth Kvale, Heidi Ganzer, Ted Gansler, Jennifer A Ligibel
    Clinical Trials / Olwen M Hahn, Richard L Schilsky
    Complementary and Alternative (Integrative) Oncology / Gabriel Lopez, Richard Lee, M Kay Garcia, Alejandro Chaoul, Lorenzo Cohen
    Geriatric Oncology. Geriatric Oncology / Arvind M Shinde, Sumanta K Pal, Arti Hurria
    Symptom Management, Palliative Care, Complications and Toxicities of Treatment, Patient-Reported Outcomes, etc.. Palliative and Supportive Care / Rony Dev, Eduardo Bruera
    Sexuality and Fertility / Jeanne Carter, Shari B Goldfarb, Yukio Sonoda, Christian J Nelson, Maura N Dickler, John P Mulhall
    Psychiatric Issues in Cancer Patients / Andrew J Roth, Adrienne Jaeger
    Oncologic Emergencies / Mark A Lewis, William J Hogan, Timothy J Moynihan
    Patient-Reported Outcomes in Cancer / Kevin D Stein, Tenbroeck Smith, Joseph E Bauer, Deborah L Driscoll, Dexter L Cooper
    Survivorship Care / Emily Tonorezos, Shrujal S Baxi, Victoria Blinder, Darren R Feldman, Danielle Novetsky Friedman, Matthew Matasar, Talya Salz, Armin Shahrokni, Kevin C Oeffinger.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Print
    King, John; Felter, Harvey Wickes; King, John.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    X431 .K53 1854
    1
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    Q141 .A474
    88
  • Print
    Secretariat, Laser Insitute of America.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TA1677 .A4935 2018
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Michael T. Compton, Marc W. Manseau
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth look at clinical and public health approaches to this epidemic from both psychiatric and medical perspectives and gives mental health professionals the big picture necessary to understand the epidemic

    Contents:
    From fields of poppies to a national crisis / Michael T. Compton, M.D., M.P.H., Marc W. Manseau, M.D., M.P.H
    Prescription opioids / Julian Santaella-Tenorio, M.P.H., Luis E. Segura, M.D., M.P.H., Vitor S. Tardelli, M.D., Leila M. Vaezazizi, M.D., Silvia S. Martins, M.D., Ph. D
    Heroin and other illicit opioids / Abhishek Jain, M.D., Carl E. Fisher, M.D
    Opioid overdose, toxicity, and poisoning / Nathaniel Kunzler, M.D., Katherine Devin, M.D., Kavita Babu, M.D., Edward W. Boyer, M.D., Ph. D
    The opioid epidemic : social determinants and health inequities / Leila M. Vaezazizi, M.D., Julie Netherland, Ph. D., Helena Hansen, M.D., Ph. D
    Opioid use disorder and medical comorbidity / Aaron Fox, M.D., M.S., Benjamin Hayes, M.D., M.P.H., M.S.W
    Opioid use disorder and psychiatric comorbidity / Marc W. Manseau, M.D., M.P.H., Michael T. Compton, M.D., M.P.H
    Assessment and care of patients with opioid use disorder / Snehal Bhatt, M.D., Bellelizabeth Foster, M.D., Vanessa Jacobsohn, M.D., Paul Romo, M.D., Tyler Seybert, M.D., Roxanne Russell, M.D
    Opioid withdrawal management and transition to treatment / Matisyahu Shulman, M.D., Arthur Robin Williams, M.D., M.B.E., Adam Bisaga, M.D
    Medication-assisted treatment for opioid use disorders / Leslie Marino, M.D., M.P.H., Sarah Oreck, M.D., M.S., Samuel Kolander, M.D
    Psychosocial approaches to the treatment of opioid use disorder / Karen L. Dugosh, Ph. D., David S. Festinger, Ph. D., S. Brook Burkley, M.S.W
    Harm reduction : caring for people who misuse opioids / Sharon Stancliff, M.D., Bethany Medley, M.S.W., William Mathews, R.P.A-C
    Prevention of opioid misuse and addiction through policy approaches / Tauheed Zaman, M.D., Leo Beletsky, J.D., M.P.H., Keith A. Hermanstyne, M.D., M.P.H., M.S.H.P.M
    Performance measures and quality improvement for the opioid epidemic / Arthur Robin Williams, M.D., M.B.E.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2019
  • Digital
    Guideline Writing Group, Systematic Review Group, Steering Committee on Practice Guidelines.
    Summary: "Alcohol use disorder (AUD) is a major public health problem in the United States. The estimated 12-month and lifetime prevalence values for AUD are 13.9% and 29.1%, respectively, with approximately half of individuals with lifetime AUD having a severe disorder. AUD and its sequelae also account for significant excess mortality and cost the United States more than $200 billion annually. Despite its high prevalence and numerous negative consequences, AUD remains undertreated. In fact, fewer than 1 in 10 individuals in the United States with a 12-month diagnosis of AUD receive any treatment. Nevertheless, effective and evidence-based interventions are available, and treatment is associated with reductions in the risk of relapse and AUD-associated mortality. The American Psychiatric Association Practice Guideline for the Pharmacological Treatment of Patients With Alcohol Use Disorder seeks to reduce these substantial psychosocial and public health consequences of AUD for millions of affected individuals. The guideline focuses specifically on evidence-based pharmacological treatments for AUD in outpatient settings and includes additional information on assessment and treatment planning, which are an integral part of using pharmacotherapy to treat AUD. In addition to reviewing the available evidence on the use of AUD pharmacotherapy, the guideline offers clear, concise, and actionable recommendation statements, each of which is given a rating that reflects the level of confidence that potential benefits of an intervention outweigh potential harms. The guideline provides guidance on implementing these recommendations into clinical practice, with the goal of improving quality of care and treatment outcomes of AUD"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2018
  • Digital
    American Psychiatric Association.
    Summary: "The lifetime prevalence of eating disorders in the United States is approximately 0.80% for anorexia nervosa, 0.28% for bulimia nervosa, and 0.85% for binge-eating disorder, although estimates can vary depending on the study location, sample demographic characteristics, case finding, and diagnostic approaches. Importantly, the lifetime burdens and psychosocial impairments associated with an eating disorder can be substantial because these illnesses typically have an onset in adolescence or early adulthood and can persist for decades. Since publication of the previous practice guideline on eating disorders, there have been many studies on psychotherapies for individuals with these diagnoses as well as some studies on pharmacotherapies. However, substantial gaps remain in the availability and use of evidence-based treatments for individuals with an eating disorder. The American Psychiatric Association Practice Guideline for the Treatment of Patients With Eating Disorders seeks to enhance the assessment, treatment, and quality of care in adolescents, young adults, and adults with an eating disorder. The guideline focuses on evidence-based pharmacological, psychotherapeutic, and other nonpharmacological treatments for eating disorders, primarily anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, and binge-eating disorder. In addition to statements related to assessment and treatment planning, which are an integral part of patient-centered care, the guideline provides direction on implementing these recommendations into clinical practice, with the goal of reducing the mortality, morbidity, and significant psychosocial and health consequences of these important psychiatric conditions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2023
  • Digital
    Guideline Writing Group, Systematic Review Group, Committee on Practice Guidelines.
    Summary: "The goal of this practice guideline is to improve the quality of care and treatment outcomes for patients with schizophrenia. The guideline aims to help clinicians optimize care for their patients by providing evidence-based statements that are intended to enhance knowledge and increase the appropriate use of evidence-based pharmacological and nonpharmacological treatments for schizophrenia. In addition, it includes statements related to assessment and treatment planning, which are an integral part of patient-centered care"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Rationale
    Scope of Document
    Overview of the Development Process
    Rating the Strengths of Guideline Statements and Supporting Research Evidence
    Proper Use of Guidelines
    Guideline Statement Summary
    Guideline Statements and Implementation
    Assessment and Determination of Treatment Plan
    Statement 1: Assessment of Possible Schizophrenia
    Implementation
    Balancing of Potential Benefits and Harms in Rating the Strength of the Guideline Statement
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2021
  • Digital
    Summary: The guideline offers clear, concise, and actionable recommendation statements to help clinicians to incorporate recommendations into clinical practice, with the goal of improving quality of care. Each recommendation is given a rating that reflects the level of confidence that potential benefits of an intervention outweigh potential harms.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2016
  • Digital
    [American Psychiatric Association].
    Summary: "American Psychiatric Association (APA) practice guidelines provide evidence-based recommendations for the assessment and treatment of psychiatric disorders. Practice guidelines are intended to assist in clinical decision making by presenting systematically developed patient care strategies in a standardized format." Includes a Legacy Collection with a caveat that materials may not be current.

    Contents:
    Recently Published (2016-) : Practice guideline for the pharmacological treatment of patients with alcohol use disorder
    Practice guideline on the use of antipsychotics to treat agitation or psychosis in patients with dementia
    Practice guidelines for the psychiatric evaluation of adults, third edition. Legacy Collection: Practice Guidelines and Quick Reference Guides (1999-2010).
    Psychiatric evaluation of adults, second edition
    Delirium
    Alzheimer's disease and other dementias
    HIV/AIDS
    Substance use disorders, second edition
    Schizophrenia, second edition
    Major depressive disorder, second edition
    Bipolar disorder, second edition
    Panic disorder
    Acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder
    Eating disorders, third edition
    Borderline personality disorder
    Suicidal behaviors
    Obsessive-compulsive disorder.
    Guideline Watch [updates].
    Acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder (2009)
    Alzheimer's disease and other dementias (2014)
    Bipolar disorder (2005)
    Borderline personality disorder (2005)
    Delirium (2004)
    Eating disorders (2012)
    HIV/AIDS (2006)
    Obsessive-compulsive disorder (2013)
    Schizophrenia (2009)
    Substance use disorders (2007)
  • Digital
    APA Work Group on Psychiatric Evaluation, Joel J. Silverman, M.D., chair [and others], Systematic Review Group, Laura J. Fochtmann, M.D. [and others], APA Steering Committee on Practice Guidelines, Michael J. Vergare, M.D., chair [and others], Assembly Area Liaisons, Daniel J. Anzia, M.D., chair of area liaisons (and Area IV) [and others].
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Naomi M. Simon, Eric Hollander, Barbara O. Rothbaum, Dan J. Stein.
    Summary: "This third edition of the Textbook of Anxiety Disorders, now entitled The American Textbook of Anxiety, Trauma, and OCD-Related Disorders to reflect the updated categories of DSM-5, provides a review and update on the relevant science and core transdiagnostic and disease specific principles as well as state-of-the-art reviews of psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy treatment approaches and their combinations. The organization of the volume and individual chapters has been retooled for DSM-5. Some chapters have been updated, and some have been completely rewritten. The contributors are a who's who of experts on anxiety, trauma, and OCD-related disorders. For specific conditions, including generalized anxiety disorder, social anxiety disorder, panic and agoraphobia, specific phobia, OCD, and trauma- and stressor-related conditions such as PTSD and persistent forms of grief, we include sections on phenomenology, pathogenesis, and treatment. Special sections focus on the issues of comorbidity, as well as specific issues for children and older adults. Transdiagnostic interventions, such as Barlow's Unified Protocol, are included as new chapters"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by Liza H. Gold, Richard l. Frierson.
    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction to forensic psychiatry. The expert witness
    Introduction to the legal system
    Ethics in forensic psychiatry
    Forensic evaluations and reports
    Psychological testing in forensic psychiatry
    Evaluation of malingering
    Neuroimaging and forensic psychiatry
    Part II: Legal regulation of psychiatry. Physician–patient relationship in psychiatry
    Legal regulation of psychiatric treatment
    Civil commitment
    Confidentiality in psychiatric practice
    Part III: Civil issues and litigation. Professional liability in psychiatric practice
    Competencies in civil law
    Personal injury
    Psychiatric evaluation in discrimination and harassment claims
    Fitness for duty, impaired professionals, and public safety
    Psychiatric disability
    Part IV: Criminal justice. Evaluation of competencies in the criminal justice system
    Evaluation of criminal responsibility
    Psychiatry and the death penalty
    Part V: Correctional psychiatry and sex offenders. Correctional settings and prisoner rights
    Psychiatric treatment in correctional settings
    Forensic assessment of sex offenders
    Part VI: Children and families. Forensic evaluations of children and adolescents
    Evaluations of juveniles in civil law
    Evaluations of juveniles in the criminal justice system
    Part VII: Special issues in forensic psychiatry. Suicide risk assessment
    Violence risk assessment
    Geriatric forensic psychiatry
    Forensic psychiatry and law enforcement
    Military forensic psychiatry
    The internet and telepsychiatry
    Research in forensic psychiatry.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2018
  • Digital
    edited by David C. Steffens, M.D., M.H.S., Kristina F. Zdanys, M.D.
    Summary: "This new edition retains the multidisciplinary and developmental perspectives of its predecessors, drawing on the knowledge not only of psychiatrists but also of relevant biomedical and behavioral experts in order to present the most comprehensive approach to patient care. It has been extensively updated to reflect the latest scientific advances and clinical developments in the field. Not only will readers find the most up-to-date information on phenomenology, diagnosis, and assessment of late-life mental disorders, they will also access the latest research on psychotherapeutic, psychopharmacological, and other somatic treatments. A dedicated chapter delves into the role of technology-including digital phenotyping, wearables, digital and web-based neurocognitive testing, and more-in aiding the geriatric mental health workforce and improving both access to care and ongoing support. Throughout the book, several sections examine the impact of COVID-19, and its attendant social isolation, on older adult mental health and the evolution of treatment approaches, revealing insights learned about telepsychiatry and care in nursing homes during the pandemic. Chapters on the legal and ethical factors in the psychiatric care of older adults close out the book, the most exhaustive on the topic. Extensively researched and with key points for ease of reference, this edition will equip both the scholar and the clinician with the current state of scientific understanding as well as the practical skills and knowledge base required for dealing with mental disorders in late life"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline [2023]
  • Digital
    edited by Charles B. Nemeroff, Natalie Rasgon, Alan F. Schatzberg, Stephen M. Strakowski.
    Summary: "The second edition of The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Mood Disorders is a book for a new generation of clinicians, trainees, and educators. Much has changed in the field of mood disorders in the 16 years since the first edition, and this new edition ably covers these changes, introducing new chapters on the epigenetics of mood disorders; the role of the immune system in these disorders; the contribution of childhood maltreatment to mood disorder risk, illness course, and treatment response; the management of treatment-resistant depression; and the emergence of promising investigational agents (most notably, ketamine and its relatives) with novel mechanisms of action in depression. Under new editorial direction and with a revised roster of expert contributors, The American Psychiatric Publishing Textbook of Mood Disorders, Second Edition, provides an authoritative, comprehensive, and evidence-based synthesis of current knowledge in the multifaceted field of mood disorders"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by David B. Arciniegas, Stuart C. Yudofsky, Robert E. Hales.
    Contents:
    Neurobiological bases of cognition
    Neuropsychiatric assessment
    Neuropsychological assessment
    Neuroimaging in neuropsychiatry
    Diagnostic neurophysiology in neuropsychiatry
    Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder
    Autism spectrum disorder throughout the life span
    Delirium
    Poisons and toxins
    Epilepsy and seizures
    Cerebrovascular disorders
    Traumatic brain injury
    Hypoxic-ischemic brain injury
    Infectious diseases of the central nervous system
    Brain tumors
    Endocrine disorders
    Sleep and sleep-wake disorders
    Multiple sclerosis
    Alcohol and other substance use disorders
    Alzheimer's disease
    Neurocognitive disorders with lewy bodies: DEMENTIA WITH LEWY BODIES AND PARKINSON'S DISEASE
    Huntingoton's Disease
    Frontotemporal dementia
    Psychosis
    Mood disorders
    Anxiety disorders.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Andrew E. Skodol, John M. Oldham.
    Summary: "The subject of personality-what makes us each unique and different from one another-has long been a topic of universal fascination. From a medical perspective, the empirical and clinical research on personality disorders has expanded with the advent of standardized diagnostic systems. This continuing and increased activity and progress in the field spurred the development of this third edition of The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Personality Disorders. With an emphasis on updating the information most relevant to clinicians, this new edition features contributions from established experts in the field as well as a new generation of scientists. Dozens of tables, illustrative figures, and real-life case examples summarize the vast data that continues to accumulate in five key areas: clinical concepts; risk factors for, and the etiology and impact of, personality disorders; treatment options across therapeutic modalities; special problems, populations, and settings, such as including suicidal behavior, substance use disorders, antisocial behavior, personality pathology in general medical settings, and personality disorders among active-duty military; and the usefulness of translational research in understanding the biopsychosocial nature of the personality disorders. This comprehensive textbook is a comprehensive and essential resource for clinicians looking to stay on the vanguard of a rapidly growing field"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Personality Disorders : Recent History and New Directions / John M. Oldham
    Theories of Personality and Personality Disorders / Drew Westen, Amy R. Kegley
    Articulating a Core Dimension of Personality Pathology / Leslie C. Morey, Donna S. Bender
    The Alternative DSM-5 Model for Personality Disorders / Andrew E. Skodol, Donna S. Bender, John M. Oldham
    Manifestations, Assessment, Diagnosis, and Differential Diagnosis / Andrew E. Skodol
    Prevalence, Sociodemographics, and Functional Impairment / Svenn Torgersen
    Development, Attachment, and Childhood Experiences : A Mentalizing Perspective / Peter Fonagy, Anthony W. Bateman, Nicolas Lorenzini, Patrick Luyten, Chloe Campbell
    Genetics and Neurobiology / Sharely Fred Torres, M. Mercedes Perez-Rodriguez, Antonia S. New, Daniel R. Rosell, Harold W. Koenigsberg
    Longitudinal Course and Outcomes / Carlos M. Grilo, Andrew E. Skodol
    Early Identification and Prevention of Personality Pathology : An AMPD-Informed Model of Clinical Staging / Carla Sharp, Sophie Kerr, Andrew M. Chanen
    Therapeutic Alliance / Donna S. Bender
    Psychodynamic Psychotherapies / Frank E. Yeomans, John F. Clarkin, Kenneth N. Levy
    Dialectical Behavior Therapy / Barbara Stanley, Beth S. Brodsky, Ilana Gratch
    Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy / J. Christopher Fowler, William H. Orme, John M. Hart
    Good Psychiatric Management : Generalist Treatments and Stepped Care for Borderline Personality Disorder / Lois W. Choi-Kain, Richard Hersh
    Group, Family, and Couples Therapies / John S. Ogrodniczuk, Amanda A. Uliaszek, Jay L. Lebow, David Kealy
    Pharmacological Management / Katharine J. Nelson, Sherab Tsheringla
    Collaborative Treatment / Victoria Winkeller, Abigail B. Schlesinger
    Boundary Issues / Thomas G. Gutheil
    Assessing and Managing Suicide Risk / Paul S. Links, Philippe Boursiquot, Madison Links
    Co-occurring Substance Use Disorders / Lauren R. Gorfinkel, Seth J. Prins, Jennifer C. Elliott, Jacquelyn L. Meyers, Deborah S. Hasin
    Antisocial Personality Disorder and Other Antisocial Behavior / Donald W. Black, Nancee S. Blum
    Personality Disorders in the Medical Setting / Sara Siris Nash, Jennifer Sotsky, Christian Hicks, Philip R. Muskin
    Personality Disorders in the Military Operational Environment / Ricky D. Malone, David M. Benedek
    Translational Research in Borderline Personality Disorder / Christian Schmahl, Sabine C. Herpertz.
  • Digital
    edited by Laura Weiss Roberts ; with foreword by Robert E. Hales, Stuart C. Yudofsky.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Alan F. Schatzberg, Charles B. Nemeroff.
    Summary: "The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychopharmacology is an indispensable and comprehensive resource for clinicians and trainees who prescribe psychotropic medications. Updated to reflect the new DSM-5 classification, this revised Fifth Edition maintains the user-friendly structure of its predecessors while offering in-depth coverage of the latest research in pharmacological principles, classes of drugs, and psychiatric disorders. Introductory chapters provide a theoretical grounding in clinical applications, with topics ranging from neurotransmitters to brain imaging in psychopharmacology. The bulk of the book is devoted to various classes of drugs, including antidepressants, anxiolytics, antipsychotics, mood stabilizers, and other agents, with each class divided into chapters on specific drugs -- either new or revised to include the latest findings and trends. Finally, the section on psychopharmacological treatment addresses evidence-based principles of clinical care for the full spectrum of mental disorders and conditions -- from depression to chronic pain -- as well as for specific populations and circumstances -- from children and adolescents to psychiatric emergencies -- offering information on topics such as medication selection, combination and maintenance dosing regimens, monitoring and management of side effects, and strategies for optimizing treatment response. The book's beneficial features are many: * The section on principles of pharmacology has been revised and reorganized to incorporate recent discoveries from the fields of neurobiology, genetics, brain imaging, and epidemiology.* History and discovery, structure--activity relationships, pharmacological profiles, pharmacokinetics and disposition, mechanisms of action, indications and efficacy, side effects and toxicology, and drug--drug interactions are addressed for each agent. This consistent structure places the desired information at the clinician's fingertips and facilitates study for trainees.* Coverage of drugs approved since the last edition is thorough, encompassing new antidepressants (e.g., vortioxetine), new antipsychotics (e.g., cariprazine), and agents on the clinical horizon (e.g., ketamine).* More than 180 tables and graphs present critically important data in an accessible way. A work of uncommon scientific rigor and clinical utility, The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychopharmacology provides state-of-the-art information on both the principles and the practice of psychopharmacological treatment of psychiatric disorders."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part I: Principles of pharmacology. Basic principles of molecular biology and genomics
    Neurotransmitters and receptors in psychiatric disorders
    Genetics and genomics
    Psychoneuroendocrinology
    Brain–immune system interactions
    Principles of pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics
    Brain imaging in psychopharmacology
    Part II: Classes of psychiatric treatments: antidepressants and anxiolytics. Monoamine oxidase inhibitors
    Tricyclic and tetracyclic drugs
    Fluoxetine
    Sertraline
    Paroxetine
    Fluvoxamine
    Citalopram and escitalopram
    Trazodone and nefazodone
    Vortioxetine
    Mirtazapine
    Bupropion
    Venlafaxine and desvenlafaxine
    Duloxetine, milnacipran, and levomilnacipran
    Ketamine
    Benzodiazepines
    Buspirone
    Antipsychotics. Classic antipsychotic medications
    Clozapine
    Olanzapine
    Quetiapine
    Risperidone and paliperidone
    Aripiprazole and brexpiprazole
    Ziprasidone
    Asenapine
    Iloperidone
    Lurasidone
    Cariprazine
    Drugs to treat extrapyramidal side effects
    Drugs for treatment of bipolar disorder. Lithium
    Valproate
    Carbamazepine, oxcarbazepine, and licarbazepine
    Gabapentin and pregabalin
    Lamotrigine
    Topiramate
    Other agents. Agents for cognitive disorders
    Sedative-hypnotics
    Psychostimulants and wakefulness-promoting agents
    Electroconvulsive therapy and other neuromodulation therapies
    Part III: Psychopharmacological treatment. Treatment of depression
    Treatment of bipolar disorder
    Treatment of anxiety and related disorders
    Treatment of schizophrenia
    Treatment of substance-related disorders
    Treatment of personality disorders
    Treatment of eating disorders
    Treatment of insomnia
    Treatment of chronic pain
    Treatment of child and adolescent disorders
    Treatment during late life
    Psychopharmacology during pregnancy and lactation
    Treatment of psychiatric emergencies
    Treatment of agitation and aggression in the elderly
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jeffrey A. Lieberman, T. Scott Stroup, Diana O. Perkins, Lisa B. Dixon.
    Summary: "Schizophrenia remains the most challenging of mental disorders confronted by psychiatrists and other mental health providers. Its primary manifestations-psychotic symptoms and cognitive impairment-profoundly affect the functioning of individuals with schizophrenia. This is an updated textbook covering the current state of knowledge about schizophrenia, including its causes, nature, presentation, and treatment. Chapters are written by a roster of experts in "-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology / Bernardo Ng, Stephanie Martinez, Steve Koh, Mauricio Tohen, James E. Gangwisch
    Natural History / Diana O. Perkins, Jeffrey A. Lieberman
    Psychopathology / Ryan E. Lawrence, Michael B. First
    Cultural Variations of Psychotic Disorders / Neil Krishan Aggarwal, Roberto Lewis-Fernández
    Causes / Matcheri S. Keshavan, Paulo L. Lizano, Seth W. Perry, Konasale M. Prasad, Julio Licinio
    Pathophysiological Theories / Donald C. Goff
    Neurobiology / L. Fredrik Jarskog, T. Wilson Woo
    Pharmacologic and Somatic Therapies / T. Scott Stroup, Diana O. Perkins, Daniel C. Javitt
    Psychosocial and Rehabilitative Therapies / Alice Medalia, Alice Saperstein, Paul Grant
    Co-occurring Disorders and Conditions / Sarah Pratt, Melanie Bennett, Mary F. Brunette
    Evidence-Based Models of Service Delivery / Michael T. Compton, Marc W. Manseau
    Person- and Family-Centered Care / Nev Jones, Lisa Dixon
  • Digital
    edited by Kathleen T. Brady, Frances R. Levin, Marc Galanter, Herbert D. Kleber.
    Summary: "Under the direction of a new lead editor, the sixth edition of The American Psychiatric Association (APA) Publishing Textbook of Substance Abuse Treatment has been completely revised and restructured and represents the cutting edge of research, practice, and policy in substance use disorder (SUD) treatment. A one-stop reference for evidence-based information on neurobiology, assessment, treatment, and research trends in SUDs, the book is an indispensable resource for trainees and veteran clinicians alike. Noteworthy additions are the new and substantive sections on public health issues and comorbidities, the expanded coverage of cannabis (encompassing neurobiology, the latest treatment approaches and harm-reduction strategies, and cannabis policy and public health perspectives), and the new chapters on digitally delivered therapies and behavioral addictive disorders (e.g., gambling disorder, compulsive internet use). As a complement to the contributions of distinguished luminaries in the field, dozens of new contributors have been added to the roster, for fresh and diverse viewpoints on topics old and new. The end result is a volume that is dynamic, comprehensive, and sure to become a classic. The most authoritative reference for clinicians and researchers in the field of addiction and an excellent manual for residents in psychiatry, general medicine, and allied fields, The APA Publishing Textbook of Substance Abuse Treatment will engage, enlighten, and inform"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Liza H. Gold, M.D., Richard L. Frierson, M.D..
    Summary: "This edition offers new perspectives on suicide at a variety of levels, such as the medical and social use of destigmatizing and more precise language. In addition, chapter authors review research that identifies additional suicide risk factors and their clinical implications. Current issues related to suicide are also discussed, including nonfatal, self-injurious behavior; physician-assisted suicide; and teaching suicide risk assessment and management during psychiatric residency. This third edition also examines the increased rates of suicide among specific populations, including children, adolescents, and college students, and makes recommendations regarding suicide risk management in these populations"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    PsychiatryOnline
    ProQuest Ebook Central
  • Digital
    edited by David C. Steffens, Dan G. Blazer, Mugdha E. Thakur.
    Contents:
    Demography and epidemiology of psychiatric disorders in late life / Celia F. Hybels, Ph.D., and Dan G. Blazer, M.D., Ph.D
    Physiological and clinical considerations of geriatric patient care / Robert M. Kaiser, M.D., M.H.Sc
    Genomics in geriatric psychiatry / Aaron M. Koenig, M.D., and Robert A. Sweet, M.D
    The psychiatric interview of older adults / Dan G. Blazer, M.D., Ph.D
    Use of the laboratory in the diagnostic workup of older adults / Sophia Wang, M.D., Mugdha Thakur, M.D., and P. Murali Doraiswamy, M.B.B.S., F.R.C.P
    Neuropsychological assessment of dementia / Kathleen A. Welsh-Bohmer, Ph.D., AND Deborah K. Attix, Ph.D
    Delirium / Jane S. Saczynski, Ph.D., AND Sharon K. Inouye, M.D., M.P.H
    Dementia and mild neurocognitive disorders / Eitan Z. Kimchi, M.D., and Constantine G. Lyketsos, M.D., M.H.S
    Mood disorders / David C. Steffens, M.D., M.H.Sc
    Bipolar disorder in late life / John L. Beyer, M.D
    Schizophrenia spectrum and other psychotic disorders / Jeanne E. Maglione, M.D., Ph.D., Ipsit V. Vahia, M.D., and Dilip V. Jeste M.D
    Anxiety disorders / Eric J. Lenze, M.D., Jan Mohlman, Ph.D., and Julie Loebach Wetherell, Ph.D
    Somatic symptom and related disorders / Marc E. Agronin, MD
    Sexuality and aging / Marc E. Agronin, MD
    Bereavement / Moria J. Smoski, Ph.D., Stephanie T. Jenal, Ph.D., and Larry W. Thompson, Ph.D
    Sleep and circadian rhythm disorders / Andrew D. Krystal, M.D., M.S., and Mugdha Thakur, M.D
    Alcohol and drug problems / Shahrzad Mavandadi, Ph.D., and David W. Oslin, M.D
    Personality disorders / Thomas E. Oxman, M.D
    Agitation and suspiciousness / Mugdha E. Thakur, M.D., and Lisa P. Gwyther, M.S.W
    Psychopharmacology / Benoit H. Mulsant, M.D., and Bruce G. Pollock, M.D., Ph.D
    Electroconvulsive therapy and other forms of brain stimulation / Richard D. Weiner, M.D., Ph.D., and Mustafa M. Husain, M.D
    Nutrition and physical activity / Kathryn Porter Starr, Ph.D., R.D., Connie Watkins Bales, Ph.D., R.D., and Martha E. Payne, Ph.D., R.D., M.P.H
    Individual and group psychotherapy / Moria J. Smoski, Ph.D., and Patricia A. Arean, Ph.D
    Working with families of older adults / Lisa P. Gwyther, M.S.W., and Diane E. Meglin, M.S.W
    Clinical psychiatry in the nursing home / Joel E. Streim, M.D.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2015
  • Print
    by Leonard Metcalf and Harrison P. Eddy.
    Contents:
    I. Design of sewers
    II. Construction of sewers
    III. Disposal of sewage.
    Digital Access Google Books 1916-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I585 .M58 v. 3 1916
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Elisabeth Rosenthal.
    Summary: "An award-winning New York Times reporter Dr. Elisabeth Rosenthal reveals the dangerous, expensive, and dysfunctional American healthcare system, and tells us exactly what we can do to solve its myriad of problems. It is well documented that our healthcare system has grave problems, but how, in only a matter of decades, did things get this bad? Dr. Elisabeth Rosenthal doesn't just explain the symptoms; she diagnoses and treats the disease itself. Rosenthal spells out in clear and practical terms exactly how to decode medical doublespeak, avoid the pitfalls of the pharmaceuticals racket, and get the care you and your family deserve. She takes you inside the doctor-patient relationship, explaining step by step the workings of a profession sorely lacking transparency. This is about what we can do, as individual patients, both to navigate a byzantine system and also to demand far-reaching reform. Breaking down the monolithic business into its individual industries--the hospitals, doctors, insurance companies, drug manufacturers--that together constitute our healthcare system, Rosenthal tells the story of the history of American medicine as never before. The situation is far worse than we think, and it has become like that much more recently than we realize. Hospitals, which are managed by business executives, behave like predatory lenders, hounding patients and seizing their homes. Research charities are in bed with big pharmaceutical companies, which surreptitiously profit from the donations made by working people. Americans are dying from routine medical conditions when affordable and straightforward solutions exist. Dr. Rosenthal explains for the first time how various social and financial incentives have encouraged a disastrous and immoral system to spring uporganicallyin a shockingly short span of time. The system is in tatters, but we can fight back. An American Sicknessis the frontline defense against a healthcare system that no longer has our well-being at heart"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Complaint: Unaffordable healthcare
    The age of insurance
    The age of hospitals
    The age of physicians
    The age of pharmaceuticals
    The age of medical devices
    The age of testing and ancillary services
    The age of contractors: Billing, coding, collections, and new medical businesses
    The age of research and good works for profit: The perversion of a noble enterprise
    The age of conglomerates
    The age of healthcare as pure business
    The age of the Affordable Care Act (ACA)
    The high price of patient complacency
    Doctors' bills
    Hospital bills
    Insurance costs
    Drug and medical device costs
    Bills for tests and ancillary services
    Better healthcare in a digital age
    Appendix A: Pricing/shopping tools
    Appendix B: Tools for vetting hospitals
    Appendix C: Glossary for medical bills and explanations of benefits
    Appendix D: Tools to help you figure out whether a test or a procedure is really necessary
    Appendix E: Templates for protest letters.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2017
    Limited to 4 simultaneous users
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA395.A3 R655 2017
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Jenny Telleria, Michel Tibayrenc.
    Contents:
    History of the discovery of the American Trypanosomiasis (Chagas disease) / Tania C. Araujo-Jorge, Jenny Telleria, and Jaime Rios Dalenz
    Chagas disease in pre-Colombian civilizations / Felipe Guhl and Arthur Aufderheide
    Social and medical aspects: morbidity and mortality in the general population / João Carlos Pinto Dias and Christopher John Schofield
    Current trends and future prospects for control of Chagas disease / Álvaro Moncayo and Antonio Carlos Silveira
    Geographical distribution of Chagas disease James S. Patterson and Felipe Guhl
    Classification and phylogeny of the triatominae / Maria Dolores Bargues, Chris Schofield and Jean-Pierre Dujardin
    Biology of Triatominae / François Noireau and Jean-Pierre Dujardin
    Population genetics of triatomines / Fernando Monteiro, Paula Marcet and Patricia Dorn
    Geographical distribution of triatominae vectors in America / David Gorla and François Noireau
    Control strategies against triatominae / D.E. Gorla, C. Ponce, J-P. Dujardin and C.J. Schofield
    Domestic and wild mammalian reservoirs / Ana Maria Jansen and André Luiz Rodrigues Roque
    Veterinary aspects and experimental studies / Marc Desquesnes and Marta de Lana
    Classification and phylogeny of Trypanosoma cruzi / Patrick B. Hamilton and Jamie R. Stevens
    Biology of Trypanosoma cruzi and biological diversity / Marta de Lana and Evandro Marques de Menezes Machado
    Biochemistry of Trypanosoma cruzi / Roberto Docampo and Silvia N.J. Moreno
    Ultrastructure of Trypanosoma cruzi and its interaction with host cells / Wanderley de Souza, Tecia Ulisses de Carvalho, Emile Santos Barrias
    Genetics of Trypanosoma cruzi
    Nuclear genome / Daniella C. Bartholomeu, Gregory A. Buck, Santuza M.R. Teixeira, Najib M.A. El- Sayed
    Kinetoplast genome / Jenny Telleria, Michal Svoboda
    Experimental and natural recombination in Trypanosoma cruzi / Michael D. Lewis, Martin S. Llewellyn, Matthew Yeo, Michael A. Miles
    Reticulate evolution in Trypanosoma cruzi: medical and epidemiological implications / Michel Tibayrenc, Christian Barnabé and Jenny Telleria
    Implications of Trypanosoma cruzi intraspecific diversity in the pathogenesis of Chagas Disease / Andrea Macedo and Marcela Segatto
    Vector transmission / Simone Frédérique Brenière, Christine Aznar and Mireille Hontebeyrie
    Maternal-fetal transmission of Trypanosoma cruzi / Yves Carlier and Carine Truyens
    Other forms of transmission / Mireille Hontebeyrie, Simone Frédérique Brenière and Christine Aznar
    Protective host response to parasite and its limitations / Carine Truyens and Yves Carlier
    Pathological consequences of host response to parasite / Mireille Hontebeyrie, Carine Truyens and Simone Frédérique Brenière
    Human genetic susceptibility to Chagas disease / Michel Tibayrenc
    Clinical phases and forms of Chagas' disease / Joffre Marcondes de Rezende, Anis Rassi, Alejandro O. Luquetti and Anis Rassi Junior
    Diagnosis of Trypanosoma cruzi infection / Alejandro O. Luquetti and Gabriel A. Schmuñis
    AIDS and Chagas' disease / Marcelo Corti, María F. Villafañe
    Treatment of Chagas disease / Werner Apt
    Vaccine development for Chagas disease / Angel Marcelo Padilla, Cecilia Perez Brandan, and Miguel Angel Basombrío.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Guoyao Wu, editor.
    Summary: This book explains about amino acids (AAs) which are not only building blocks of protein, but are also signaling molecules as well as regulators of gene expression and the protein phosphorylation cascade. Additionally, AAs are key precursors for syntheses of hormones and low-molecular-weight nitrogenous substances with each having enormous biological importance. For example, physiological concentrations of AA metabolites (e.g., nitric oxide, polyamines, glutathione, taurine, thyroid hormones, and serotonin) are required for cell functions. Growing evidence shows that humans and animals have dietary requirements for all proteinogenic AAs. Mammals, birds, and fish also have species- and age-dependent needs for some AA-related substances. However, elevated levels of other products (e.g., ammonia, homocysteine, H2S, and asymmetric dimethylarginine) are pathogenic factors for neurological disorders, oxidative stress, and cardiovascular disease. Thus, optimal amounts of AAs and their ratios in diets and circulation are crucial for whole-body homeostasis and health. Adequate provision of one or a mixture of functional AAs or metabolites may be beneficial for ameliorating health problems at various stages of the life cycle (e.g., fetal growth restriction, neonatal morbidity and mortality, weaning-associated intestinal dysfunction and wasting syndrome, obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, the metabolic syndrome, and infertility). Dietary supplementation of these nutrients can also optimize the efficiency of metabolic transformations to enhance muscle growth, milk production, and athletic performance, while preventing excess fat deposition and reducing adiposity. Therefore, functional AAs hold great promise in improving the growth, health, and well-being of individuals.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Regulation of Gene Expression by Amino Acids in Animal Cells
    Chapter 2: Amino acids in cell signaling: regulation and function
    Chapter 3: Amino Acids in Endoplasmic Reticulum Stress and Redox Signaling
    Chapter 4: Amino Acids in Autophagy: Regulation and Function
    Chapter 5: Oxidation of Energy Substrates in Tissues of Fish: Metabolic Significance and Implications for Gene Expression and Carcinogenesis
    Chapter 6: Arginine, Agmatine and Polyamines: Key Regulators of Conceptus Development in Mammals
    Chapter 7: Interorgan Metabolism of Glutamate and Glutamine in Poultry
    Chapter 8: Interorgan Metabolism of Amino Acids in Health and Disease
    Chapter 9: Amino Acids and Their Metabolites for Improving Human Exercising Performance
    Chapter 10: Role of L-Arginine in Nitric Oxide Synthesis and Health in Humans
    Chapter 11: Composition of Amino Acids in Foodstuffs for Humans and Animals
    Chapter 12: Dietary Intakes of Amino Acids and Other Nutrients by Adult Humans.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Guoyao Wu, editor.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Amino acids in intestinal physiology and health
    Amino acid metabolism in the liver: nutritional and physiological significance
    Amino acids in circulatory function and health
    Epithelial dysfunction in lung diseases: effects of amino acids and potential mechanisms
    Amino acid metabolism in the kidneys: nutritional and physiological significance
    Amino acids in health and endocrine function
    Amino Acids in Reproductive Nutrition and Health
    Impacts of amino acids on the intestinal defensive system
    Maternal nutrient restriction and skeletal muscle development: Consequences for postnatal health
    Metabolism of amino acids in the brain and their roles in regulating food intake
    Metabolism and functions of amino acids in the skin
    Metabolism and functions of amino acids in sense organs.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Guoyao Wu, editor.
    Summary: This edited volume comprehensively highlights recent advances in the metabolism, nutrition, physiology, and pathobiology of amino acids in companion (dogs and cats), zoo (carnivores, herbivores, and omnivores), and farm (including cattle, pigs, sheep, goats, chickens, fish, and crustaceans) animals. It enables readers to understand the crucial roles of amino acids and their metabolites in the growth, development, health, and metabolic diseases of these animals. Readers will learn from well-written chapters that amino acids are not only the building blocks of protein but are also signaling molecules and key regulators of gene expression and whole body homeostasis in companion, domestic, aquatic, and captive animals. The book also provides new and useful information on the optimum requirements of the animals for dietary amino acids. This knowledge will guide nutritional practices and daily management to improve the health and survival of all species and to enhance the productivity of livestock, poultry, and aquaculture enterprises worldwide to produce high-quality protein for human consumption. Editor of this volume is an internationally recognized expert in the biochemistry, nutrition and physiology of amino acids. He has over 38 years of experience with research and teaching at world-class universities in the area of amino acid biochemistry, nutrition, and physiology. He has published more than 625 papers in peer-reviewed journals, 62 chapters in books, and authored two text/reference books, with an H-index of 117 and more than 55,000 citations in Google Scholar. This publication is a useful reference for professionals and pet owners, as well as undergraduate and graduate students in animal science, aquaculture, zoology, wildlife, veterinary medicine, biology, biochemistry, food science, nutrition, pharmacology, physiology, toxicology, and other related disciplines. In addition, all chapters provide general and specific references to amino acid nutrition and metabolism for researchers and practitioners in animal agriculture, aquaculture, zoos, biomedicine, and plant science, and for government policy makers. Chapter 7 is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.

    Contents:
    One-carbon metabolism and development of the conceptus during pregnancy: Lessons from studies with sheep and pigs
    Cell-specific expression of enzymes for serine biosynthesis and glutaminolysis in farm animals
    Amino acids in beef cattle nutrition and production
    Amino acid nutrition and reproductive performance in ruminants
    Amino acids in the nutrition and production of sheep and goats
    Amino acids in swine nutrition and production
    Amino acid nutrition and metabolism in chickens
    Nutrition and functions of amino acids in fish
    Nutrition and functions of amino acids in aquatic crustaceans
    Amino acids in dog nutrition and health
    Amino acids in the nutrition, metabolism, and health of domestic cats
    Amino acid nutrition for optimum growth, development, reproductio